1% texinfo.tex -- TeX macros to handle Texinfo files. 2% 3% Load plain if necessary, i.e., if running under initex. 4\expandafter\ifx\csname fmtname\endcsname\relax\input plain\fi 5% 6\def\texinfoversion{2007-09-03.05} 7% 8% Copyright (C) 1985, 1986, 1988, 1990, 1991, 1992, 1993, 1994, 1995, 2007, 9% 1996, 1997, 1998, 1999, 2000, 2001, 2002, 2003, 2004, 2005, 2006, 10% 2007 Free Software Foundation, Inc. 11% 12% This texinfo.tex file is free software: you can redistribute it and/or 13% modify it under the terms of the GNU General Public License as 14% published by the Free Software Foundation, either version 3 of the 15% License, or (at your option) any later version. 16% 17% This texinfo.tex file is distributed in the hope that it will be 18% useful, but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty 19% of MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the GNU 20% General Public License for more details. 21% 22% You should have received a copy of the GNU General Public License 23% along with this program. If not, see <http://www.gnu.org/licenses/>. 24% 25% As a special exception, when this file is read by TeX when processing 26% a Texinfo source document, you may use the result without 27% restriction. (This has been our intent since Texinfo was invented.) 28% 29% Please try the latest version of texinfo.tex before submitting bug 30% reports; you can get the latest version from: 31% http://www.gnu.org/software/texinfo/ (the Texinfo home page), or 32% ftp://tug.org/tex/texinfo.tex 33% (and all CTAN mirrors, see http://www.ctan.org). 34% The texinfo.tex in any given distribution could well be out 35% of date, so if that's what you're using, please check. 36% 37% Send bug reports to bug-texinfo@gnu.org. Please include including a 38% complete document in each bug report with which we can reproduce the 39% problem. Patches are, of course, greatly appreciated. 40% 41% To process a Texinfo manual with TeX, it's most reliable to use the 42% texi2dvi shell script that comes with the distribution. For a simple 43% manual foo.texi, however, you can get away with this: 44% tex foo.texi 45% texindex foo.?? 46% tex foo.texi 47% tex foo.texi 48% dvips foo.dvi -o # or whatever; this makes foo.ps. 49% The extra TeX runs get the cross-reference information correct. 50% Sometimes one run after texindex suffices, and sometimes you need more 51% than two; texi2dvi does it as many times as necessary. 52% 53% It is possible to adapt texinfo.tex for other languages, to some 54% extent. You can get the existing language-specific files from the 55% full Texinfo distribution. 56% 57% The GNU Texinfo home page is http://www.gnu.org/software/texinfo. 58 59 60\message{Loading texinfo [version \texinfoversion]:} 61 62% If in a .fmt file, print the version number 63% and turn on active characters that we couldn't do earlier because 64% they might have appeared in the input file name. 65\everyjob{\message{[Texinfo version \texinfoversion]}% 66 \catcode`+=\active \catcode`\_=\active} 67 68 69\chardef\other=12 70 71% We never want plain's \outer definition of \+ in Texinfo. 72% For @tex, we can use \tabalign. 73\let\+ = \relax 74 75% Save some plain tex macros whose names we will redefine. 76\let\ptexb=\b 77\let\ptexbullet=\bullet 78\let\ptexc=\c 79\let\ptexcomma=\, 80\let\ptexdot=\. 81\let\ptexdots=\dots 82\let\ptexend=\end 83\let\ptexequiv=\equiv 84\let\ptexexclam=\! 85\let\ptexfootnote=\footnote 86\let\ptexgtr=> 87\let\ptexhat=^ 88\let\ptexi=\i 89\let\ptexindent=\indent 90\let\ptexinsert=\insert 91\let\ptexlbrace=\{ 92\let\ptexless=< 93\let\ptexnewwrite\newwrite 94\let\ptexnoindent=\noindent 95\let\ptexplus=+ 96\let\ptexrbrace=\} 97\let\ptexslash=\/ 98\let\ptexstar=\* 99\let\ptext=\t 100 101% If this character appears in an error message or help string, it 102% starts a new line in the output. 103\newlinechar = `^^J 104 105% Use TeX 3.0's \inputlineno to get the line number, for better error 106% messages, but if we're using an old version of TeX, don't do anything. 107% 108\ifx\inputlineno\thisisundefined 109 \let\linenumber = \empty % Pre-3.0. 110\else 111 \def\linenumber{l.\the\inputlineno:\space} 112\fi 113 114% Set up fixed words for English if not already set. 115\ifx\putwordAppendix\undefined \gdef\putwordAppendix{Appendix}\fi 116\ifx\putwordChapter\undefined \gdef\putwordChapter{Chapter}\fi 117\ifx\putwordfile\undefined \gdef\putwordfile{file}\fi 118\ifx\putwordin\undefined \gdef\putwordin{in}\fi 119\ifx\putwordIndexIsEmpty\undefined \gdef\putwordIndexIsEmpty{(Index is empty)}\fi 120\ifx\putwordIndexNonexistent\undefined \gdef\putwordIndexNonexistent{(Index is nonexistent)}\fi 121\ifx\putwordInfo\undefined \gdef\putwordInfo{Info}\fi 122\ifx\putwordInstanceVariableof\undefined \gdef\putwordInstanceVariableof{Instance Variable of}\fi 123\ifx\putwordMethodon\undefined \gdef\putwordMethodon{Method on}\fi 124\ifx\putwordNoTitle\undefined \gdef\putwordNoTitle{No Title}\fi 125\ifx\putwordof\undefined \gdef\putwordof{of}\fi 126\ifx\putwordon\undefined \gdef\putwordon{on}\fi 127\ifx\putwordpage\undefined \gdef\putwordpage{page}\fi 128\ifx\putwordsection\undefined \gdef\putwordsection{section}\fi 129\ifx\putwordSection\undefined \gdef\putwordSection{Section}\fi 130\ifx\putwordsee\undefined \gdef\putwordsee{see}\fi 131\ifx\putwordSee\undefined \gdef\putwordSee{See}\fi 132\ifx\putwordShortTOC\undefined \gdef\putwordShortTOC{Short Contents}\fi 133\ifx\putwordTOC\undefined \gdef\putwordTOC{Table of Contents}\fi 134% 135\ifx\putwordMJan\undefined \gdef\putwordMJan{January}\fi 136\ifx\putwordMFeb\undefined \gdef\putwordMFeb{February}\fi 137\ifx\putwordMMar\undefined \gdef\putwordMMar{March}\fi 138\ifx\putwordMApr\undefined \gdef\putwordMApr{April}\fi 139\ifx\putwordMMay\undefined \gdef\putwordMMay{May}\fi 140\ifx\putwordMJun\undefined \gdef\putwordMJun{June}\fi 141\ifx\putwordMJul\undefined \gdef\putwordMJul{July}\fi 142\ifx\putwordMAug\undefined \gdef\putwordMAug{August}\fi 143\ifx\putwordMSep\undefined \gdef\putwordMSep{September}\fi 144\ifx\putwordMOct\undefined \gdef\putwordMOct{October}\fi 145\ifx\putwordMNov\undefined \gdef\putwordMNov{November}\fi 146\ifx\putwordMDec\undefined \gdef\putwordMDec{December}\fi 147% 148\ifx\putwordDefmac\undefined \gdef\putwordDefmac{Macro}\fi 149\ifx\putwordDefspec\undefined \gdef\putwordDefspec{Special Form}\fi 150\ifx\putwordDefvar\undefined \gdef\putwordDefvar{Variable}\fi 151\ifx\putwordDefopt\undefined \gdef\putwordDefopt{User Option}\fi 152\ifx\putwordDeffunc\undefined \gdef\putwordDeffunc{Function}\fi 153 154% Since the category of space is not known, we have to be careful. 155\chardef\spacecat = 10 156\def\spaceisspace{\catcode`\ =\spacecat} 157 158% sometimes characters are active, so we need control sequences. 159\chardef\colonChar = `\: 160\chardef\commaChar = `\, 161\chardef\dashChar = `\- 162\chardef\dotChar = `\. 163\chardef\exclamChar= `\! 164\chardef\lquoteChar= `\` 165\chardef\questChar = `\? 166\chardef\rquoteChar= `\' 167\chardef\semiChar = `\; 168\chardef\underChar = `\_ 169 170% Ignore a token. 171% 172\def\gobble#1{} 173 174% The following is used inside several \edef's. 175\def\makecsname#1{\expandafter\noexpand\csname#1\endcsname} 176 177% Hyphenation fixes. 178\hyphenation{ 179 Flor-i-da Ghost-script Ghost-view Mac-OS Post-Script 180 ap-pen-dix bit-map bit-maps 181 data-base data-bases eshell fall-ing half-way long-est man-u-script 182 man-u-scripts mini-buf-fer mini-buf-fers over-view par-a-digm 183 par-a-digms rath-er rec-tan-gu-lar ro-bot-ics se-vere-ly set-up spa-ces 184 spell-ing spell-ings 185 stand-alone strong-est time-stamp time-stamps which-ever white-space 186 wide-spread wrap-around 187} 188 189% Margin to add to right of even pages, to left of odd pages. 190\newdimen\bindingoffset 191\newdimen\normaloffset 192\newdimen\pagewidth \newdimen\pageheight 193 194% For a final copy, take out the rectangles 195% that mark overfull boxes (in case you have decided 196% that the text looks ok even though it passes the margin). 197% 198\def\finalout{\overfullrule=0pt} 199 200% @| inserts a changebar to the left of the current line. It should 201% surround any changed text. This approach does *not* work if the 202% change spans more than two lines of output. To handle that, we would 203% have adopt a much more difficult approach (putting marks into the main 204% vertical list for the beginning and end of each change). 205% 206\def\|{% 207 % \vadjust can only be used in horizontal mode. 208 \leavevmode 209 % 210 % Append this vertical mode material after the current line in the output. 211 \vadjust{% 212 % We want to insert a rule with the height and depth of the current 213 % leading; that is exactly what \strutbox is supposed to record. 214 \vskip-\baselineskip 215 % 216 % \vadjust-items are inserted at the left edge of the type. So 217 % the \llap here moves out into the left-hand margin. 218 \llap{% 219 % 220 % For a thicker or thinner bar, change the `1pt'. 221 \vrule height\baselineskip width1pt 222 % 223 % This is the space between the bar and the text. 224 \hskip 12pt 225 }% 226 }% 227} 228 229% Sometimes it is convenient to have everything in the transcript file 230% and nothing on the terminal. We don't just call \tracingall here, 231% since that produces some useless output on the terminal. We also make 232% some effort to order the tracing commands to reduce output in the log 233% file; cf. trace.sty in LaTeX. 234% 235\def\gloggingall{\begingroup \globaldefs = 1 \loggingall \endgroup}% 236\def\loggingall{% 237 \tracingstats2 238 \tracingpages1 239 \tracinglostchars2 % 2 gives us more in etex 240 \tracingparagraphs1 241 \tracingoutput1 242 \tracingmacros2 243 \tracingrestores1 244 \showboxbreadth\maxdimen \showboxdepth\maxdimen 245 \ifx\eTeXversion\undefined\else % etex gives us more logging 246 \tracingscantokens1 247 \tracingifs1 248 \tracinggroups1 249 \tracingnesting2 250 \tracingassigns1 251 \fi 252 \tracingcommands3 % 3 gives us more in etex 253 \errorcontextlines16 254}% 255 256% add check for \lastpenalty to plain's definitions. If the last thing 257% we did was a \nobreak, we don't want to insert more space. 258% 259\def\smallbreak{\ifnum\lastpenalty<10000\par\ifdim\lastskip<\smallskipamount 260 \removelastskip\penalty-50\smallskip\fi\fi} 261\def\medbreak{\ifnum\lastpenalty<10000\par\ifdim\lastskip<\medskipamount 262 \removelastskip\penalty-100\medskip\fi\fi} 263\def\bigbreak{\ifnum\lastpenalty<10000\par\ifdim\lastskip<\bigskipamount 264 \removelastskip\penalty-200\bigskip\fi\fi} 265 266% For @cropmarks command. 267% Do @cropmarks to get crop marks. 268% 269\newif\ifcropmarks 270\let\cropmarks = \cropmarkstrue 271% 272% Dimensions to add cropmarks at corners. 273% Added by P. A. MacKay, 12 Nov. 1986 274% 275\newdimen\outerhsize \newdimen\outervsize % set by the paper size routines 276\newdimen\cornerlong \cornerlong=1pc 277\newdimen\cornerthick \cornerthick=.3pt 278\newdimen\topandbottommargin \topandbottommargin=.75in 279 280% Output a mark which sets \thischapter, \thissection and \thiscolor. 281% We dump everything together because we only have one kind of mark. 282% This works because we only use \botmark / \topmark, not \firstmark. 283% 284% A mark contains a subexpression of the \ifcase ... \fi construct. 285% \get*marks macros below extract the needed part using \ifcase. 286% 287% Another complication is to let the user choose whether \thischapter 288% (\thissection) refers to the chapter (section) in effect at the top 289% of a page, or that at the bottom of a page. The solution is 290% described on page 260 of The TeXbook. It involves outputting two 291% marks for the sectioning macros, one before the section break, and 292% one after. I won't pretend I can describe this better than DEK... 293\def\domark{% 294 \toks0=\expandafter{\lastchapterdefs}% 295 \toks2=\expandafter{\lastsectiondefs}% 296 \toks4=\expandafter{\prevchapterdefs}% 297 \toks6=\expandafter{\prevsectiondefs}% 298 \toks8=\expandafter{\lastcolordefs}% 299 \mark{% 300 \the\toks0 \the\toks2 301 \noexpand\or \the\toks4 \the\toks6 302 \noexpand\else \the\toks8 303 }% 304} 305% \topmark doesn't work for the very first chapter (after the title 306% page or the contents), so we use \firstmark there -- this gets us 307% the mark with the chapter defs, unless the user sneaks in, e.g., 308% @setcolor (or @url, or @link, etc.) between @contents and the very 309% first @chapter. 310\def\gettopheadingmarks{% 311 \ifcase0\topmark\fi 312 \ifx\thischapter\empty \ifcase0\firstmark\fi \fi 313} 314\def\getbottomheadingmarks{\ifcase1\botmark\fi} 315\def\getcolormarks{\ifcase2\topmark\fi} 316 317% Avoid "undefined control sequence" errors. 318\def\lastchapterdefs{} 319\def\lastsectiondefs{} 320\def\prevchapterdefs{} 321\def\prevsectiondefs{} 322\def\lastcolordefs{} 323 324% Main output routine. 325\chardef\PAGE = 255 326\output = {\onepageout{\pagecontents\PAGE}} 327 328\newbox\headlinebox 329\newbox\footlinebox 330 331% \onepageout takes a vbox as an argument. Note that \pagecontents 332% does insertions, but you have to call it yourself. 333\def\onepageout#1{% 334 \ifcropmarks \hoffset=0pt \else \hoffset=\normaloffset \fi 335 % 336 \ifodd\pageno \advance\hoffset by \bindingoffset 337 \else \advance\hoffset by -\bindingoffset\fi 338 % 339 % Do this outside of the \shipout so @code etc. will be expanded in 340 % the headline as they should be, not taken literally (outputting ''code). 341 \ifodd\pageno \getoddheadingmarks \else \getevenheadingmarks \fi 342 \setbox\headlinebox = \vbox{\let\hsize=\pagewidth \makeheadline}% 343 \ifodd\pageno \getoddfootingmarks \else \getevenfootingmarks \fi 344 \setbox\footlinebox = \vbox{\let\hsize=\pagewidth \makefootline}% 345 % 346 {% 347 % Have to do this stuff outside the \shipout because we want it to 348 % take effect in \write's, yet the group defined by the \vbox ends 349 % before the \shipout runs. 350 % 351 \indexdummies % don't expand commands in the output. 352 \normalturnoffactive % \ in index entries must not stay \, e.g., if 353 % the page break happens to be in the middle of an example. 354 % We don't want .vr (or whatever) entries like this: 355 % \entry{{\tt \indexbackslash }acronym}{32}{\code {\acronym}} 356 % "\acronym" won't work when it's read back in; 357 % it needs to be 358 % {\code {{\tt \backslashcurfont }acronym} 359 \shipout\vbox{% 360 % Do this early so pdf references go to the beginning of the page. 361 \ifpdfmakepagedest \pdfdest name{\the\pageno} xyz\fi 362 % 363 \ifcropmarks \vbox to \outervsize\bgroup 364 \hsize = \outerhsize 365 \vskip-\topandbottommargin 366 \vtop to0pt{% 367 \line{\ewtop\hfil\ewtop}% 368 \nointerlineskip 369 \line{% 370 \vbox{\moveleft\cornerthick\nstop}% 371 \hfill 372 \vbox{\moveright\cornerthick\nstop}% 373 }% 374 \vss}% 375 \vskip\topandbottommargin 376 \line\bgroup 377 \hfil % center the page within the outer (page) hsize. 378 \ifodd\pageno\hskip\bindingoffset\fi 379 \vbox\bgroup 380 \fi 381 % 382 \unvbox\headlinebox 383 \pagebody{#1}% 384 \ifdim\ht\footlinebox > 0pt 385 % Only leave this space if the footline is nonempty. 386 % (We lessened \vsize for it in \oddfootingyyy.) 387 % The \baselineskip=24pt in plain's \makefootline has no effect. 388 \vskip 24pt 389 \unvbox\footlinebox 390 \fi 391 % 392 \ifcropmarks 393 \egroup % end of \vbox\bgroup 394 \hfil\egroup % end of (centering) \line\bgroup 395 \vskip\topandbottommargin plus1fill minus1fill 396 \boxmaxdepth = \cornerthick 397 \vbox to0pt{\vss 398 \line{% 399 \vbox{\moveleft\cornerthick\nsbot}% 400 \hfill 401 \vbox{\moveright\cornerthick\nsbot}% 402 }% 403 \nointerlineskip 404 \line{\ewbot\hfil\ewbot}% 405 }% 406 \egroup % \vbox from first cropmarks clause 407 \fi 408 }% end of \shipout\vbox 409 }% end of group with \indexdummies 410 \advancepageno 411 \ifnum\outputpenalty>-20000 \else\dosupereject\fi 412} 413 414\newinsert\margin \dimen\margin=\maxdimen 415 416\def\pagebody#1{\vbox to\pageheight{\boxmaxdepth=\maxdepth #1}} 417{\catcode`\@ =11 418\gdef\pagecontents#1{\ifvoid\topins\else\unvbox\topins\fi 419% marginal hacks, juha@viisa.uucp (Juha Takala) 420\ifvoid\margin\else % marginal info is present 421 \rlap{\kern\hsize\vbox to\z@{\kern1pt\box\margin \vss}}\fi 422\dimen@=\dp#1\relax \unvbox#1\relax 423\ifvoid\footins\else\vskip\skip\footins\footnoterule \unvbox\footins\fi 424\ifr@ggedbottom \kern-\dimen@ \vfil \fi} 425} 426 427% Here are the rules for the cropmarks. Note that they are 428% offset so that the space between them is truly \outerhsize or \outervsize 429% (P. A. MacKay, 12 November, 1986) 430% 431\def\ewtop{\vrule height\cornerthick depth0pt width\cornerlong} 432\def\nstop{\vbox 433 {\hrule height\cornerthick depth\cornerlong width\cornerthick}} 434\def\ewbot{\vrule height0pt depth\cornerthick width\cornerlong} 435\def\nsbot{\vbox 436 {\hrule height\cornerlong depth\cornerthick width\cornerthick}} 437 438% Parse an argument, then pass it to #1. The argument is the rest of 439% the input line (except we remove a trailing comment). #1 should be a 440% macro which expects an ordinary undelimited TeX argument. 441% 442\def\parsearg{\parseargusing{}} 443\def\parseargusing#1#2{% 444 \def\argtorun{#2}% 445 \begingroup 446 \obeylines 447 \spaceisspace 448 #1% 449 \parseargline\empty% Insert the \empty token, see \finishparsearg below. 450} 451 452{\obeylines % 453 \gdef\parseargline#1^^M{% 454 \endgroup % End of the group started in \parsearg. 455 \argremovecomment #1\comment\ArgTerm% 456 }% 457} 458 459% First remove any @comment, then any @c comment. 460\def\argremovecomment#1\comment#2\ArgTerm{\argremovec #1\c\ArgTerm} 461\def\argremovec#1\c#2\ArgTerm{\argcheckspaces#1\^^M\ArgTerm} 462 463% Each occurence of `\^^M' or `<space>\^^M' is replaced by a single space. 464% 465% \argremovec might leave us with trailing space, e.g., 466% @end itemize @c foo 467% This space token undergoes the same procedure and is eventually removed 468% by \finishparsearg. 469% 470\def\argcheckspaces#1\^^M{\argcheckspacesX#1\^^M \^^M} 471\def\argcheckspacesX#1 \^^M{\argcheckspacesY#1\^^M} 472\def\argcheckspacesY#1\^^M#2\^^M#3\ArgTerm{% 473 \def\temp{#3}% 474 \ifx\temp\empty 475 % Do not use \next, perhaps the caller of \parsearg uses it; reuse \temp: 476 \let\temp\finishparsearg 477 \else 478 \let\temp\argcheckspaces 479 \fi 480 % Put the space token in: 481 \temp#1 #3\ArgTerm 482} 483 484% If a _delimited_ argument is enclosed in braces, they get stripped; so 485% to get _exactly_ the rest of the line, we had to prevent such situation. 486% We prepended an \empty token at the very beginning and we expand it now, 487% just before passing the control to \argtorun. 488% (Similarily, we have to think about #3 of \argcheckspacesY above: it is 489% either the null string, or it ends with \^^M---thus there is no danger 490% that a pair of braces would be stripped. 491% 492% But first, we have to remove the trailing space token. 493% 494\def\finishparsearg#1 \ArgTerm{\expandafter\argtorun\expandafter{#1}} 495 496% \parseargdef\foo{...} 497% is roughly equivalent to 498% \def\foo{\parsearg\Xfoo} 499% \def\Xfoo#1{...} 500% 501% Actually, I use \csname\string\foo\endcsname, ie. \\foo, as it is my 502% favourite TeX trick. --kasal, 16nov03 503 504\def\parseargdef#1{% 505 \expandafter \doparseargdef \csname\string#1\endcsname #1% 506} 507\def\doparseargdef#1#2{% 508 \def#2{\parsearg#1}% 509 \def#1##1% 510} 511 512% Several utility definitions with active space: 513{ 514 \obeyspaces 515 \gdef\obeyedspace{ } 516 517 % Make each space character in the input produce a normal interword 518 % space in the output. Don't allow a line break at this space, as this 519 % is used only in environments like @example, where each line of input 520 % should produce a line of output anyway. 521 % 522 \gdef\sepspaces{\obeyspaces\let =\tie} 523 524 % If an index command is used in an @example environment, any spaces 525 % therein should become regular spaces in the raw index file, not the 526 % expansion of \tie (\leavevmode \penalty \@M \ ). 527 \gdef\unsepspaces{\let =\space} 528} 529 530 531\def\flushcr{\ifx\par\lisppar \def\next##1{}\else \let\next=\relax \fi \next} 532 533% Define the framework for environments in texinfo.tex. It's used like this: 534% 535% \envdef\foo{...} 536% \def\Efoo{...} 537% 538% It's the responsibility of \envdef to insert \begingroup before the 539% actual body; @end closes the group after calling \Efoo. \envdef also 540% defines \thisenv, so the current environment is known; @end checks 541% whether the environment name matches. The \checkenv macro can also be 542% used to check whether the current environment is the one expected. 543% 544% Non-false conditionals (@iftex, @ifset) don't fit into this, so they 545% are not treated as enviroments; they don't open a group. (The 546% implementation of @end takes care not to call \endgroup in this 547% special case.) 548 549 550% At runtime, environments start with this: 551\def\startenvironment#1{\begingroup\def\thisenv{#1}} 552% initialize 553\let\thisenv\empty 554 555% ... but they get defined via ``\envdef\foo{...}'': 556\long\def\envdef#1#2{\def#1{\startenvironment#1#2}} 557\def\envparseargdef#1#2{\parseargdef#1{\startenvironment#1#2}} 558 559% Check whether we're in the right environment: 560\def\checkenv#1{% 561 \def\temp{#1}% 562 \ifx\thisenv\temp 563 \else 564 \badenverr 565 \fi 566} 567 568% Evironment mismatch, #1 expected: 569\def\badenverr{% 570 \errhelp = \EMsimple 571 \errmessage{This command can appear only \inenvironment\temp, 572 not \inenvironment\thisenv}% 573} 574\def\inenvironment#1{% 575 \ifx#1\empty 576 out of any environment% 577 \else 578 in environment \expandafter\string#1% 579 \fi 580} 581 582% @end foo executes the definition of \Efoo. 583% But first, it executes a specialized version of \checkenv 584% 585\parseargdef\end{% 586 \if 1\csname iscond.#1\endcsname 587 \else 588 % The general wording of \badenverr may not be ideal, but... --kasal, 06nov03 589 \expandafter\checkenv\csname#1\endcsname 590 \csname E#1\endcsname 591 \endgroup 592 \fi 593} 594 595\newhelp\EMsimple{Press RETURN to continue.} 596 597 598%% Simple single-character @ commands 599 600% @@ prints an @ 601% Kludge this until the fonts are right (grr). 602\def\@{{\tt\char64}} 603 604% This is turned off because it was never documented 605% and you can use @w{...} around a quote to suppress ligatures. 606%% Define @` and @' to be the same as ` and ' 607%% but suppressing ligatures. 608%\def\`{{`}} 609%\def\'{{'}} 610 611% Used to generate quoted braces. 612\def\mylbrace {{\tt\char123}} 613\def\myrbrace {{\tt\char125}} 614\let\{=\mylbrace 615\let\}=\myrbrace 616\begingroup 617 % Definitions to produce \{ and \} commands for indices, 618 % and @{ and @} for the aux/toc files. 619 \catcode`\{ = \other \catcode`\} = \other 620 \catcode`\[ = 1 \catcode`\] = 2 621 \catcode`\! = 0 \catcode`\\ = \other 622 !gdef!lbracecmd[\{]% 623 !gdef!rbracecmd[\}]% 624 !gdef!lbraceatcmd[@{]% 625 !gdef!rbraceatcmd[@}]% 626!endgroup 627 628% @comma{} to avoid , parsing problems. 629\let\comma = , 630 631% Accents: @, @dotaccent @ringaccent @ubaraccent @udotaccent 632% Others are defined by plain TeX: @` @' @" @^ @~ @= @u @v @H. 633\let\, = \c 634\let\dotaccent = \. 635\def\ringaccent#1{{\accent23 #1}} 636\let\tieaccent = \t 637\let\ubaraccent = \b 638\let\udotaccent = \d 639 640% Other special characters: @questiondown @exclamdown @ordf @ordm 641% Plain TeX defines: @AA @AE @O @OE @L (plus lowercase versions) @ss. 642\def\questiondown{?`} 643\def\exclamdown{!`} 644\def\ordf{\leavevmode\raise1ex\hbox{\selectfonts\lllsize \underbar{a}}} 645\def\ordm{\leavevmode\raise1ex\hbox{\selectfonts\lllsize \underbar{o}}} 646 647% Dotless i and dotless j, used for accents. 648\def\imacro{i} 649\def\jmacro{j} 650\def\dotless#1{% 651 \def\temp{#1}% 652 \ifx\temp\imacro \ptexi 653 \else\ifx\temp\jmacro \j 654 \else \errmessage{@dotless can be used only with i or j}% 655 \fi\fi 656} 657 658% The \TeX{} logo, as in plain, but resetting the spacing so that a 659% period following counts as ending a sentence. (Idea found in latex.) 660% 661\edef\TeX{\TeX \spacefactor=1000 } 662 663% @LaTeX{} logo. Not quite the same results as the definition in 664% latex.ltx, since we use a different font for the raised A; it's most 665% convenient for us to use an explicitly smaller font, rather than using 666% the \scriptstyle font (since we don't reset \scriptstyle and 667% \scriptscriptstyle). 668% 669\def\LaTeX{% 670 L\kern-.36em 671 {\setbox0=\hbox{T}% 672 \vbox to \ht0{\hbox{\selectfonts\lllsize A}\vss}}% 673 \kern-.15em 674 \TeX 675} 676 677% Be sure we're in horizontal mode when doing a tie, since we make space 678% equivalent to this in @example-like environments. Otherwise, a space 679% at the beginning of a line will start with \penalty -- and 680% since \penalty is valid in vertical mode, we'd end up putting the 681% penalty on the vertical list instead of in the new paragraph. 682{\catcode`@ = 11 683 % Avoid using \@M directly, because that causes trouble 684 % if the definition is written into an index file. 685 \global\let\tiepenalty = \@M 686 \gdef\tie{\leavevmode\penalty\tiepenalty\ } 687} 688 689% @: forces normal size whitespace following. 690\def\:{\spacefactor=1000 } 691 692% @* forces a line break. 693\def\*{\hfil\break\hbox{}\ignorespaces} 694 695% @/ allows a line break. 696\let\/=\allowbreak 697 698% @. is an end-of-sentence period. 699\def\.{.\spacefactor=\endofsentencespacefactor\space} 700 701% @! is an end-of-sentence bang. 702\def\!{!\spacefactor=\endofsentencespacefactor\space} 703 704% @? is an end-of-sentence query. 705\def\?{?\spacefactor=\endofsentencespacefactor\space} 706 707% @frenchspacing on|off says whether to put extra space after punctuation. 708% 709\def\onword{on} 710\def\offword{off} 711% 712\parseargdef\frenchspacing{% 713 \def\temp{#1}% 714 \ifx\temp\onword \plainfrenchspacing 715 \else\ifx\temp\offword \plainnonfrenchspacing 716 \else 717 \errhelp = \EMsimple 718 \errmessage{Unknown @frenchspacing option `\temp', must be on/off}% 719 \fi\fi 720} 721 722% @w prevents a word break. Without the \leavevmode, @w at the 723% beginning of a paragraph, when TeX is still in vertical mode, would 724% produce a whole line of output instead of starting the paragraph. 725\def\w#1{\leavevmode\hbox{#1}} 726 727% @group ... @end group forces ... to be all on one page, by enclosing 728% it in a TeX vbox. We use \vtop instead of \vbox to construct the box 729% to keep its height that of a normal line. According to the rules for 730% \topskip (p.114 of the TeXbook), the glue inserted is 731% max (\topskip - \ht (first item), 0). If that height is large, 732% therefore, no glue is inserted, and the space between the headline and 733% the text is small, which looks bad. 734% 735% Another complication is that the group might be very large. This can 736% cause the glue on the previous page to be unduly stretched, because it 737% does not have much material. In this case, it's better to add an 738% explicit \vfill so that the extra space is at the bottom. The 739% threshold for doing this is if the group is more than \vfilllimit 740% percent of a page (\vfilllimit can be changed inside of @tex). 741% 742\newbox\groupbox 743\def\vfilllimit{0.7} 744% 745\envdef\group{% 746 \ifnum\catcode`\^^M=\active \else 747 \errhelp = \groupinvalidhelp 748 \errmessage{@group invalid in context where filling is enabled}% 749 \fi 750 \startsavinginserts 751 % 752 \setbox\groupbox = \vtop\bgroup 753 % Do @comment since we are called inside an environment such as 754 % @example, where each end-of-line in the input causes an 755 % end-of-line in the output. We don't want the end-of-line after 756 % the `@group' to put extra space in the output. Since @group 757 % should appear on a line by itself (according to the Texinfo 758 % manual), we don't worry about eating any user text. 759 \comment 760} 761% 762% The \vtop produces a box with normal height and large depth; thus, TeX puts 763% \baselineskip glue before it, and (when the next line of text is done) 764% \lineskip glue after it. Thus, space below is not quite equal to space 765% above. But it's pretty close. 766\def\Egroup{% 767 % To get correct interline space between the last line of the group 768 % and the first line afterwards, we have to propagate \prevdepth. 769 \endgraf % Not \par, as it may have been set to \lisppar. 770 \global\dimen1 = \prevdepth 771 \egroup % End the \vtop. 772 % \dimen0 is the vertical size of the group's box. 773 \dimen0 = \ht\groupbox \advance\dimen0 by \dp\groupbox 774 % \dimen2 is how much space is left on the page (more or less). 775 \dimen2 = \pageheight \advance\dimen2 by -\pagetotal 776 % if the group doesn't fit on the current page, and it's a big big 777 % group, force a page break. 778 \ifdim \dimen0 > \dimen2 779 \ifdim \pagetotal < \vfilllimit\pageheight 780 \page 781 \fi 782 \fi 783 \box\groupbox 784 \prevdepth = \dimen1 785 \checkinserts 786} 787% 788% TeX puts in an \escapechar (i.e., `@') at the beginning of the help 789% message, so this ends up printing `@group can only ...'. 790% 791\newhelp\groupinvalidhelp{% 792group can only be used in environments such as @example,^^J% 793where each line of input produces a line of output.} 794 795% @need space-in-mils 796% forces a page break if there is not space-in-mils remaining. 797 798\newdimen\mil \mil=0.001in 799 800% Old definition--didn't work. 801%\parseargdef\need{\par % 802%% This method tries to make TeX break the page naturally 803%% if the depth of the box does not fit. 804%{\baselineskip=0pt% 805%\vtop to #1\mil{\vfil}\kern -#1\mil\nobreak 806%\prevdepth=-1000pt 807%}} 808 809\parseargdef\need{% 810 % Ensure vertical mode, so we don't make a big box in the middle of a 811 % paragraph. 812 \par 813 % 814 % If the @need value is less than one line space, it's useless. 815 \dimen0 = #1\mil 816 \dimen2 = \ht\strutbox 817 \advance\dimen2 by \dp\strutbox 818 \ifdim\dimen0 > \dimen2 819 % 820 % Do a \strut just to make the height of this box be normal, so the 821 % normal leading is inserted relative to the preceding line. 822 % And a page break here is fine. 823 \vtop to #1\mil{\strut\vfil}% 824 % 825 % TeX does not even consider page breaks if a penalty added to the 826 % main vertical list is 10000 or more. But in order to see if the 827 % empty box we just added fits on the page, we must make it consider 828 % page breaks. On the other hand, we don't want to actually break the 829 % page after the empty box. So we use a penalty of 9999. 830 % 831 % There is an extremely small chance that TeX will actually break the 832 % page at this \penalty, if there are no other feasible breakpoints in 833 % sight. (If the user is using lots of big @group commands, which 834 % almost-but-not-quite fill up a page, TeX will have a hard time doing 835 % good page breaking, for example.) However, I could not construct an 836 % example where a page broke at this \penalty; if it happens in a real 837 % document, then we can reconsider our strategy. 838 \penalty9999 839 % 840 % Back up by the size of the box, whether we did a page break or not. 841 \kern -#1\mil 842 % 843 % Do not allow a page break right after this kern. 844 \nobreak 845 \fi 846} 847 848% @br forces paragraph break (and is undocumented). 849 850\let\br = \par 851 852% @page forces the start of a new page. 853% 854\def\page{\par\vfill\supereject} 855 856% @exdent text.... 857% outputs text on separate line in roman font, starting at standard page margin 858 859% This records the amount of indent in the innermost environment. 860% That's how much \exdent should take out. 861\newskip\exdentamount 862 863% This defn is used inside fill environments such as @defun. 864\parseargdef\exdent{\hfil\break\hbox{\kern -\exdentamount{\rm#1}}\hfil\break} 865 866% This defn is used inside nofill environments such as @example. 867\parseargdef\nofillexdent{{\advance \leftskip by -\exdentamount 868 \leftline{\hskip\leftskip{\rm#1}}}} 869 870% @inmargin{WHICH}{TEXT} puts TEXT in the WHICH margin next to the current 871% paragraph. For more general purposes, use the \margin insertion 872% class. WHICH is `l' or `r'. 873% 874\newskip\inmarginspacing \inmarginspacing=1cm 875\def\strutdepth{\dp\strutbox} 876% 877\def\doinmargin#1#2{\strut\vadjust{% 878 \nobreak 879 \kern-\strutdepth 880 \vtop to \strutdepth{% 881 \baselineskip=\strutdepth 882 \vss 883 % if you have multiple lines of stuff to put here, you'll need to 884 % make the vbox yourself of the appropriate size. 885 \ifx#1l% 886 \llap{\ignorespaces #2\hskip\inmarginspacing}% 887 \else 888 \rlap{\hskip\hsize \hskip\inmarginspacing \ignorespaces #2}% 889 \fi 890 \null 891 }% 892}} 893\def\inleftmargin{\doinmargin l} 894\def\inrightmargin{\doinmargin r} 895% 896% @inmargin{TEXT [, RIGHT-TEXT]} 897% (if RIGHT-TEXT is given, use TEXT for left page, RIGHT-TEXT for right; 898% else use TEXT for both). 899% 900\def\inmargin#1{\parseinmargin #1,,\finish} 901\def\parseinmargin#1,#2,#3\finish{% not perfect, but better than nothing. 902 \setbox0 = \hbox{\ignorespaces #2}% 903 \ifdim\wd0 > 0pt 904 \def\lefttext{#1}% have both texts 905 \def\righttext{#2}% 906 \else 907 \def\lefttext{#1}% have only one text 908 \def\righttext{#1}% 909 \fi 910 % 911 \ifodd\pageno 912 \def\temp{\inrightmargin\righttext}% odd page -> outside is right margin 913 \else 914 \def\temp{\inleftmargin\lefttext}% 915 \fi 916 \temp 917} 918 919% @include file insert text of that file as input. 920% 921\def\include{\parseargusing\filenamecatcodes\includezzz} 922\def\includezzz#1{% 923 \pushthisfilestack 924 \def\thisfile{#1}% 925 {% 926 \makevalueexpandable 927 \def\temp{\input #1 }% 928 \expandafter 929 }\temp 930 \popthisfilestack 931} 932\def\filenamecatcodes{% 933 \catcode`\\=\other 934 \catcode`~=\other 935 \catcode`^=\other 936 \catcode`_=\other 937 \catcode`|=\other 938 \catcode`<=\other 939 \catcode`>=\other 940 \catcode`+=\other 941 \catcode`-=\other 942} 943 944\def\pushthisfilestack{% 945 \expandafter\pushthisfilestackX\popthisfilestack\StackTerm 946} 947\def\pushthisfilestackX{% 948 \expandafter\pushthisfilestackY\thisfile\StackTerm 949} 950\def\pushthisfilestackY #1\StackTerm #2\StackTerm {% 951 \gdef\popthisfilestack{\gdef\thisfile{#1}\gdef\popthisfilestack{#2}}% 952} 953 954\def\popthisfilestack{\errthisfilestackempty} 955\def\errthisfilestackempty{\errmessage{Internal error: 956 the stack of filenames is empty.}} 957 958\def\thisfile{} 959 960% @center line 961% outputs that line, centered. 962% 963\parseargdef\center{% 964 \ifhmode 965 \let\next\centerH 966 \else 967 \let\next\centerV 968 \fi 969 \next{\hfil \ignorespaces#1\unskip \hfil}% 970} 971\def\centerH#1{% 972 {% 973 \hfil\break 974 \advance\hsize by -\leftskip 975 \advance\hsize by -\rightskip 976 \line{#1}% 977 \break 978 }% 979} 980\def\centerV#1{\line{\kern\leftskip #1\kern\rightskip}} 981 982% @sp n outputs n lines of vertical space 983 984\parseargdef\sp{\vskip #1\baselineskip} 985 986% @comment ...line which is ignored... 987% @c is the same as @comment 988% @ignore ... @end ignore is another way to write a comment 989 990\def\comment{\begingroup \catcode`\^^M=\other% 991\catcode`\@=\other \catcode`\{=\other \catcode`\}=\other% 992\commentxxx} 993{\catcode`\^^M=\other \gdef\commentxxx#1^^M{\endgroup}} 994 995\let\c=\comment 996 997% @paragraphindent NCHARS 998% We'll use ems for NCHARS, close enough. 999% NCHARS can also be the word `asis' or `none'. 1000% We cannot feasibly implement @paragraphindent asis, though. 1001% 1002\def\asisword{asis} % no translation, these are keywords 1003\def\noneword{none} 1004% 1005\parseargdef\paragraphindent{% 1006 \def\temp{#1}% 1007 \ifx\temp\asisword 1008 \else 1009 \ifx\temp\noneword 1010 \defaultparindent = 0pt 1011 \else 1012 \defaultparindent = #1em 1013 \fi 1014 \fi 1015 \parindent = \defaultparindent 1016} 1017 1018% @exampleindent NCHARS 1019% We'll use ems for NCHARS like @paragraphindent. 1020% It seems @exampleindent asis isn't necessary, but 1021% I preserve it to make it similar to @paragraphindent. 1022\parseargdef\exampleindent{% 1023 \def\temp{#1}% 1024 \ifx\temp\asisword 1025 \else 1026 \ifx\temp\noneword 1027 \lispnarrowing = 0pt 1028 \else 1029 \lispnarrowing = #1em 1030 \fi 1031 \fi 1032} 1033 1034% @firstparagraphindent WORD 1035% If WORD is `none', then suppress indentation of the first paragraph 1036% after a section heading. If WORD is `insert', then do indent at such 1037% paragraphs. 1038% 1039% The paragraph indentation is suppressed or not by calling 1040% \suppressfirstparagraphindent, which the sectioning commands do. 1041% We switch the definition of this back and forth according to WORD. 1042% By default, we suppress indentation. 1043% 1044\def\suppressfirstparagraphindent{\dosuppressfirstparagraphindent} 1045\def\insertword{insert} 1046% 1047\parseargdef\firstparagraphindent{% 1048 \def\temp{#1}% 1049 \ifx\temp\noneword 1050 \let\suppressfirstparagraphindent = \dosuppressfirstparagraphindent 1051 \else\ifx\temp\insertword 1052 \let\suppressfirstparagraphindent = \relax 1053 \else 1054 \errhelp = \EMsimple 1055 \errmessage{Unknown @firstparagraphindent option `\temp'}% 1056 \fi\fi 1057} 1058 1059% Here is how we actually suppress indentation. Redefine \everypar to 1060% \kern backwards by \parindent, and then reset itself to empty. 1061% 1062% We also make \indent itself not actually do anything until the next 1063% paragraph. 1064% 1065\gdef\dosuppressfirstparagraphindent{% 1066 \gdef\indent{% 1067 \restorefirstparagraphindent 1068 \indent 1069 }% 1070 \gdef\noindent{% 1071 \restorefirstparagraphindent 1072 \noindent 1073 }% 1074 \global\everypar = {% 1075 \kern -\parindent 1076 \restorefirstparagraphindent 1077 }% 1078} 1079 1080\gdef\restorefirstparagraphindent{% 1081 \global \let \indent = \ptexindent 1082 \global \let \noindent = \ptexnoindent 1083 \global \everypar = {}% 1084} 1085 1086 1087% @asis just yields its argument. Used with @table, for example. 1088% 1089\def\asis#1{#1} 1090 1091% @math outputs its argument in math mode. 1092% 1093% One complication: _ usually means subscripts, but it could also mean 1094% an actual _ character, as in @math{@var{some_variable} + 1}. So make 1095% _ active, and distinguish by seeing if the current family is \slfam, 1096% which is what @var uses. 1097{ 1098 \catcode`\_ = \active 1099 \gdef\mathunderscore{% 1100 \catcode`\_=\active 1101 \def_{\ifnum\fam=\slfam \_\else\sb\fi}% 1102 } 1103} 1104% Another complication: we want \\ (and @\) to output a \ character. 1105% FYI, plain.tex uses \\ as a temporary control sequence (why?), but 1106% this is not advertised and we don't care. Texinfo does not 1107% otherwise define @\. 1108% 1109% The \mathchar is class=0=ordinary, family=7=ttfam, position=5C=\. 1110\def\mathbackslash{\ifnum\fam=\ttfam \mathchar"075C \else\backslash \fi} 1111% 1112\def\math{% 1113 \tex 1114 \mathunderscore 1115 \let\\ = \mathbackslash 1116 \mathactive 1117 $\finishmath 1118} 1119\def\finishmath#1{#1$\endgroup} % Close the group opened by \tex. 1120 1121% Some active characters (such as <) are spaced differently in math. 1122% We have to reset their definitions in case the @math was an argument 1123% to a command which sets the catcodes (such as @item or @section). 1124% 1125{ 1126 \catcode`^ = \active 1127 \catcode`< = \active 1128 \catcode`> = \active 1129 \catcode`+ = \active 1130 \gdef\mathactive{% 1131 \let^ = \ptexhat 1132 \let< = \ptexless 1133 \let> = \ptexgtr 1134 \let+ = \ptexplus 1135 } 1136} 1137 1138% @bullet and @minus need the same treatment as @math, just above. 1139\def\bullet{$\ptexbullet$} 1140\def\minus{$-$} 1141 1142% @dots{} outputs an ellipsis using the current font. 1143% We do .5em per period so that it has the same spacing in the cm 1144% typewriter fonts as three actual period characters; on the other hand, 1145% in other typewriter fonts three periods are wider than 1.5em. So do 1146% whichever is larger. 1147% 1148\def\dots{% 1149 \leavevmode 1150 \setbox0=\hbox{...}% get width of three periods 1151 \ifdim\wd0 > 1.5em 1152 \dimen0 = \wd0 1153 \else 1154 \dimen0 = 1.5em 1155 \fi 1156 \hbox to \dimen0{% 1157 \hskip 0pt plus.25fil 1158 .\hskip 0pt plus1fil 1159 .\hskip 0pt plus1fil 1160 .\hskip 0pt plus.5fil 1161 }% 1162} 1163 1164% @enddots{} is an end-of-sentence ellipsis. 1165% 1166\def\enddots{% 1167 \dots 1168 \spacefactor=\endofsentencespacefactor 1169} 1170 1171% @comma{} is so commas can be inserted into text without messing up 1172% Texinfo's parsing. 1173% 1174\let\comma = , 1175 1176% @refill is a no-op. 1177\let\refill=\relax 1178 1179% If working on a large document in chapters, it is convenient to 1180% be able to disable indexing, cross-referencing, and contents, for test runs. 1181% This is done with @novalidate (before @setfilename). 1182% 1183\newif\iflinks \linkstrue % by default we want the aux files. 1184\let\novalidate = \linksfalse 1185 1186% @setfilename is done at the beginning of every texinfo file. 1187% So open here the files we need to have open while reading the input. 1188% This makes it possible to make a .fmt file for texinfo. 1189\def\setfilename{% 1190 \fixbackslash % Turn off hack to swallow `\input texinfo'. 1191 \iflinks 1192 \tryauxfile 1193 % Open the new aux file. TeX will close it automatically at exit. 1194 \immediate\openout\auxfile=\jobname.aux 1195 \fi % \openindices needs to do some work in any case. 1196 \openindices 1197 \let\setfilename=\comment % Ignore extra @setfilename cmds. 1198 % 1199 % If texinfo.cnf is present on the system, read it. 1200 % Useful for site-wide @afourpaper, etc. 1201 \openin 1 texinfo.cnf 1202 \ifeof 1 \else \input texinfo.cnf \fi 1203 \closein 1 1204 % 1205 \comment % Ignore the actual filename. 1206} 1207 1208% Called from \setfilename. 1209% 1210\def\openindices{% 1211 \newindex{cp}% 1212 \newcodeindex{fn}% 1213 \newcodeindex{vr}% 1214 \newcodeindex{tp}% 1215 \newcodeindex{ky}% 1216 \newcodeindex{pg}% 1217} 1218 1219% @bye. 1220\outer\def\bye{\pagealignmacro\tracingstats=1\ptexend} 1221 1222 1223\message{pdf,} 1224% adobe `portable' document format 1225\newcount\tempnum 1226\newcount\lnkcount 1227\newtoks\filename 1228\newcount\filenamelength 1229\newcount\pgn 1230\newtoks\toksA 1231\newtoks\toksB 1232\newtoks\toksC 1233\newtoks\toksD 1234\newbox\boxA 1235\newcount\countA 1236\newif\ifpdf 1237\newif\ifpdfmakepagedest 1238 1239% when pdftex is run in dvi mode, \pdfoutput is defined (so \pdfoutput=1 1240% can be set). So we test for \relax and 0 as well as \undefined, 1241% borrowed from ifpdf.sty. 1242\ifx\pdfoutput\undefined 1243\else 1244 \ifx\pdfoutput\relax 1245 \else 1246 \ifcase\pdfoutput 1247 \else 1248 \pdftrue 1249 \fi 1250 \fi 1251\fi 1252 1253% PDF uses PostScript string constants for the names of xref targets, 1254% for display in the outlines, and in other places. Thus, we have to 1255% double any backslashes. Otherwise, a name like "\node" will be 1256% interpreted as a newline (\n), followed by o, d, e. Not good. 1257% http://www.ntg.nl/pipermail/ntg-pdftex/2004-July/000654.html 1258% (and related messages, the final outcome is that it is up to the TeX 1259% user to double the backslashes and otherwise make the string valid, so 1260% that's what we do). 1261 1262% double active backslashes. 1263% 1264{\catcode`\@=0 \catcode`\\=\active 1265 @gdef@activebackslashdouble{% 1266 @catcode`@\=@active 1267 @let\=@doublebackslash} 1268} 1269 1270% To handle parens, we must adopt a different approach, since parens are 1271% not active characters. hyperref.dtx (which has the same problem as 1272% us) handles it with this amazing macro to replace tokens, with minor 1273% changes for Texinfo. It is included here under the GPL by permission 1274% from the author, Heiko Oberdiek. 1275% 1276% #1 is the tokens to replace. 1277% #2 is the replacement. 1278% #3 is the control sequence with the string. 1279% 1280\def\HyPsdSubst#1#2#3{% 1281 \def\HyPsdReplace##1#1##2\END{% 1282 ##1% 1283 \ifx\\##2\\% 1284 \else 1285 #2% 1286 \HyReturnAfterFi{% 1287 \HyPsdReplace##2\END 1288 }% 1289 \fi 1290 }% 1291 \xdef#3{\expandafter\HyPsdReplace#3#1\END}% 1292} 1293\long\def\HyReturnAfterFi#1\fi{\fi#1} 1294 1295% #1 is a control sequence in which to do the replacements. 1296\def\backslashparens#1{% 1297 \xdef#1{#1}% redefine it as its expansion; the definition is simply 1298 % \lastnode when called from \setref -> \pdfmkdest. 1299 \HyPsdSubst{(}{\realbackslash(}{#1}% 1300 \HyPsdSubst{)}{\realbackslash)}{#1}% 1301} 1302 1303\newhelp\nopdfimagehelp{Texinfo supports .png, .jpg, .jpeg, and .pdf images 1304with PDF output, and none of those formats could be found. (.eps cannot 1305be supported due to the design of the PDF format; use regular TeX (DVI 1306output) for that.)} 1307 1308\ifpdf 1309 % 1310 % Color manipulation macros based on pdfcolor.tex. 1311 \def\cmykDarkRed{0.28 1 1 0.35} 1312 \def\cmykBlack{0 0 0 1} 1313 % 1314 \def\pdfsetcolor#1{\pdfliteral{#1 k}} 1315 % Set color, and create a mark which defines \thiscolor accordingly, 1316 % so that \makeheadline knows which color to restore. 1317 \def\setcolor#1{% 1318 \xdef\lastcolordefs{\gdef\noexpand\thiscolor{#1}}% 1319 \domark 1320 \pdfsetcolor{#1}% 1321 } 1322 % 1323 \def\maincolor{\cmykBlack} 1324 \pdfsetcolor{\maincolor} 1325 \edef\thiscolor{\maincolor} 1326 \def\lastcolordefs{} 1327 % 1328 \def\makefootline{% 1329 \baselineskip24pt 1330 \line{\pdfsetcolor{\maincolor}\the\footline}% 1331 } 1332 % 1333 \def\makeheadline{% 1334 \vbox to 0pt{% 1335 \vskip-22.5pt 1336 \line{% 1337 \vbox to8.5pt{}% 1338 % Extract \thiscolor definition from the marks. 1339 \getcolormarks 1340 % Typeset the headline with \maincolor, then restore the color. 1341 \pdfsetcolor{\maincolor}\the\headline\pdfsetcolor{\thiscolor}% 1342 }% 1343 \vss 1344 }% 1345 \nointerlineskip 1346 } 1347 % 1348 % 1349 \pdfcatalog{/PageMode /UseOutlines} 1350 % 1351 % #1 is image name, #2 width (might be empty/whitespace), #3 height (ditto). 1352 \def\dopdfimage#1#2#3{% 1353 \def\imagewidth{#2}\setbox0 = \hbox{\ignorespaces #2}% 1354 \def\imageheight{#3}\setbox2 = \hbox{\ignorespaces #3}% 1355 % 1356 % pdftex (and the PDF format) support .png, .jpg, .pdf (among 1357 % others). Let's try in that order. 1358 \let\pdfimgext=\empty 1359 \begingroup 1360 \openin 1 #1.png \ifeof 1 1361 \openin 1 #1.jpg \ifeof 1 1362 \openin 1 #1.jpeg \ifeof 1 1363 \openin 1 #1.JPG \ifeof 1 1364 \openin 1 #1.pdf \ifeof 1 1365 \errhelp = \nopdfimagehelp 1366 \errmessage{Could not find image file #1 for pdf}% 1367 \else \gdef\pdfimgext{pdf}% 1368 \fi 1369 \else \gdef\pdfimgext{JPG}% 1370 \fi 1371 \else \gdef\pdfimgext{jpeg}% 1372 \fi 1373 \else \gdef\pdfimgext{jpg}% 1374 \fi 1375 \else \gdef\pdfimgext{png}% 1376 \fi 1377 \closein 1 1378 \endgroup 1379 % 1380 % without \immediate, pdftex seg faults when the same image is 1381 % included twice. (Version 3.14159-pre-1.0-unofficial-20010704.) 1382 \ifnum\pdftexversion < 14 1383 \immediate\pdfimage 1384 \else 1385 \immediate\pdfximage 1386 \fi 1387 \ifdim \wd0 >0pt width \imagewidth \fi 1388 \ifdim \wd2 >0pt height \imageheight \fi 1389 \ifnum\pdftexversion<13 1390 #1.\pdfimgext 1391 \else 1392 {#1.\pdfimgext}% 1393 \fi 1394 \ifnum\pdftexversion < 14 \else 1395 \pdfrefximage \pdflastximage 1396 \fi} 1397 % 1398 \def\pdfmkdest#1{{% 1399 % We have to set dummies so commands such as @code, and characters 1400 % such as \, aren't expanded when present in a section title. 1401 \indexnofonts 1402 \turnoffactive 1403 \activebackslashdouble 1404 \makevalueexpandable 1405 \def\pdfdestname{#1}% 1406 \backslashparens\pdfdestname 1407 \safewhatsit{\pdfdest name{\pdfdestname} xyz}% 1408 }} 1409 % 1410 % used to mark target names; must be expandable. 1411 \def\pdfmkpgn#1{#1} 1412 % 1413 % by default, use a color that is dark enough to print on paper as 1414 % nearly black, but still distinguishable for online viewing. 1415 \def\urlcolor{\cmykDarkRed} 1416 \def\linkcolor{\cmykDarkRed} 1417 \def\endlink{\setcolor{\maincolor}\pdfendlink} 1418 % 1419 % Adding outlines to PDF; macros for calculating structure of outlines 1420 % come from Petr Olsak 1421 \def\expnumber#1{\expandafter\ifx\csname#1\endcsname\relax 0% 1422 \else \csname#1\endcsname \fi} 1423 \def\advancenumber#1{\tempnum=\expnumber{#1}\relax 1424 \advance\tempnum by 1 1425 \expandafter\xdef\csname#1\endcsname{\the\tempnum}} 1426 % 1427 % #1 is the section text, which is what will be displayed in the 1428 % outline by the pdf viewer. #2 is the pdf expression for the number 1429 % of subentries (or empty, for subsubsections). #3 is the node text, 1430 % which might be empty if this toc entry had no corresponding node. 1431 % #4 is the page number 1432 % 1433 \def\dopdfoutline#1#2#3#4{% 1434 % Generate a link to the node text if that exists; else, use the 1435 % page number. We could generate a destination for the section 1436 % text in the case where a section has no node, but it doesn't 1437 % seem worth the trouble, since most documents are normally structured. 1438 \def\pdfoutlinedest{#3}% 1439 \ifx\pdfoutlinedest\empty 1440 \def\pdfoutlinedest{#4}% 1441 \else 1442 % Doubled backslashes in the name. 1443 {\activebackslashdouble \xdef\pdfoutlinedest{#3}% 1444 \backslashparens\pdfoutlinedest}% 1445 \fi 1446 % 1447 % Also double the backslashes in the display string. 1448 {\activebackslashdouble \xdef\pdfoutlinetext{#1}% 1449 \backslashparens\pdfoutlinetext}% 1450 % 1451 \pdfoutline goto name{\pdfmkpgn{\pdfoutlinedest}}#2{\pdfoutlinetext}% 1452 } 1453 % 1454 \def\pdfmakeoutlines{% 1455 \begingroup 1456 % Thanh's hack / proper braces in bookmarks 1457 \edef\mylbrace{\iftrue \string{\else}\fi}\let\{=\mylbrace 1458 \edef\myrbrace{\iffalse{\else\string}\fi}\let\}=\myrbrace 1459 % 1460 % Read toc silently, to get counts of subentries for \pdfoutline. 1461 \def\numchapentry##1##2##3##4{% 1462 \def\thischapnum{##2}% 1463 \def\thissecnum{0}% 1464 \def\thissubsecnum{0}% 1465 }% 1466 \def\numsecentry##1##2##3##4{% 1467 \advancenumber{chap\thischapnum}% 1468 \def\thissecnum{##2}% 1469 \def\thissubsecnum{0}% 1470 }% 1471 \def\numsubsecentry##1##2##3##4{% 1472 \advancenumber{sec\thissecnum}% 1473 \def\thissubsecnum{##2}% 1474 }% 1475 \def\numsubsubsecentry##1##2##3##4{% 1476 \advancenumber{subsec\thissubsecnum}% 1477 }% 1478 \def\thischapnum{0}% 1479 \def\thissecnum{0}% 1480 \def\thissubsecnum{0}% 1481 % 1482 % use \def rather than \let here because we redefine \chapentry et 1483 % al. a second time, below. 1484 \def\appentry{\numchapentry}% 1485 \def\appsecentry{\numsecentry}% 1486 \def\appsubsecentry{\numsubsecentry}% 1487 \def\appsubsubsecentry{\numsubsubsecentry}% 1488 \def\unnchapentry{\numchapentry}% 1489 \def\unnsecentry{\numsecentry}% 1490 \def\unnsubsecentry{\numsubsecentry}% 1491 \def\unnsubsubsecentry{\numsubsubsecentry}% 1492 \readdatafile{toc}% 1493 % 1494 % Read toc second time, this time actually producing the outlines. 1495 % The `-' means take the \expnumber as the absolute number of 1496 % subentries, which we calculated on our first read of the .toc above. 1497 % 1498 % We use the node names as the destinations. 1499 \def\numchapentry##1##2##3##4{% 1500 \dopdfoutline{##1}{count-\expnumber{chap##2}}{##3}{##4}}% 1501 \def\numsecentry##1##2##3##4{% 1502 \dopdfoutline{##1}{count-\expnumber{sec##2}}{##3}{##4}}% 1503 \def\numsubsecentry##1##2##3##4{% 1504 \dopdfoutline{##1}{count-\expnumber{subsec##2}}{##3}{##4}}% 1505 \def\numsubsubsecentry##1##2##3##4{% count is always zero 1506 \dopdfoutline{##1}{}{##3}{##4}}% 1507 % 1508 % PDF outlines are displayed using system fonts, instead of 1509 % document fonts. Therefore we cannot use special characters, 1510 % since the encoding is unknown. For example, the eogonek from 1511 % Latin 2 (0xea) gets translated to a | character. Info from 1512 % Staszek Wawrykiewicz, 19 Jan 2004 04:09:24 +0100. 1513 % 1514 % xx to do this right, we have to translate 8-bit characters to 1515 % their "best" equivalent, based on the @documentencoding. Right 1516 % now, I guess we'll just let the pdf reader have its way. 1517 \indexnofonts 1518 \setupdatafile 1519 \catcode`\\=\active \otherbackslash 1520 \input \tocreadfilename 1521 \endgroup 1522 } 1523 % 1524 \def\skipspaces#1{\def\PP{#1}\def\D{|}% 1525 \ifx\PP\D\let\nextsp\relax 1526 \else\let\nextsp\skipspaces 1527 \ifx\p\space\else\addtokens{\filename}{\PP}% 1528 \advance\filenamelength by 1 1529 \fi 1530 \fi 1531 \nextsp} 1532 \def\getfilename#1{\filenamelength=0\expandafter\skipspaces#1|\relax} 1533 \ifnum\pdftexversion < 14 1534 \let \startlink \pdfannotlink 1535 \else 1536 \let \startlink \pdfstartlink 1537 \fi 1538 % make a live url in pdf output. 1539 \def\pdfurl#1{% 1540 \begingroup 1541 % it seems we really need yet another set of dummies; have not 1542 % tried to figure out what each command should do in the context 1543 % of @url. for now, just make @/ a no-op, that's the only one 1544 % people have actually reported a problem with. 1545 % 1546 \normalturnoffactive 1547 \def\@{@}% 1548 \let\/=\empty 1549 \makevalueexpandable 1550 \leavevmode\setcolor{\urlcolor}% 1551 \startlink attr{/Border [0 0 0]}% 1552 user{/Subtype /Link /A << /S /URI /URI (#1) >>}% 1553 \endgroup} 1554 \def\pdfgettoks#1.{\setbox\boxA=\hbox{\toksA={#1.}\toksB={}\maketoks}} 1555 \def\addtokens#1#2{\edef\addtoks{\noexpand#1={\the#1#2}}\addtoks} 1556 \def\adn#1{\addtokens{\toksC}{#1}\global\countA=1\let\next=\maketoks} 1557 \def\poptoks#1#2|ENDTOKS|{\let\first=#1\toksD={#1}\toksA={#2}} 1558 \def\maketoks{% 1559 \expandafter\poptoks\the\toksA|ENDTOKS|\relax 1560 \ifx\first0\adn0 1561 \else\ifx\first1\adn1 \else\ifx\first2\adn2 \else\ifx\first3\adn3 1562 \else\ifx\first4\adn4 \else\ifx\first5\adn5 \else\ifx\first6\adn6 1563 \else\ifx\first7\adn7 \else\ifx\first8\adn8 \else\ifx\first9\adn9 1564 \else 1565 \ifnum0=\countA\else\makelink\fi 1566 \ifx\first.\let\next=\done\else 1567 \let\next=\maketoks 1568 \addtokens{\toksB}{\the\toksD} 1569 \ifx\first,\addtokens{\toksB}{\space}\fi 1570 \fi 1571 \fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi 1572 \next} 1573 \def\makelink{\addtokens{\toksB}% 1574 {\noexpand\pdflink{\the\toksC}}\toksC={}\global\countA=0} 1575 \def\pdflink#1{% 1576 \startlink attr{/Border [0 0 0]} goto name{\pdfmkpgn{#1}} 1577 \setcolor{\linkcolor}#1\endlink} 1578 \def\done{\edef\st{\global\noexpand\toksA={\the\toksB}}\st} 1579\else 1580 \let\pdfmkdest = \gobble 1581 \let\pdfurl = \gobble 1582 \let\endlink = \relax 1583 \let\setcolor = \gobble 1584 \let\pdfsetcolor = \gobble 1585 \let\pdfmakeoutlines = \relax 1586\fi % \ifx\pdfoutput 1587 1588 1589\message{fonts,} 1590 1591% Change the current font style to #1, remembering it in \curfontstyle. 1592% For now, we do not accumulate font styles: @b{@i{foo}} prints foo in 1593% italics, not bold italics. 1594% 1595\def\setfontstyle#1{% 1596 \def\curfontstyle{#1}% not as a control sequence, because we are \edef'd. 1597 \csname ten#1\endcsname % change the current font 1598} 1599 1600% Select #1 fonts with the current style. 1601% 1602\def\selectfonts#1{\csname #1fonts\endcsname \csname\curfontstyle\endcsname} 1603 1604\def\rm{\fam=0 \setfontstyle{rm}} 1605\def\it{\fam=\itfam \setfontstyle{it}} 1606\def\sl{\fam=\slfam \setfontstyle{sl}} 1607\def\bf{\fam=\bffam \setfontstyle{bf}}\def\bfstylename{bf} 1608\def\tt{\fam=\ttfam \setfontstyle{tt}} 1609 1610% Texinfo sort of supports the sans serif font style, which plain TeX does not. 1611% So we set up a \sf. 1612\newfam\sffam 1613\def\sf{\fam=\sffam \setfontstyle{sf}} 1614\let\li = \sf % Sometimes we call it \li, not \sf. 1615 1616% We don't need math for this font style. 1617\def\ttsl{\setfontstyle{ttsl}} 1618 1619 1620% Default leading. 1621\newdimen\textleading \textleading = 13.2pt 1622 1623% Set the baselineskip to #1, and the lineskip and strut size 1624% correspondingly. There is no deep meaning behind these magic numbers 1625% used as factors; they just match (closely enough) what Knuth defined. 1626% 1627\def\lineskipfactor{.08333} 1628\def\strutheightpercent{.70833} 1629\def\strutdepthpercent {.29167} 1630% 1631% can get a sort of poor man's double spacing by redefining this. 1632\def\baselinefactor{1} 1633% 1634\def\setleading#1{% 1635 \dimen0 = #1\relax 1636 \normalbaselineskip = \baselinefactor\dimen0 1637 \normallineskip = \lineskipfactor\normalbaselineskip 1638 \normalbaselines 1639 \setbox\strutbox =\hbox{% 1640 \vrule width0pt height\strutheightpercent\baselineskip 1641 depth \strutdepthpercent \baselineskip 1642 }% 1643} 1644 1645% 1646% PDF CMaps. See also LaTeX's t1.cmap. 1647% 1648% \cmapOT1 1649\ifpdf 1650 \begingroup 1651 \catcode`\^^M=\active \def^^M{^^J}% Output line endings as the ^^J char. 1652 \catcode`\%=12 \immediate\pdfobj stream {%!PS-Adobe-3.0 Resource-CMap 1653%%DocumentNeededResources: ProcSet (CIDInit) 1654%%IncludeResource: ProcSet (CIDInit) 1655%%BeginResource: CMap (TeX-OT1-0) 1656%%Title: (TeX-OT1-0 TeX OT1 0) 1657%%Version: 1.000 1658%%EndComments 1659/CIDInit /ProcSet findresource begin 166012 dict begin 1661begincmap 1662/CIDSystemInfo 1663<< /Registry (TeX) 1664/Ordering (OT1) 1665/Supplement 0 1666>> def 1667/CMapName /TeX-OT1-0 def 1668/CMapType 2 def 16691 begincodespacerange 1670<00> <7F> 1671endcodespacerange 16728 beginbfrange 1673<00> <01> <0393> 1674<09> <0A> <03A8> 1675<23> <26> <0023> 1676<28> <3B> <0028> 1677<3F> <5B> <003F> 1678<5D> <5E> <005D> 1679<61> <7A> <0061> 1680<7B> <7C> <2013> 1681endbfrange 168240 beginbfchar 1683<02> <0398> 1684<03> <039B> 1685<04> <039E> 1686<05> <03A0> 1687<06> <03A3> 1688<07> <03D2> 1689<08> <03A6> 1690<0B> <00660066> 1691<0C> <00660069> 1692<0D> <0066006C> 1693<0E> <006600660069> 1694<0F> <00660066006C> 1695<10> <0131> 1696<11> <0237> 1697<12> <0060> 1698<13> <00B4> 1699<14> <02C7> 1700<15> <02D8> 1701<16> <00AF> 1702<17> <02DA> 1703<18> <00B8> 1704<19> <00DF> 1705<1A> <00E6> 1706<1B> <0153> 1707<1C> <00F8> 1708<1D> <00C6> 1709<1E> <0152> 1710<1F> <00D8> 1711<21> <0021> 1712<22> <201D> 1713<27> <2019> 1714<3C> <00A1> 1715<3D> <003D> 1716<3E> <00BF> 1717<5C> <201C> 1718<5F> <02D9> 1719<60> <2018> 1720<7D> <02DD> 1721<7E> <007E> 1722<7F> <00A8> 1723endbfchar 1724endcmap 1725CMapName currentdict /CMap defineresource pop 1726end 1727end 1728%%EndResource 1729%%EOF 1730 }\endgroup 1731 \expandafter\edef\csname cmapOT1\endcsname#1{% 1732 \pdffontattr#1{/ToUnicode \the\pdflastobj\space 0 R}% 1733 }% 1734% 1735% \cmapOT1IT 1736 \begingroup 1737 \catcode`\^^M=\active \def^^M{^^J}% Output line endings as the ^^J char. 1738 \catcode`\%=12 \immediate\pdfobj stream {%!PS-Adobe-3.0 Resource-CMap 1739%%DocumentNeededResources: ProcSet (CIDInit) 1740%%IncludeResource: ProcSet (CIDInit) 1741%%BeginResource: CMap (TeX-OT1IT-0) 1742%%Title: (TeX-OT1IT-0 TeX OT1IT 0) 1743%%Version: 1.000 1744%%EndComments 1745/CIDInit /ProcSet findresource begin 174612 dict begin 1747begincmap 1748/CIDSystemInfo 1749<< /Registry (TeX) 1750/Ordering (OT1IT) 1751/Supplement 0 1752>> def 1753/CMapName /TeX-OT1IT-0 def 1754/CMapType 2 def 17551 begincodespacerange 1756<00> <7F> 1757endcodespacerange 17588 beginbfrange 1759<00> <01> <0393> 1760<09> <0A> <03A8> 1761<25> <26> <0025> 1762<28> <3B> <0028> 1763<3F> <5B> <003F> 1764<5D> <5E> <005D> 1765<61> <7A> <0061> 1766<7B> <7C> <2013> 1767endbfrange 176842 beginbfchar 1769<02> <0398> 1770<03> <039B> 1771<04> <039E> 1772<05> <03A0> 1773<06> <03A3> 1774<07> <03D2> 1775<08> <03A6> 1776<0B> <00660066> 1777<0C> <00660069> 1778<0D> <0066006C> 1779<0E> <006600660069> 1780<0F> <00660066006C> 1781<10> <0131> 1782<11> <0237> 1783<12> <0060> 1784<13> <00B4> 1785<14> <02C7> 1786<15> <02D8> 1787<16> <00AF> 1788<17> <02DA> 1789<18> <00B8> 1790<19> <00DF> 1791<1A> <00E6> 1792<1B> <0153> 1793<1C> <00F8> 1794<1D> <00C6> 1795<1E> <0152> 1796<1F> <00D8> 1797<21> <0021> 1798<22> <201D> 1799<23> <0023> 1800<24> <00A3> 1801<27> <2019> 1802<3C> <00A1> 1803<3D> <003D> 1804<3E> <00BF> 1805<5C> <201C> 1806<5F> <02D9> 1807<60> <2018> 1808<7D> <02DD> 1809<7E> <007E> 1810<7F> <00A8> 1811endbfchar 1812endcmap 1813CMapName currentdict /CMap defineresource pop 1814end 1815end 1816%%EndResource 1817%%EOF 1818 }\endgroup 1819 \expandafter\edef\csname cmapOT1IT\endcsname#1{% 1820 \pdffontattr#1{/ToUnicode \the\pdflastobj\space 0 R}% 1821 }% 1822% 1823% \cmapOT1TT 1824 \begingroup 1825 \catcode`\^^M=\active \def^^M{^^J}% Output line endings as the ^^J char. 1826 \catcode`\%=12 \immediate\pdfobj stream {%!PS-Adobe-3.0 Resource-CMap 1827%%DocumentNeededResources: ProcSet (CIDInit) 1828%%IncludeResource: ProcSet (CIDInit) 1829%%BeginResource: CMap (TeX-OT1TT-0) 1830%%Title: (TeX-OT1TT-0 TeX OT1TT 0) 1831%%Version: 1.000 1832%%EndComments 1833/CIDInit /ProcSet findresource begin 183412 dict begin 1835begincmap 1836/CIDSystemInfo 1837<< /Registry (TeX) 1838/Ordering (OT1TT) 1839/Supplement 0 1840>> def 1841/CMapName /TeX-OT1TT-0 def 1842/CMapType 2 def 18431 begincodespacerange 1844<00> <7F> 1845endcodespacerange 18465 beginbfrange 1847<00> <01> <0393> 1848<09> <0A> <03A8> 1849<21> <26> <0021> 1850<28> <5F> <0028> 1851<61> <7E> <0061> 1852endbfrange 185332 beginbfchar 1854<02> <0398> 1855<03> <039B> 1856<04> <039E> 1857<05> <03A0> 1858<06> <03A3> 1859<07> <03D2> 1860<08> <03A6> 1861<0B> <2191> 1862<0C> <2193> 1863<0D> <0027> 1864<0E> <00A1> 1865<0F> <00BF> 1866<10> <0131> 1867<11> <0237> 1868<12> <0060> 1869<13> <00B4> 1870<14> <02C7> 1871<15> <02D8> 1872<16> <00AF> 1873<17> <02DA> 1874<18> <00B8> 1875<19> <00DF> 1876<1A> <00E6> 1877<1B> <0153> 1878<1C> <00F8> 1879<1D> <00C6> 1880<1E> <0152> 1881<1F> <00D8> 1882<20> <2423> 1883<27> <2019> 1884<60> <2018> 1885<7F> <00A8> 1886endbfchar 1887endcmap 1888CMapName currentdict /CMap defineresource pop 1889end 1890end 1891%%EndResource 1892%%EOF 1893 }\endgroup 1894 \expandafter\edef\csname cmapOT1TT\endcsname#1{% 1895 \pdffontattr#1{/ToUnicode \the\pdflastobj\space 0 R}% 1896 }% 1897\else 1898 \expandafter\let\csname cmapOT1\endcsname\gobble 1899 \expandafter\let\csname cmapOT1IT\endcsname\gobble 1900 \expandafter\let\csname cmapOT1TT\endcsname\gobble 1901\fi 1902 1903 1904% Set the font macro #1 to the font named #2, adding on the 1905% specified font prefix (normally `cm'). 1906% #3 is the font's design size, #4 is a scale factor, #5 is the CMap 1907% encoding (currently only OT1, OT1IT and OT1TT are allowed, pass 1908% empty to omit). 1909\def\setfont#1#2#3#4#5{% 1910 \font#1=\fontprefix#2#3 scaled #4 1911 \csname cmap#5\endcsname#1% 1912} 1913% This is what gets called when #5 of \setfont is empty. 1914\let\cmap\gobble 1915 1916 1917% Use cm as the default font prefix. 1918% To specify the font prefix, you must define \fontprefix 1919% before you read in texinfo.tex. 1920\ifx\fontprefix\undefined 1921\def\fontprefix{cm} 1922\fi 1923% Support font families that don't use the same naming scheme as CM. 1924\def\rmshape{r} 1925\def\rmbshape{bx} %where the normal face is bold 1926\def\bfshape{b} 1927\def\bxshape{bx} 1928\def\ttshape{tt} 1929\def\ttbshape{tt} 1930\def\ttslshape{sltt} 1931\def\itshape{ti} 1932\def\itbshape{bxti} 1933\def\slshape{sl} 1934\def\slbshape{bxsl} 1935\def\sfshape{ss} 1936\def\sfbshape{ss} 1937\def\scshape{csc} 1938\def\scbshape{csc} 1939 1940% Definitions for a main text size of 11pt. This is the default in 1941% Texinfo. 1942% 1943\def\definetextfontsizexi{% 1944% Text fonts (11.2pt, magstep1). 1945\def\textnominalsize{11pt} 1946\edef\mainmagstep{\magstephalf} 1947\setfont\textrm\rmshape{10}{\mainmagstep}{OT1} 1948\setfont\texttt\ttshape{10}{\mainmagstep}{OT1TT} 1949\setfont\textbf\bfshape{10}{\mainmagstep}{OT1} 1950\setfont\textit\itshape{10}{\mainmagstep}{OT1IT} 1951\setfont\textsl\slshape{10}{\mainmagstep}{OT1} 1952\setfont\textsf\sfshape{10}{\mainmagstep}{OT1} 1953\setfont\textsc\scshape{10}{\mainmagstep}{OT1} 1954\setfont\textttsl\ttslshape{10}{\mainmagstep}{OT1TT} 1955\font\texti=cmmi10 scaled \mainmagstep 1956\font\textsy=cmsy10 scaled \mainmagstep 1957\def\textecsize{1095} 1958 1959% A few fonts for @defun names and args. 1960\setfont\defbf\bfshape{10}{\magstep1}{OT1} 1961\setfont\deftt\ttshape{10}{\magstep1}{OT1TT} 1962\setfont\defttsl\ttslshape{10}{\magstep1}{OT1TT} 1963\def\df{\let\tentt=\deftt \let\tenbf = \defbf \let\tenttsl=\defttsl \bf} 1964 1965% Fonts for indices, footnotes, small examples (9pt). 1966\def\smallnominalsize{9pt} 1967\setfont\smallrm\rmshape{9}{1000}{OT1} 1968\setfont\smalltt\ttshape{9}{1000}{OT1TT} 1969\setfont\smallbf\bfshape{10}{900}{OT1} 1970\setfont\smallit\itshape{9}{1000}{OT1IT} 1971\setfont\smallsl\slshape{9}{1000}{OT1} 1972\setfont\smallsf\sfshape{9}{1000}{OT1} 1973\setfont\smallsc\scshape{10}{900}{OT1} 1974\setfont\smallttsl\ttslshape{10}{900}{OT1TT} 1975\font\smalli=cmmi9 1976\font\smallsy=cmsy9 1977\def\smallecsize{0900} 1978 1979% Fonts for small examples (8pt). 1980\def\smallernominalsize{8pt} 1981\setfont\smallerrm\rmshape{8}{1000}{OT1} 1982\setfont\smallertt\ttshape{8}{1000}{OT1TT} 1983\setfont\smallerbf\bfshape{10}{800}{OT1} 1984\setfont\smallerit\itshape{8}{1000}{OT1IT} 1985\setfont\smallersl\slshape{8}{1000}{OT1} 1986\setfont\smallersf\sfshape{8}{1000}{OT1} 1987\setfont\smallersc\scshape{10}{800}{OT1} 1988\setfont\smallerttsl\ttslshape{10}{800}{OT1TT} 1989\font\smalleri=cmmi8 1990\font\smallersy=cmsy8 1991\def\smallerecsize{0800} 1992 1993% Fonts for title page (20.4pt): 1994\def\titlenominalsize{20pt} 1995\setfont\titlerm\rmbshape{12}{\magstep3}{OT1} 1996\setfont\titleit\itbshape{10}{\magstep4}{OT1IT} 1997\setfont\titlesl\slbshape{10}{\magstep4}{OT1} 1998\setfont\titlett\ttbshape{12}{\magstep3}{OT1TT} 1999\setfont\titlettsl\ttslshape{10}{\magstep4}{OT1TT} 2000\setfont\titlesf\sfbshape{17}{\magstep1}{OT1} 2001\let\titlebf=\titlerm 2002\setfont\titlesc\scbshape{10}{\magstep4}{OT1} 2003\font\titlei=cmmi12 scaled \magstep3 2004\font\titlesy=cmsy10 scaled \magstep4 2005\def\authorrm{\secrm} 2006\def\authortt{\sectt} 2007\def\titleecsize{2074} 2008 2009% Chapter (and unnumbered) fonts (17.28pt). 2010\def\chapnominalsize{17pt} 2011\setfont\chaprm\rmbshape{12}{\magstep2}{OT1} 2012\setfont\chapit\itbshape{10}{\magstep3}{OT1IT} 2013\setfont\chapsl\slbshape{10}{\magstep3}{OT1} 2014\setfont\chaptt\ttbshape{12}{\magstep2}{OT1TT} 2015\setfont\chapttsl\ttslshape{10}{\magstep3}{OT1TT} 2016\setfont\chapsf\sfbshape{17}{1000}{OT1} 2017\let\chapbf=\chaprm 2018\setfont\chapsc\scbshape{10}{\magstep3}{OT1} 2019\font\chapi=cmmi12 scaled \magstep2 2020\font\chapsy=cmsy10 scaled \magstep3 2021\def\chapecsize{1728} 2022 2023% Section fonts (14.4pt). 2024\def\secnominalsize{14pt} 2025\setfont\secrm\rmbshape{12}{\magstep1}{OT1} 2026\setfont\secit\itbshape{10}{\magstep2}{OT1IT} 2027\setfont\secsl\slbshape{10}{\magstep2}{OT1} 2028\setfont\sectt\ttbshape{12}{\magstep1}{OT1TT} 2029\setfont\secttsl\ttslshape{10}{\magstep2}{OT1TT} 2030\setfont\secsf\sfbshape{12}{\magstep1}{OT1} 2031\let\secbf\secrm 2032\setfont\secsc\scbshape{10}{\magstep2}{OT1} 2033\font\seci=cmmi12 scaled \magstep1 2034\font\secsy=cmsy10 scaled \magstep2 2035\def\sececsize{1440} 2036 2037% Subsection fonts (13.15pt). 2038\def\ssecnominalsize{13pt} 2039\setfont\ssecrm\rmbshape{12}{\magstephalf}{OT1} 2040\setfont\ssecit\itbshape{10}{1315}{OT1IT} 2041\setfont\ssecsl\slbshape{10}{1315}{OT1} 2042\setfont\ssectt\ttbshape{12}{\magstephalf}{OT1TT} 2043\setfont\ssecttsl\ttslshape{10}{1315}{OT1TT} 2044\setfont\ssecsf\sfbshape{12}{\magstephalf}{OT1} 2045\let\ssecbf\ssecrm 2046\setfont\ssecsc\scbshape{10}{1315}{OT1} 2047\font\sseci=cmmi12 scaled \magstephalf 2048\font\ssecsy=cmsy10 scaled 1315 2049\def\ssececsize{1200} 2050 2051% Reduced fonts for @acro in text (10pt). 2052\def\reducednominalsize{10pt} 2053\setfont\reducedrm\rmshape{10}{1000}{OT1} 2054\setfont\reducedtt\ttshape{10}{1000}{OT1TT} 2055\setfont\reducedbf\bfshape{10}{1000}{OT1} 2056\setfont\reducedit\itshape{10}{1000}{OT1IT} 2057\setfont\reducedsl\slshape{10}{1000}{OT1} 2058\setfont\reducedsf\sfshape{10}{1000}{OT1} 2059\setfont\reducedsc\scshape{10}{1000}{OT1} 2060\setfont\reducedttsl\ttslshape{10}{1000}{OT1TT} 2061\font\reducedi=cmmi10 2062\font\reducedsy=cmsy10 2063\def\reducedecsize{1000} 2064 2065% reset the current fonts 2066\textfonts 2067\rm 2068} % end of 11pt text font size definitions 2069 2070 2071% Definitions to make the main text be 10pt Computer Modern, with 2072% section, chapter, etc., sizes following suit. This is for the GNU 2073% Press printing of the Emacs 22 manual. Maybe other manuals in the 2074% future. Used with @smallbook, which sets the leading to 12pt. 2075% 2076\def\definetextfontsizex{% 2077% Text fonts (10pt). 2078\def\textnominalsize{10pt} 2079\edef\mainmagstep{1000} 2080\setfont\textrm\rmshape{10}{\mainmagstep}{OT1} 2081\setfont\texttt\ttshape{10}{\mainmagstep}{OT1TT} 2082\setfont\textbf\bfshape{10}{\mainmagstep}{OT1} 2083\setfont\textit\itshape{10}{\mainmagstep}{OT1IT} 2084\setfont\textsl\slshape{10}{\mainmagstep}{OT1} 2085\setfont\textsf\sfshape{10}{\mainmagstep}{OT1} 2086\setfont\textsc\scshape{10}{\mainmagstep}{OT1} 2087\setfont\textttsl\ttslshape{10}{\mainmagstep}{OT1TT} 2088\font\texti=cmmi10 scaled \mainmagstep 2089\font\textsy=cmsy10 scaled \mainmagstep 2090\def\textecsize{1000} 2091 2092% A few fonts for @defun names and args. 2093\setfont\defbf\bfshape{10}{\magstephalf}{OT1} 2094\setfont\deftt\ttshape{10}{\magstephalf}{OT1TT} 2095\setfont\defttsl\ttslshape{10}{\magstephalf}{OT1TT} 2096\def\df{\let\tentt=\deftt \let\tenbf = \defbf \let\tenttsl=\defttsl \bf} 2097 2098% Fonts for indices, footnotes, small examples (9pt). 2099\def\smallnominalsize{9pt} 2100\setfont\smallrm\rmshape{9}{1000}{OT1} 2101\setfont\smalltt\ttshape{9}{1000}{OT1TT} 2102\setfont\smallbf\bfshape{10}{900}{OT1} 2103\setfont\smallit\itshape{9}{1000}{OT1IT} 2104\setfont\smallsl\slshape{9}{1000}{OT1} 2105\setfont\smallsf\sfshape{9}{1000}{OT1} 2106\setfont\smallsc\scshape{10}{900}{OT1} 2107\setfont\smallttsl\ttslshape{10}{900}{OT1TT} 2108\font\smalli=cmmi9 2109\font\smallsy=cmsy9 2110\def\smallecsize{0900} 2111 2112% Fonts for small examples (8pt). 2113\def\smallernominalsize{8pt} 2114\setfont\smallerrm\rmshape{8}{1000}{OT1} 2115\setfont\smallertt\ttshape{8}{1000}{OT1TT} 2116\setfont\smallerbf\bfshape{10}{800}{OT1} 2117\setfont\smallerit\itshape{8}{1000}{OT1IT} 2118\setfont\smallersl\slshape{8}{1000}{OT1} 2119\setfont\smallersf\sfshape{8}{1000}{OT1} 2120\setfont\smallersc\scshape{10}{800}{OT1} 2121\setfont\smallerttsl\ttslshape{10}{800}{OT1TT} 2122\font\smalleri=cmmi8 2123\font\smallersy=cmsy8 2124\def\smallerecsize{0800} 2125 2126% Fonts for title page (20.4pt): 2127\def\titlenominalsize{20pt} 2128\setfont\titlerm\rmbshape{12}{\magstep3}{OT1} 2129\setfont\titleit\itbshape{10}{\magstep4}{OT1IT} 2130\setfont\titlesl\slbshape{10}{\magstep4}{OT1} 2131\setfont\titlett\ttbshape{12}{\magstep3}{OT1TT} 2132\setfont\titlettsl\ttslshape{10}{\magstep4}{OT1TT} 2133\setfont\titlesf\sfbshape{17}{\magstep1}{OT1} 2134\let\titlebf=\titlerm 2135\setfont\titlesc\scbshape{10}{\magstep4}{OT1} 2136\font\titlei=cmmi12 scaled \magstep3 2137\font\titlesy=cmsy10 scaled \magstep4 2138\def\authorrm{\secrm} 2139\def\authortt{\sectt} 2140\def\titleecsize{2074} 2141 2142% Chapter fonts (14.4pt). 2143\def\chapnominalsize{14pt} 2144\setfont\chaprm\rmbshape{12}{\magstep1}{OT1} 2145\setfont\chapit\itbshape{10}{\magstep2}{OT1IT} 2146\setfont\chapsl\slbshape{10}{\magstep2}{OT1} 2147\setfont\chaptt\ttbshape{12}{\magstep1}{OT1TT} 2148\setfont\chapttsl\ttslshape{10}{\magstep2}{OT1TT} 2149\setfont\chapsf\sfbshape{12}{\magstep1}{OT1} 2150\let\chapbf\chaprm 2151\setfont\chapsc\scbshape{10}{\magstep2}{OT1} 2152\font\chapi=cmmi12 scaled \magstep1 2153\font\chapsy=cmsy10 scaled \magstep2 2154\def\chapecsize{1440} 2155 2156% Section fonts (12pt). 2157\def\secnominalsize{12pt} 2158\setfont\secrm\rmbshape{12}{1000}{OT1} 2159\setfont\secit\itbshape{10}{\magstep1}{OT1IT} 2160\setfont\secsl\slbshape{10}{\magstep1}{OT1} 2161\setfont\sectt\ttbshape{12}{1000}{OT1TT} 2162\setfont\secttsl\ttslshape{10}{\magstep1}{OT1TT} 2163\setfont\secsf\sfbshape{12}{1000}{OT1} 2164\let\secbf\secrm 2165\setfont\secsc\scbshape{10}{\magstep1}{OT1} 2166\font\seci=cmmi12 2167\font\secsy=cmsy10 scaled \magstep1 2168\def\sececsize{1200} 2169 2170% Subsection fonts (10pt). 2171\def\ssecnominalsize{10pt} 2172\setfont\ssecrm\rmbshape{10}{1000}{OT1} 2173\setfont\ssecit\itbshape{10}{1000}{OT1IT} 2174\setfont\ssecsl\slbshape{10}{1000}{OT1} 2175\setfont\ssectt\ttbshape{10}{1000}{OT1TT} 2176\setfont\ssecttsl\ttslshape{10}{1000}{OT1TT} 2177\setfont\ssecsf\sfbshape{10}{1000}{OT1} 2178\let\ssecbf\ssecrm 2179\setfont\ssecsc\scbshape{10}{1000}{OT1} 2180\font\sseci=cmmi10 2181\font\ssecsy=cmsy10 2182\def\ssececsize{1000} 2183 2184% Reduced fonts for @acro in text (9pt). 2185\def\reducednominalsize{9pt} 2186\setfont\reducedrm\rmshape{9}{1000}{OT1} 2187\setfont\reducedtt\ttshape{9}{1000}{OT1TT} 2188\setfont\reducedbf\bfshape{10}{900}{OT1} 2189\setfont\reducedit\itshape{9}{1000}{OT1IT} 2190\setfont\reducedsl\slshape{9}{1000}{OT1} 2191\setfont\reducedsf\sfshape{9}{1000}{OT1} 2192\setfont\reducedsc\scshape{10}{900}{OT1} 2193\setfont\reducedttsl\ttslshape{10}{900}{OT1TT} 2194\font\reducedi=cmmi9 2195\font\reducedsy=cmsy9 2196\def\reducedecsize{0900} 2197 2198% reduce space between paragraphs 2199\divide\parskip by 2 2200 2201% reset the current fonts 2202\textfonts 2203\rm 2204} % end of 10pt text font size definitions 2205 2206 2207% We provide the user-level command 2208% @fonttextsize 10 2209% (or 11) to redefine the text font size. pt is assumed. 2210% 2211\def\xword{10} 2212\def\xiword{11} 2213% 2214\parseargdef\fonttextsize{% 2215 \def\textsizearg{#1}% 2216 \wlog{doing @fonttextsize \textsizearg}% 2217 % 2218 % Set \globaldefs so that documents can use this inside @tex, since 2219 % makeinfo 4.8 does not support it, but we need it nonetheless. 2220 % 2221 \begingroup \globaldefs=1 2222 \ifx\textsizearg\xword \definetextfontsizex 2223 \else \ifx\textsizearg\xiword \definetextfontsizexi 2224 \else 2225 \errhelp=\EMsimple 2226 \errmessage{@fonttextsize only supports `10' or `11', not `\textsizearg'} 2227 \fi\fi 2228 \endgroup 2229} 2230 2231 2232% In order for the font changes to affect most math symbols and letters, 2233% we have to define the \textfont of the standard families. Since 2234% texinfo doesn't allow for producing subscripts and superscripts except 2235% in the main text, we don't bother to reset \scriptfont and 2236% \scriptscriptfont (which would also require loading a lot more fonts). 2237% 2238\def\resetmathfonts{% 2239 \textfont0=\tenrm \textfont1=\teni \textfont2=\tensy 2240 \textfont\itfam=\tenit \textfont\slfam=\tensl \textfont\bffam=\tenbf 2241 \textfont\ttfam=\tentt \textfont\sffam=\tensf 2242} 2243 2244% The font-changing commands redefine the meanings of \tenSTYLE, instead 2245% of just \STYLE. We do this because \STYLE needs to also set the 2246% current \fam for math mode. Our \STYLE (e.g., \rm) commands hardwire 2247% \tenSTYLE to set the current font. 2248% 2249% Each font-changing command also sets the names \lsize (one size lower) 2250% and \lllsize (three sizes lower). These relative commands are used in 2251% the LaTeX logo and acronyms. 2252% 2253% This all needs generalizing, badly. 2254% 2255\def\textfonts{% 2256 \let\tenrm=\textrm \let\tenit=\textit \let\tensl=\textsl 2257 \let\tenbf=\textbf \let\tentt=\texttt \let\smallcaps=\textsc 2258 \let\tensf=\textsf \let\teni=\texti \let\tensy=\textsy 2259 \let\tenttsl=\textttsl 2260 \def\curfontsize{text}% 2261 \def\lsize{reduced}\def\lllsize{smaller}% 2262 \resetmathfonts \setleading{\textleading}} 2263\def\titlefonts{% 2264 \let\tenrm=\titlerm \let\tenit=\titleit \let\tensl=\titlesl 2265 \let\tenbf=\titlebf \let\tentt=\titlett \let\smallcaps=\titlesc 2266 \let\tensf=\titlesf \let\teni=\titlei \let\tensy=\titlesy 2267 \let\tenttsl=\titlettsl 2268 \def\curfontsize{title}% 2269 \def\lsize{chap}\def\lllsize{subsec}% 2270 \resetmathfonts \setleading{25pt}} 2271\def\titlefont#1{{\titlefonts\rm #1}} 2272\def\chapfonts{% 2273 \let\tenrm=\chaprm \let\tenit=\chapit \let\tensl=\chapsl 2274 \let\tenbf=\chapbf \let\tentt=\chaptt \let\smallcaps=\chapsc 2275 \let\tensf=\chapsf \let\teni=\chapi \let\tensy=\chapsy 2276 \let\tenttsl=\chapttsl 2277 \def\curfontsize{chap}% 2278 \def\lsize{sec}\def\lllsize{text}% 2279 \resetmathfonts \setleading{19pt}} 2280\def\secfonts{% 2281 \let\tenrm=\secrm \let\tenit=\secit \let\tensl=\secsl 2282 \let\tenbf=\secbf \let\tentt=\sectt \let\smallcaps=\secsc 2283 \let\tensf=\secsf \let\teni=\seci \let\tensy=\secsy 2284 \let\tenttsl=\secttsl 2285 \def\curfontsize{sec}% 2286 \def\lsize{subsec}\def\lllsize{reduced}% 2287 \resetmathfonts \setleading{16pt}} 2288\def\subsecfonts{% 2289 \let\tenrm=\ssecrm \let\tenit=\ssecit \let\tensl=\ssecsl 2290 \let\tenbf=\ssecbf \let\tentt=\ssectt \let\smallcaps=\ssecsc 2291 \let\tensf=\ssecsf \let\teni=\sseci \let\tensy=\ssecsy 2292 \let\tenttsl=\ssecttsl 2293 \def\curfontsize{ssec}% 2294 \def\lsize{text}\def\lllsize{small}% 2295 \resetmathfonts \setleading{15pt}} 2296\let\subsubsecfonts = \subsecfonts 2297\def\reducedfonts{% 2298 \let\tenrm=\reducedrm \let\tenit=\reducedit \let\tensl=\reducedsl 2299 \let\tenbf=\reducedbf \let\tentt=\reducedtt \let\reducedcaps=\reducedsc 2300 \let\tensf=\reducedsf \let\teni=\reducedi \let\tensy=\reducedsy 2301 \let\tenttsl=\reducedttsl 2302 \def\curfontsize{reduced}% 2303 \def\lsize{small}\def\lllsize{smaller}% 2304 \resetmathfonts \setleading{10.5pt}} 2305\def\smallfonts{% 2306 \let\tenrm=\smallrm \let\tenit=\smallit \let\tensl=\smallsl 2307 \let\tenbf=\smallbf \let\tentt=\smalltt \let\smallcaps=\smallsc 2308 \let\tensf=\smallsf \let\teni=\smalli \let\tensy=\smallsy 2309 \let\tenttsl=\smallttsl 2310 \def\curfontsize{small}% 2311 \def\lsize{smaller}\def\lllsize{smaller}% 2312 \resetmathfonts \setleading{10.5pt}} 2313\def\smallerfonts{% 2314 \let\tenrm=\smallerrm \let\tenit=\smallerit \let\tensl=\smallersl 2315 \let\tenbf=\smallerbf \let\tentt=\smallertt \let\smallcaps=\smallersc 2316 \let\tensf=\smallersf \let\teni=\smalleri \let\tensy=\smallersy 2317 \let\tenttsl=\smallerttsl 2318 \def\curfontsize{smaller}% 2319 \def\lsize{smaller}\def\lllsize{smaller}% 2320 \resetmathfonts \setleading{9.5pt}} 2321 2322% Set the fonts to use with the @small... environments. 2323\let\smallexamplefonts = \smallfonts 2324 2325% About \smallexamplefonts. If we use \smallfonts (9pt), @smallexample 2326% can fit this many characters: 2327% 8.5x11=86 smallbook=72 a4=90 a5=69 2328% If we use \scriptfonts (8pt), then we can fit this many characters: 2329% 8.5x11=90+ smallbook=80 a4=90+ a5=77 2330% For me, subjectively, the few extra characters that fit aren't worth 2331% the additional smallness of 8pt. So I'm making the default 9pt. 2332% 2333% By the way, for comparison, here's what fits with @example (10pt): 2334% 8.5x11=71 smallbook=60 a4=75 a5=58 2335% 2336% I wish the USA used A4 paper. 2337% --karl, 24jan03. 2338 2339 2340% Set up the default fonts, so we can use them for creating boxes. 2341% 2342\definetextfontsizexi 2343 2344% Define these so they can be easily changed for other fonts. 2345\def\angleleft{$\langle$} 2346\def\angleright{$\rangle$} 2347 2348% Count depth in font-changes, for error checks 2349\newcount\fontdepth \fontdepth=0 2350 2351% Fonts for short table of contents. 2352\setfont\shortcontrm\rmshape{12}{1000}{OT1} 2353\setfont\shortcontbf\bfshape{10}{\magstep1}{OT1} % no cmb12 2354\setfont\shortcontsl\slshape{12}{1000}{OT1} 2355\setfont\shortconttt\ttshape{12}{1000}{OT1TT} 2356 2357%% Add scribe-like font environments, plus @l for inline lisp (usually sans 2358%% serif) and @ii for TeX italic 2359 2360% \smartitalic{ARG} outputs arg in italics, followed by an italic correction 2361% unless the following character is such as not to need one. 2362\def\smartitalicx{\ifx\next,\else\ifx\next-\else\ifx\next.\else 2363 \ptexslash\fi\fi\fi} 2364\def\smartslanted#1{{\ifusingtt\ttsl\sl #1}\futurelet\next\smartitalicx} 2365\def\smartitalic#1{{\ifusingtt\ttsl\it #1}\futurelet\next\smartitalicx} 2366 2367% like \smartslanted except unconditionally uses \ttsl. 2368% @var is set to this for defun arguments. 2369\def\ttslanted#1{{\ttsl #1}\futurelet\next\smartitalicx} 2370 2371% like \smartslanted except unconditionally use \sl. We never want 2372% ttsl for book titles, do we? 2373\def\cite#1{{\sl #1}\futurelet\next\smartitalicx} 2374 2375\let\i=\smartitalic 2376\let\slanted=\smartslanted 2377\let\var=\smartslanted 2378\let\dfn=\smartslanted 2379\let\emph=\smartitalic 2380 2381% @b, explicit bold. 2382\def\b#1{{\bf #1}} 2383\let\strong=\b 2384 2385% @sansserif, explicit sans. 2386\def\sansserif#1{{\sf #1}} 2387 2388% We can't just use \exhyphenpenalty, because that only has effect at 2389% the end of a paragraph. Restore normal hyphenation at the end of the 2390% group within which \nohyphenation is presumably called. 2391% 2392\def\nohyphenation{\hyphenchar\font = -1 \aftergroup\restorehyphenation} 2393\def\restorehyphenation{\hyphenchar\font = `- } 2394 2395% Set sfcode to normal for the chars that usually have another value. 2396% Can't use plain's \frenchspacing because it uses the `\x notation, and 2397% sometimes \x has an active definition that messes things up. 2398% 2399\catcode`@=11 2400 \def\plainfrenchspacing{% 2401 \sfcode\dotChar =\@m \sfcode\questChar=\@m \sfcode\exclamChar=\@m 2402 \sfcode\colonChar=\@m \sfcode\semiChar =\@m \sfcode\commaChar =\@m 2403 \def\endofsentencespacefactor{1000}% for @. and friends 2404 } 2405 \def\plainnonfrenchspacing{% 2406 \sfcode`\.3000\sfcode`\?3000\sfcode`\!3000 2407 \sfcode`\:2000\sfcode`\;1500\sfcode`\,1250 2408 \def\endofsentencespacefactor{3000}% for @. and friends 2409 } 2410\catcode`@=\other 2411\def\endofsentencespacefactor{3000}% default 2412 2413\def\t#1{% 2414 {\tt \rawbackslash \plainfrenchspacing #1}% 2415 \null 2416} 2417\def\samp#1{`\tclose{#1}'\null} 2418\setfont\keyrm\rmshape{8}{1000}{OT1} 2419\font\keysy=cmsy9 2420\def\key#1{{\keyrm\textfont2=\keysy \leavevmode\hbox{% 2421 \raise0.4pt\hbox{\angleleft}\kern-.08em\vtop{% 2422 \vbox{\hrule\kern-0.4pt 2423 \hbox{\raise0.4pt\hbox{\vphantom{\angleleft}}#1}}% 2424 \kern-0.4pt\hrule}% 2425 \kern-.06em\raise0.4pt\hbox{\angleright}}}} 2426\def\key #1{{\nohyphenation \uppercase{#1}}\null} 2427% The old definition, with no lozenge: 2428%\def\key #1{{\ttsl \nohyphenation \uppercase{#1}}\null} 2429\def\ctrl #1{{\tt \rawbackslash \hat}#1} 2430 2431% @file, @option are the same as @samp. 2432\let\file=\samp 2433\let\option=\samp 2434 2435% @code is a modification of @t, 2436% which makes spaces the same size as normal in the surrounding text. 2437\def\tclose#1{% 2438 {% 2439 % Change normal interword space to be same as for the current font. 2440 \spaceskip = \fontdimen2\font 2441 % 2442 % Switch to typewriter. 2443 \tt 2444 % 2445 % But `\ ' produces the large typewriter interword space. 2446 \def\ {{\spaceskip = 0pt{} }}% 2447 % 2448 % Turn off hyphenation. 2449 \nohyphenation 2450 % 2451 \rawbackslash 2452 \plainfrenchspacing 2453 #1% 2454 }% 2455 \null 2456} 2457 2458% We *must* turn on hyphenation at `-' and `_' in @code. 2459% Otherwise, it is too hard to avoid overfull hboxes 2460% in the Emacs manual, the Library manual, etc. 2461 2462% Unfortunately, TeX uses one parameter (\hyphenchar) to control 2463% both hyphenation at - and hyphenation within words. 2464% We must therefore turn them both off (\tclose does that) 2465% and arrange explicitly to hyphenate at a dash. 2466% -- rms. 2467{ 2468 \catcode`\-=\active \catcode`\_=\active 2469 \catcode`\'=\active \catcode`\`=\active 2470 % 2471 \global\def\code{\begingroup 2472 \catcode\rquoteChar=\active \catcode\lquoteChar=\active 2473 \let'\codequoteright \let`\codequoteleft 2474 % 2475 \catcode\dashChar=\active \catcode\underChar=\active 2476 \ifallowcodebreaks 2477 \let-\codedash 2478 \let_\codeunder 2479 \else 2480 \let-\realdash 2481 \let_\realunder 2482 \fi 2483 \codex 2484 } 2485} 2486 2487\def\realdash{-} 2488\def\codedash{-\discretionary{}{}{}} 2489\def\codeunder{% 2490 % this is all so @math{@code{var_name}+1} can work. In math mode, _ 2491 % is "active" (mathcode"8000) and \normalunderscore (or \char95, etc.) 2492 % will therefore expand the active definition of _, which is us 2493 % (inside @code that is), therefore an endless loop. 2494 \ifusingtt{\ifmmode 2495 \mathchar"075F % class 0=ordinary, family 7=ttfam, pos 0x5F=_. 2496 \else\normalunderscore \fi 2497 \discretionary{}{}{}}% 2498 {\_}% 2499} 2500\def\codex #1{\tclose{#1}\endgroup} 2501 2502% An additional complication: the above will allow breaks after, e.g., 2503% each of the four underscores in __typeof__. This is undesirable in 2504% some manuals, especially if they don't have long identifiers in 2505% general. @allowcodebreaks provides a way to control this. 2506% 2507\newif\ifallowcodebreaks \allowcodebreakstrue 2508 2509\def\keywordtrue{true} 2510\def\keywordfalse{false} 2511 2512\parseargdef\allowcodebreaks{% 2513 \def\txiarg{#1}% 2514 \ifx\txiarg\keywordtrue 2515 \allowcodebreakstrue 2516 \else\ifx\txiarg\keywordfalse 2517 \allowcodebreaksfalse 2518 \else 2519 \errhelp = \EMsimple 2520 \errmessage{Unknown @allowcodebreaks option `\txiarg'}% 2521 \fi\fi 2522} 2523 2524% @kbd is like @code, except that if the argument is just one @key command, 2525% then @kbd has no effect. 2526 2527% @kbdinputstyle -- arg is `distinct' (@kbd uses slanted tty font always), 2528% `example' (@kbd uses ttsl only inside of @example and friends), 2529% or `code' (@kbd uses normal tty font always). 2530\parseargdef\kbdinputstyle{% 2531 \def\txiarg{#1}% 2532 \ifx\txiarg\worddistinct 2533 \gdef\kbdexamplefont{\ttsl}\gdef\kbdfont{\ttsl}% 2534 \else\ifx\txiarg\wordexample 2535 \gdef\kbdexamplefont{\ttsl}\gdef\kbdfont{\tt}% 2536 \else\ifx\txiarg\wordcode 2537 \gdef\kbdexamplefont{\tt}\gdef\kbdfont{\tt}% 2538 \else 2539 \errhelp = \EMsimple 2540 \errmessage{Unknown @kbdinputstyle option `\txiarg'}% 2541 \fi\fi\fi 2542} 2543\def\worddistinct{distinct} 2544\def\wordexample{example} 2545\def\wordcode{code} 2546 2547% Default is `distinct.' 2548\kbdinputstyle distinct 2549 2550\def\xkey{\key} 2551\def\kbdfoo#1#2#3\par{\def\one{#1}\def\three{#3}\def\threex{??}% 2552\ifx\one\xkey\ifx\threex\three \key{#2}% 2553\else{\tclose{\kbdfont\look}}\fi 2554\else{\tclose{\kbdfont\look}}\fi} 2555 2556% For @indicateurl, @env, @command quotes seem unnecessary, so use \code. 2557\let\indicateurl=\code 2558\let\env=\code 2559\let\command=\code 2560 2561% @uref (abbreviation for `urlref') takes an optional (comma-separated) 2562% second argument specifying the text to display and an optional third 2563% arg as text to display instead of (rather than in addition to) the url 2564% itself. First (mandatory) arg is the url. Perhaps eventually put in 2565% a hypertex \special here. 2566% 2567\def\uref#1{\douref #1,,,\finish} 2568\def\douref#1,#2,#3,#4\finish{\begingroup 2569 \unsepspaces 2570 \pdfurl{#1}% 2571 \setbox0 = \hbox{\ignorespaces #3}% 2572 \ifdim\wd0 > 0pt 2573 \unhbox0 % third arg given, show only that 2574 \else 2575 \setbox0 = \hbox{\ignorespaces #2}% 2576 \ifdim\wd0 > 0pt 2577 \ifpdf 2578 \unhbox0 % PDF: 2nd arg given, show only it 2579 \else 2580 \unhbox0\ (\code{#1})% DVI: 2nd arg given, show both it and url 2581 \fi 2582 \else 2583 \code{#1}% only url given, so show it 2584 \fi 2585 \fi 2586 \endlink 2587\endgroup} 2588 2589% @url synonym for @uref, since that's how everyone uses it. 2590% 2591\let\url=\uref 2592 2593% rms does not like angle brackets --karl, 17may97. 2594% So now @email is just like @uref, unless we are pdf. 2595% 2596%\def\email#1{\angleleft{\tt #1}\angleright} 2597\ifpdf 2598 \def\email#1{\doemail#1,,\finish} 2599 \def\doemail#1,#2,#3\finish{\begingroup 2600 \unsepspaces 2601 \pdfurl{mailto:#1}% 2602 \setbox0 = \hbox{\ignorespaces #2}% 2603 \ifdim\wd0>0pt\unhbox0\else\code{#1}\fi 2604 \endlink 2605 \endgroup} 2606\else 2607 \let\email=\uref 2608\fi 2609 2610% Check if we are currently using a typewriter font. Since all the 2611% Computer Modern typewriter fonts have zero interword stretch (and 2612% shrink), and it is reasonable to expect all typewriter fonts to have 2613% this property, we can check that font parameter. 2614% 2615\def\ifmonospace{\ifdim\fontdimen3\font=0pt } 2616 2617% Typeset a dimension, e.g., `in' or `pt'. The only reason for the 2618% argument is to make the input look right: @dmn{pt} instead of @dmn{}pt. 2619% 2620\def\dmn#1{\thinspace #1} 2621 2622\def\kbd#1{\def\look{#1}\expandafter\kbdfoo\look??\par} 2623 2624% @l was never documented to mean ``switch to the Lisp font'', 2625% and it is not used as such in any manual I can find. We need it for 2626% Polish suppressed-l. --karl, 22sep96. 2627%\def\l#1{{\li #1}\null} 2628 2629% Explicit font changes: @r, @sc, undocumented @ii. 2630\def\r#1{{\rm #1}} % roman font 2631\def\sc#1{{\smallcaps#1}} % smallcaps font 2632\def\ii#1{{\it #1}} % italic font 2633 2634% @acronym for "FBI", "NATO", and the like. 2635% We print this one point size smaller, since it's intended for 2636% all-uppercase. 2637% 2638\def\acronym#1{\doacronym #1,,\finish} 2639\def\doacronym#1,#2,#3\finish{% 2640 {\selectfonts\lsize #1}% 2641 \def\temp{#2}% 2642 \ifx\temp\empty \else 2643 \space ({\unsepspaces \ignorespaces \temp \unskip})% 2644 \fi 2645} 2646 2647% @abbr for "Comput. J." and the like. 2648% No font change, but don't do end-of-sentence spacing. 2649% 2650\def\abbr#1{\doabbr #1,,\finish} 2651\def\doabbr#1,#2,#3\finish{% 2652 {\plainfrenchspacing #1}% 2653 \def\temp{#2}% 2654 \ifx\temp\empty \else 2655 \space ({\unsepspaces \ignorespaces \temp \unskip})% 2656 \fi 2657} 2658 2659% @pounds{} is a sterling sign, which Knuth put in the CM italic font. 2660% 2661\def\pounds{{\it\$}} 2662 2663% @euro{} comes from a separate font, depending on the current style. 2664% We use the free feym* fonts from the eurosym package by Henrik 2665% Theiling, which support regular, slanted, bold and bold slanted (and 2666% "outlined" (blackboard board, sort of) versions, which we don't need). 2667% It is available from http://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/fonts/eurosym. 2668% 2669% Although only regular is the truly official Euro symbol, we ignore 2670% that. The Euro is designed to be slightly taller than the regular 2671% font height. 2672% 2673% feymr - regular 2674% feymo - slanted 2675% feybr - bold 2676% feybo - bold slanted 2677% 2678% There is no good (free) typewriter version, to my knowledge. 2679% A feymr10 euro is ~7.3pt wide, while a normal cmtt10 char is ~5.25pt wide. 2680% Hmm. 2681% 2682% Also doesn't work in math. Do we need to do math with euro symbols? 2683% Hope not. 2684% 2685% 2686\def\euro{{\eurofont e}} 2687\def\eurofont{% 2688 % We set the font at each command, rather than predefining it in 2689 % \textfonts and the other font-switching commands, so that 2690 % installations which never need the symbol don't have to have the 2691 % font installed. 2692 % 2693 % There is only one designed size (nominal 10pt), so we always scale 2694 % that to the current nominal size. 2695 % 2696 % By the way, simply using "at 1em" works for cmr10 and the like, but 2697 % does not work for cmbx10 and other extended/shrunken fonts. 2698 % 2699 \def\eurosize{\csname\curfontsize nominalsize\endcsname}% 2700 % 2701 \ifx\curfontstyle\bfstylename 2702 % bold: 2703 \font\thiseurofont = \ifusingit{feybo10}{feybr10} at \eurosize 2704 \else 2705 % regular: 2706 \font\thiseurofont = \ifusingit{feymo10}{feymr10} at \eurosize 2707 \fi 2708 \thiseurofont 2709} 2710 2711% Hacks for glyphs from the EC fonts similar to \euro. We don't 2712% use \let for the aliases, because sometimes we redefine the original 2713% macro, and the alias should reflect the redefinition. 2714\def\guillemetleft{{\ecfont \char"13}} 2715\def\guillemotleft{\guillemetleft} 2716\def\guillemetright{{\ecfont \char"14}} 2717\def\guillemotright{\guillemetright} 2718\def\guilsinglleft{{\ecfont \char"0E}} 2719\def\guilsinglright{{\ecfont \char"0F}} 2720\def\quotedblbase{{\ecfont \char"12}} 2721\def\quotesinglbase{{\ecfont \char"0D}} 2722% 2723\def\ecfont{% 2724 % We can't distinguish serif/sanserif and italic/slanted, but this 2725 % is used for crude hacks anyway (like adding French and German 2726 % quotes to documents typeset with CM, where we lose kerning), so 2727 % hopefully nobody will notice/care. 2728 \edef\ecsize{\csname\curfontsize ecsize\endcsname}% 2729 \edef\nominalsize{\csname\curfontsize nominalsize\endcsname}% 2730 \ifx\curfontstyle\bfstylename 2731 % bold: 2732 \font\thisecfont = ecb\ifusingit{i}{x}\ecsize \space at \nominalsize 2733 \else 2734 % regular: 2735 \font\thisecfont = ec\ifusingit{ti}{rm}\ecsize \space at \nominalsize 2736 \fi 2737 \thisecfont 2738} 2739 2740% @registeredsymbol - R in a circle. The font for the R should really 2741% be smaller yet, but lllsize is the best we can do for now. 2742% Adapted from the plain.tex definition of \copyright. 2743% 2744\def\registeredsymbol{% 2745 $^{{\ooalign{\hfil\raise.07ex\hbox{\selectfonts\lllsize R}% 2746 \hfil\crcr\Orb}}% 2747 }$% 2748} 2749 2750% @textdegree - the normal degrees sign. 2751% 2752\def\textdegree{$^\circ$} 2753 2754% Laurent Siebenmann reports \Orb undefined with: 2755% Textures 1.7.7 (preloaded format=plain 93.10.14) (68K) 16 APR 2004 02:38 2756% so we'll define it if necessary. 2757% 2758\ifx\Orb\undefined 2759\def\Orb{\mathhexbox20D} 2760\fi 2761 2762% Quotes. 2763\chardef\quotedblleft="5C 2764\chardef\quotedblright=`\" 2765\chardef\quoteleft=`\` 2766\chardef\quoteright=`\' 2767 2768\message{page headings,} 2769 2770\newskip\titlepagetopglue \titlepagetopglue = 1.5in 2771\newskip\titlepagebottomglue \titlepagebottomglue = 2pc 2772 2773% First the title page. Must do @settitle before @titlepage. 2774\newif\ifseenauthor 2775\newif\iffinishedtitlepage 2776 2777% Do an implicit @contents or @shortcontents after @end titlepage if the 2778% user says @setcontentsaftertitlepage or @setshortcontentsaftertitlepage. 2779% 2780\newif\ifsetcontentsaftertitlepage 2781 \let\setcontentsaftertitlepage = \setcontentsaftertitlepagetrue 2782\newif\ifsetshortcontentsaftertitlepage 2783 \let\setshortcontentsaftertitlepage = \setshortcontentsaftertitlepagetrue 2784 2785\parseargdef\shorttitlepage{\begingroup\hbox{}\vskip 1.5in \chaprm \centerline{#1}% 2786 \endgroup\page\hbox{}\page} 2787 2788\envdef\titlepage{% 2789 % Open one extra group, as we want to close it in the middle of \Etitlepage. 2790 \begingroup 2791 \parindent=0pt \textfonts 2792 % Leave some space at the very top of the page. 2793 \vglue\titlepagetopglue 2794 % No rule at page bottom unless we print one at the top with @title. 2795 \finishedtitlepagetrue 2796 % 2797 % Most title ``pages'' are actually two pages long, with space 2798 % at the top of the second. We don't want the ragged left on the second. 2799 \let\oldpage = \page 2800 \def\page{% 2801 \iffinishedtitlepage\else 2802 \finishtitlepage 2803 \fi 2804 \let\page = \oldpage 2805 \page 2806 \null 2807 }% 2808} 2809 2810\def\Etitlepage{% 2811 \iffinishedtitlepage\else 2812 \finishtitlepage 2813 \fi 2814 % It is important to do the page break before ending the group, 2815 % because the headline and footline are only empty inside the group. 2816 % If we use the new definition of \page, we always get a blank page 2817 % after the title page, which we certainly don't want. 2818 \oldpage 2819 \endgroup 2820 % 2821 % Need this before the \...aftertitlepage checks so that if they are 2822 % in effect the toc pages will come out with page numbers. 2823 \HEADINGSon 2824 % 2825 % If they want short, they certainly want long too. 2826 \ifsetshortcontentsaftertitlepage 2827 \shortcontents 2828 \contents 2829 \global\let\shortcontents = \relax 2830 \global\let\contents = \relax 2831 \fi 2832 % 2833 \ifsetcontentsaftertitlepage 2834 \contents 2835 \global\let\contents = \relax 2836 \global\let\shortcontents = \relax 2837 \fi 2838} 2839 2840\def\finishtitlepage{% 2841 \vskip4pt \hrule height 2pt width \hsize 2842 \vskip\titlepagebottomglue 2843 \finishedtitlepagetrue 2844} 2845 2846%%% Macros to be used within @titlepage: 2847 2848\let\subtitlerm=\tenrm 2849\def\subtitlefont{\subtitlerm \normalbaselineskip = 13pt \normalbaselines} 2850 2851\def\authorfont{\authorrm \normalbaselineskip = 16pt \normalbaselines 2852 \let\tt=\authortt} 2853 2854\parseargdef\title{% 2855 \checkenv\titlepage 2856 \leftline{\titlefonts\rm #1} 2857 % print a rule at the page bottom also. 2858 \finishedtitlepagefalse 2859 \vskip4pt \hrule height 4pt width \hsize \vskip4pt 2860} 2861 2862\parseargdef\subtitle{% 2863 \checkenv\titlepage 2864 {\subtitlefont \rightline{#1}}% 2865} 2866 2867% @author should come last, but may come many times. 2868% It can also be used inside @quotation. 2869% 2870\parseargdef\author{% 2871 \def\temp{\quotation}% 2872 \ifx\thisenv\temp 2873 \def\quotationauthor{#1}% printed in \Equotation. 2874 \else 2875 \checkenv\titlepage 2876 \ifseenauthor\else \vskip 0pt plus 1filll \seenauthortrue \fi 2877 {\authorfont \leftline{#1}}% 2878 \fi 2879} 2880 2881 2882%%% Set up page headings and footings. 2883 2884\let\thispage=\folio 2885 2886\newtoks\evenheadline % headline on even pages 2887\newtoks\oddheadline % headline on odd pages 2888\newtoks\evenfootline % footline on even pages 2889\newtoks\oddfootline % footline on odd pages 2890 2891% Now make TeX use those variables 2892\headline={{\textfonts\rm \ifodd\pageno \the\oddheadline 2893 \else \the\evenheadline \fi}} 2894\footline={{\textfonts\rm \ifodd\pageno \the\oddfootline 2895 \else \the\evenfootline \fi}\HEADINGShook} 2896\let\HEADINGShook=\relax 2897 2898% Commands to set those variables. 2899% For example, this is what @headings on does 2900% @evenheading @thistitle|@thispage|@thischapter 2901% @oddheading @thischapter|@thispage|@thistitle 2902% @evenfooting @thisfile|| 2903% @oddfooting ||@thisfile 2904 2905 2906\def\evenheading{\parsearg\evenheadingxxx} 2907\def\evenheadingxxx #1{\evenheadingyyy #1\|\|\|\|\finish} 2908\def\evenheadingyyy #1\|#2\|#3\|#4\finish{% 2909\global\evenheadline={\rlap{\centerline{#2}}\line{#1\hfil#3}}} 2910 2911\def\oddheading{\parsearg\oddheadingxxx} 2912\def\oddheadingxxx #1{\oddheadingyyy #1\|\|\|\|\finish} 2913\def\oddheadingyyy #1\|#2\|#3\|#4\finish{% 2914\global\oddheadline={\rlap{\centerline{#2}}\line{#1\hfil#3}}} 2915 2916\parseargdef\everyheading{\oddheadingxxx{#1}\evenheadingxxx{#1}}% 2917 2918\def\evenfooting{\parsearg\evenfootingxxx} 2919\def\evenfootingxxx #1{\evenfootingyyy #1\|\|\|\|\finish} 2920\def\evenfootingyyy #1\|#2\|#3\|#4\finish{% 2921\global\evenfootline={\rlap{\centerline{#2}}\line{#1\hfil#3}}} 2922 2923\def\oddfooting{\parsearg\oddfootingxxx} 2924\def\oddfootingxxx #1{\oddfootingyyy #1\|\|\|\|\finish} 2925\def\oddfootingyyy #1\|#2\|#3\|#4\finish{% 2926 \global\oddfootline = {\rlap{\centerline{#2}}\line{#1\hfil#3}}% 2927 % 2928 % Leave some space for the footline. Hopefully ok to assume 2929 % @evenfooting will not be used by itself. 2930 \global\advance\pageheight by -12pt 2931 \global\advance\vsize by -12pt 2932} 2933 2934\parseargdef\everyfooting{\oddfootingxxx{#1}\evenfootingxxx{#1}} 2935 2936% @evenheadingmarks top \thischapter <- chapter at the top of a page 2937% @evenheadingmarks bottom \thischapter <- chapter at the bottom of a page 2938% 2939% The same set of arguments for: 2940% 2941% @oddheadingmarks 2942% @evenfootingmarks 2943% @oddfootingmarks 2944% @everyheadingmarks 2945% @everyfootingmarks 2946 2947\def\evenheadingmarks{\headingmarks{even}{heading}} 2948\def\oddheadingmarks{\headingmarks{odd}{heading}} 2949\def\evenfootingmarks{\headingmarks{even}{footing}} 2950\def\oddfootingmarks{\headingmarks{odd}{footing}} 2951\def\everyheadingmarks#1 {\headingmarks{even}{heading}{#1} 2952 \headingmarks{odd}{heading}{#1} } 2953\def\everyfootingmarks#1 {\headingmarks{even}{footing}{#1} 2954 \headingmarks{odd}{footing}{#1} } 2955% #1 = even/odd, #2 = heading/footing, #3 = top/bottom. 2956\def\headingmarks#1#2#3 {% 2957 \expandafter\let\expandafter\temp \csname get#3headingmarks\endcsname 2958 \global\expandafter\let\csname get#1#2marks\endcsname \temp 2959} 2960 2961\everyheadingmarks bottom 2962\everyfootingmarks bottom 2963 2964% @headings double turns headings on for double-sided printing. 2965% @headings single turns headings on for single-sided printing. 2966% @headings off turns them off. 2967% @headings on same as @headings double, retained for compatibility. 2968% @headings after turns on double-sided headings after this page. 2969% @headings doubleafter turns on double-sided headings after this page. 2970% @headings singleafter turns on single-sided headings after this page. 2971% By default, they are off at the start of a document, 2972% and turned `on' after @end titlepage. 2973 2974\def\headings #1 {\csname HEADINGS#1\endcsname} 2975 2976\def\HEADINGSoff{% 2977\global\evenheadline={\hfil} \global\evenfootline={\hfil} 2978\global\oddheadline={\hfil} \global\oddfootline={\hfil}} 2979\HEADINGSoff 2980% When we turn headings on, set the page number to 1. 2981% For double-sided printing, put current file name in lower left corner, 2982% chapter name on inside top of right hand pages, document 2983% title on inside top of left hand pages, and page numbers on outside top 2984% edge of all pages. 2985\def\HEADINGSdouble{% 2986\global\pageno=1 2987\global\evenfootline={\hfil} 2988\global\oddfootline={\hfil} 2989\global\evenheadline={\line{\folio\hfil\thistitle}} 2990\global\oddheadline={\line{\thischapter\hfil\folio}} 2991\global\let\contentsalignmacro = \chapoddpage 2992} 2993\let\contentsalignmacro = \chappager 2994 2995% For single-sided printing, chapter title goes across top left of page, 2996% page number on top right. 2997\def\HEADINGSsingle{% 2998\global\pageno=1 2999\global\evenfootline={\hfil} 3000\global\oddfootline={\hfil} 3001\global\evenheadline={\line{\thischapter\hfil\folio}} 3002\global\oddheadline={\line{\thischapter\hfil\folio}} 3003\global\let\contentsalignmacro = \chappager 3004} 3005\def\HEADINGSon{\HEADINGSdouble} 3006 3007\def\HEADINGSafter{\let\HEADINGShook=\HEADINGSdoublex} 3008\let\HEADINGSdoubleafter=\HEADINGSafter 3009\def\HEADINGSdoublex{% 3010\global\evenfootline={\hfil} 3011\global\oddfootline={\hfil} 3012\global\evenheadline={\line{\folio\hfil\thistitle}} 3013\global\oddheadline={\line{\thischapter\hfil\folio}} 3014\global\let\contentsalignmacro = \chapoddpage 3015} 3016 3017\def\HEADINGSsingleafter{\let\HEADINGShook=\HEADINGSsinglex} 3018\def\HEADINGSsinglex{% 3019\global\evenfootline={\hfil} 3020\global\oddfootline={\hfil} 3021\global\evenheadline={\line{\thischapter\hfil\folio}} 3022\global\oddheadline={\line{\thischapter\hfil\folio}} 3023\global\let\contentsalignmacro = \chappager 3024} 3025 3026% Subroutines used in generating headings 3027% This produces Day Month Year style of output. 3028% Only define if not already defined, in case a txi-??.tex file has set 3029% up a different format (e.g., txi-cs.tex does this). 3030\ifx\today\undefined 3031\def\today{% 3032 \number\day\space 3033 \ifcase\month 3034 \or\putwordMJan\or\putwordMFeb\or\putwordMMar\or\putwordMApr 3035 \or\putwordMMay\or\putwordMJun\or\putwordMJul\or\putwordMAug 3036 \or\putwordMSep\or\putwordMOct\or\putwordMNov\or\putwordMDec 3037 \fi 3038 \space\number\year} 3039\fi 3040 3041% @settitle line... specifies the title of the document, for headings. 3042% It generates no output of its own. 3043\def\thistitle{\putwordNoTitle} 3044\def\settitle{\parsearg{\gdef\thistitle}} 3045 3046 3047\message{tables,} 3048% Tables -- @table, @ftable, @vtable, @item(x). 3049 3050% default indentation of table text 3051\newdimen\tableindent \tableindent=.8in 3052% default indentation of @itemize and @enumerate text 3053\newdimen\itemindent \itemindent=.3in 3054% margin between end of table item and start of table text. 3055\newdimen\itemmargin \itemmargin=.1in 3056 3057% used internally for \itemindent minus \itemmargin 3058\newdimen\itemmax 3059 3060% Note @table, @ftable, and @vtable define @item, @itemx, etc., with 3061% these defs. 3062% They also define \itemindex 3063% to index the item name in whatever manner is desired (perhaps none). 3064 3065\newif\ifitemxneedsnegativevskip 3066 3067\def\itemxpar{\par\ifitemxneedsnegativevskip\nobreak\vskip-\parskip\nobreak\fi} 3068 3069\def\internalBitem{\smallbreak \parsearg\itemzzz} 3070\def\internalBitemx{\itemxpar \parsearg\itemzzz} 3071 3072\def\itemzzz #1{\begingroup % 3073 \advance\hsize by -\rightskip 3074 \advance\hsize by -\tableindent 3075 \setbox0=\hbox{\itemindicate{#1}}% 3076 \itemindex{#1}% 3077 \nobreak % This prevents a break before @itemx. 3078 % 3079 % If the item text does not fit in the space we have, put it on a line 3080 % by itself, and do not allow a page break either before or after that 3081 % line. We do not start a paragraph here because then if the next 3082 % command is, e.g., @kindex, the whatsit would get put into the 3083 % horizontal list on a line by itself, resulting in extra blank space. 3084 \ifdim \wd0>\itemmax 3085 % 3086 % Make this a paragraph so we get the \parskip glue and wrapping, 3087 % but leave it ragged-right. 3088 \begingroup 3089 \advance\leftskip by-\tableindent 3090 \advance\hsize by\tableindent 3091 \advance\rightskip by0pt plus1fil 3092 \leavevmode\unhbox0\par 3093 \endgroup 3094 % 3095 % We're going to be starting a paragraph, but we don't want the 3096 % \parskip glue -- logically it's part of the @item we just started. 3097 \nobreak \vskip-\parskip 3098 % 3099 % Stop a page break at the \parskip glue coming up. However, if 3100 % what follows is an environment such as @example, there will be no 3101 % \parskip glue; then the negative vskip we just inserted would 3102 % cause the example and the item to crash together. So we use this 3103 % bizarre value of 10001 as a signal to \aboveenvbreak to insert 3104 % \parskip glue after all. Section titles are handled this way also. 3105 % 3106 \penalty 10001 3107 \endgroup 3108 \itemxneedsnegativevskipfalse 3109 \else 3110 % The item text fits into the space. Start a paragraph, so that the 3111 % following text (if any) will end up on the same line. 3112 \noindent 3113 % Do this with kerns and \unhbox so that if there is a footnote in 3114 % the item text, it can migrate to the main vertical list and 3115 % eventually be printed. 3116 \nobreak\kern-\tableindent 3117 \dimen0 = \itemmax \advance\dimen0 by \itemmargin \advance\dimen0 by -\wd0 3118 \unhbox0 3119 \nobreak\kern\dimen0 3120 \endgroup 3121 \itemxneedsnegativevskiptrue 3122 \fi 3123} 3124 3125\def\item{\errmessage{@item while not in a list environment}} 3126\def\itemx{\errmessage{@itemx while not in a list environment}} 3127 3128% @table, @ftable, @vtable. 3129\envdef\table{% 3130 \let\itemindex\gobble 3131 \tablecheck{table}% 3132} 3133\envdef\ftable{% 3134 \def\itemindex ##1{\doind {fn}{\code{##1}}}% 3135 \tablecheck{ftable}% 3136} 3137\envdef\vtable{% 3138 \def\itemindex ##1{\doind {vr}{\code{##1}}}% 3139 \tablecheck{vtable}% 3140} 3141\def\tablecheck#1{% 3142 \ifnum \the\catcode`\^^M=\active 3143 \endgroup 3144 \errmessage{This command won't work in this context; perhaps the problem is 3145 that we are \inenvironment\thisenv}% 3146 \def\next{\doignore{#1}}% 3147 \else 3148 \let\next\tablex 3149 \fi 3150 \next 3151} 3152\def\tablex#1{% 3153 \def\itemindicate{#1}% 3154 \parsearg\tabley 3155} 3156\def\tabley#1{% 3157 {% 3158 \makevalueexpandable 3159 \edef\temp{\noexpand\tablez #1\space\space\space}% 3160 \expandafter 3161 }\temp \endtablez 3162} 3163\def\tablez #1 #2 #3 #4\endtablez{% 3164 \aboveenvbreak 3165 \ifnum 0#1>0 \advance \leftskip by #1\mil \fi 3166 \ifnum 0#2>0 \tableindent=#2\mil \fi 3167 \ifnum 0#3>0 \advance \rightskip by #3\mil \fi 3168 \itemmax=\tableindent 3169 \advance \itemmax by -\itemmargin 3170 \advance \leftskip by \tableindent 3171 \exdentamount=\tableindent 3172 \parindent = 0pt 3173 \parskip = \smallskipamount 3174 \ifdim \parskip=0pt \parskip=2pt \fi 3175 \let\item = \internalBitem 3176 \let\itemx = \internalBitemx 3177} 3178\def\Etable{\endgraf\afterenvbreak} 3179\let\Eftable\Etable 3180\let\Evtable\Etable 3181\let\Eitemize\Etable 3182\let\Eenumerate\Etable 3183 3184% This is the counter used by @enumerate, which is really @itemize 3185 3186\newcount \itemno 3187 3188\envdef\itemize{\parsearg\doitemize} 3189 3190\def\doitemize#1{% 3191 \aboveenvbreak 3192 \itemmax=\itemindent 3193 \advance\itemmax by -\itemmargin 3194 \advance\leftskip by \itemindent 3195 \exdentamount=\itemindent 3196 \parindent=0pt 3197 \parskip=\smallskipamount 3198 \ifdim\parskip=0pt \parskip=2pt \fi 3199 \def\itemcontents{#1}% 3200 % @itemize with no arg is equivalent to @itemize @bullet. 3201 \ifx\itemcontents\empty\def\itemcontents{\bullet}\fi 3202 \let\item=\itemizeitem 3203} 3204 3205% Definition of @item while inside @itemize and @enumerate. 3206% 3207\def\itemizeitem{% 3208 \advance\itemno by 1 % for enumerations 3209 {\let\par=\endgraf \smallbreak}% reasonable place to break 3210 {% 3211 % If the document has an @itemize directly after a section title, a 3212 % \nobreak will be last on the list, and \sectionheading will have 3213 % done a \vskip-\parskip. In that case, we don't want to zero 3214 % parskip, or the item text will crash with the heading. On the 3215 % other hand, when there is normal text preceding the item (as there 3216 % usually is), we do want to zero parskip, or there would be too much 3217 % space. In that case, we won't have a \nobreak before. At least 3218 % that's the theory. 3219 \ifnum\lastpenalty<10000 \parskip=0in \fi 3220 \noindent 3221 \hbox to 0pt{\hss \itemcontents \kern\itemmargin}% 3222 \vadjust{\penalty 1200}}% not good to break after first line of item. 3223 \flushcr 3224} 3225 3226% \splitoff TOKENS\endmark defines \first to be the first token in 3227% TOKENS, and \rest to be the remainder. 3228% 3229\def\splitoff#1#2\endmark{\def\first{#1}\def\rest{#2}}% 3230 3231% Allow an optional argument of an uppercase letter, lowercase letter, 3232% or number, to specify the first label in the enumerated list. No 3233% argument is the same as `1'. 3234% 3235\envparseargdef\enumerate{\enumeratey #1 \endenumeratey} 3236\def\enumeratey #1 #2\endenumeratey{% 3237 % If we were given no argument, pretend we were given `1'. 3238 \def\thearg{#1}% 3239 \ifx\thearg\empty \def\thearg{1}\fi 3240 % 3241 % Detect if the argument is a single token. If so, it might be a 3242 % letter. Otherwise, the only valid thing it can be is a number. 3243 % (We will always have one token, because of the test we just made. 3244 % This is a good thing, since \splitoff doesn't work given nothing at 3245 % all -- the first parameter is undelimited.) 3246 \expandafter\splitoff\thearg\endmark 3247 \ifx\rest\empty 3248 % Only one token in the argument. It could still be anything. 3249 % A ``lowercase letter'' is one whose \lccode is nonzero. 3250 % An ``uppercase letter'' is one whose \lccode is both nonzero, and 3251 % not equal to itself. 3252 % Otherwise, we assume it's a number. 3253 % 3254 % We need the \relax at the end of the \ifnum lines to stop TeX from 3255 % continuing to look for a <number>. 3256 % 3257 \ifnum\lccode\expandafter`\thearg=0\relax 3258 \numericenumerate % a number (we hope) 3259 \else 3260 % It's a letter. 3261 \ifnum\lccode\expandafter`\thearg=\expandafter`\thearg\relax 3262 \lowercaseenumerate % lowercase letter 3263 \else 3264 \uppercaseenumerate % uppercase letter 3265 \fi 3266 \fi 3267 \else 3268 % Multiple tokens in the argument. We hope it's a number. 3269 \numericenumerate 3270 \fi 3271} 3272 3273% An @enumerate whose labels are integers. The starting integer is 3274% given in \thearg. 3275% 3276\def\numericenumerate{% 3277 \itemno = \thearg 3278 \startenumeration{\the\itemno}% 3279} 3280 3281% The starting (lowercase) letter is in \thearg. 3282\def\lowercaseenumerate{% 3283 \itemno = \expandafter`\thearg 3284 \startenumeration{% 3285 % Be sure we're not beyond the end of the alphabet. 3286 \ifnum\itemno=0 3287 \errmessage{No more lowercase letters in @enumerate; get a bigger 3288 alphabet}% 3289 \fi 3290 \char\lccode\itemno 3291 }% 3292} 3293 3294% The starting (uppercase) letter is in \thearg. 3295\def\uppercaseenumerate{% 3296 \itemno = \expandafter`\thearg 3297 \startenumeration{% 3298 % Be sure we're not beyond the end of the alphabet. 3299 \ifnum\itemno=0 3300 \errmessage{No more uppercase letters in @enumerate; get a bigger 3301 alphabet} 3302 \fi 3303 \char\uccode\itemno 3304 }% 3305} 3306 3307% Call \doitemize, adding a period to the first argument and supplying the 3308% common last two arguments. Also subtract one from the initial value in 3309% \itemno, since @item increments \itemno. 3310% 3311\def\startenumeration#1{% 3312 \advance\itemno by -1 3313 \doitemize{#1.}\flushcr 3314} 3315 3316% @alphaenumerate and @capsenumerate are abbreviations for giving an arg 3317% to @enumerate. 3318% 3319\def\alphaenumerate{\enumerate{a}} 3320\def\capsenumerate{\enumerate{A}} 3321\def\Ealphaenumerate{\Eenumerate} 3322\def\Ecapsenumerate{\Eenumerate} 3323 3324 3325% @multitable macros 3326% Amy Hendrickson, 8/18/94, 3/6/96 3327% 3328% @multitable ... @end multitable will make as many columns as desired. 3329% Contents of each column will wrap at width given in preamble. Width 3330% can be specified either with sample text given in a template line, 3331% or in percent of \hsize, the current width of text on page. 3332 3333% Table can continue over pages but will only break between lines. 3334 3335% To make preamble: 3336% 3337% Either define widths of columns in terms of percent of \hsize: 3338% @multitable @columnfractions .25 .3 .45 3339% @item ... 3340% 3341% Numbers following @columnfractions are the percent of the total 3342% current hsize to be used for each column. You may use as many 3343% columns as desired. 3344 3345 3346% Or use a template: 3347% @multitable {Column 1 template} {Column 2 template} {Column 3 template} 3348% @item ... 3349% using the widest term desired in each column. 3350 3351% Each new table line starts with @item, each subsequent new column 3352% starts with @tab. Empty columns may be produced by supplying @tab's 3353% with nothing between them for as many times as empty columns are needed, 3354% ie, @tab@tab@tab will produce two empty columns. 3355 3356% @item, @tab do not need to be on their own lines, but it will not hurt 3357% if they are. 3358 3359% Sample multitable: 3360 3361% @multitable {Column 1 template} {Column 2 template} {Column 3 template} 3362% @item first col stuff @tab second col stuff @tab third col 3363% @item 3364% first col stuff 3365% @tab 3366% second col stuff 3367% @tab 3368% third col 3369% @item first col stuff @tab second col stuff 3370% @tab Many paragraphs of text may be used in any column. 3371% 3372% They will wrap at the width determined by the template. 3373% @item@tab@tab This will be in third column. 3374% @end multitable 3375 3376% Default dimensions may be reset by user. 3377% @multitableparskip is vertical space between paragraphs in table. 3378% @multitableparindent is paragraph indent in table. 3379% @multitablecolmargin is horizontal space to be left between columns. 3380% @multitablelinespace is space to leave between table items, baseline 3381% to baseline. 3382% 0pt means it depends on current normal line spacing. 3383% 3384\newskip\multitableparskip 3385\newskip\multitableparindent 3386\newdimen\multitablecolspace 3387\newskip\multitablelinespace 3388\multitableparskip=0pt 3389\multitableparindent=6pt 3390\multitablecolspace=12pt 3391\multitablelinespace=0pt 3392 3393% Macros used to set up halign preamble: 3394% 3395\let\endsetuptable\relax 3396\def\xendsetuptable{\endsetuptable} 3397\let\columnfractions\relax 3398\def\xcolumnfractions{\columnfractions} 3399\newif\ifsetpercent 3400 3401% #1 is the @columnfraction, usually a decimal number like .5, but might 3402% be just 1. We just use it, whatever it is. 3403% 3404\def\pickupwholefraction#1 {% 3405 \global\advance\colcount by 1 3406 \expandafter\xdef\csname col\the\colcount\endcsname{#1\hsize}% 3407 \setuptable 3408} 3409 3410\newcount\colcount 3411\def\setuptable#1{% 3412 \def\firstarg{#1}% 3413 \ifx\firstarg\xendsetuptable 3414 \let\go = \relax 3415 \else 3416 \ifx\firstarg\xcolumnfractions 3417 \global\setpercenttrue 3418 \else 3419 \ifsetpercent 3420 \let\go\pickupwholefraction 3421 \else 3422 \global\advance\colcount by 1 3423 \setbox0=\hbox{#1\unskip\space}% Add a normal word space as a 3424 % separator; typically that is always in the input, anyway. 3425 \expandafter\xdef\csname col\the\colcount\endcsname{\the\wd0}% 3426 \fi 3427 \fi 3428 \ifx\go\pickupwholefraction 3429 % Put the argument back for the \pickupwholefraction call, so 3430 % we'll always have a period there to be parsed. 3431 \def\go{\pickupwholefraction#1}% 3432 \else 3433 \let\go = \setuptable 3434 \fi% 3435 \fi 3436 \go 3437} 3438 3439% multitable-only commands. 3440% 3441% @headitem starts a heading row, which we typeset in bold. 3442% Assignments have to be global since we are inside the implicit group 3443% of an alignment entry. Note that \everycr resets \everytab. 3444\def\headitem{\checkenv\multitable \crcr \global\everytab={\bf}\the\everytab}% 3445% 3446% A \tab used to include \hskip1sp. But then the space in a template 3447% line is not enough. That is bad. So let's go back to just `&' until 3448% we encounter the problem it was intended to solve again. 3449% --karl, nathan@acm.org, 20apr99. 3450\def\tab{\checkenv\multitable &\the\everytab}% 3451 3452% @multitable ... @end multitable definitions: 3453% 3454\newtoks\everytab % insert after every tab. 3455% 3456\envdef\multitable{% 3457 \vskip\parskip 3458 \startsavinginserts 3459 % 3460 % @item within a multitable starts a normal row. 3461 % We use \def instead of \let so that if one of the multitable entries 3462 % contains an @itemize, we don't choke on the \item (seen as \crcr aka 3463 % \endtemplate) expanding \doitemize. 3464 \def\item{\crcr}% 3465 % 3466 \tolerance=9500 3467 \hbadness=9500 3468 \setmultitablespacing 3469 \parskip=\multitableparskip 3470 \parindent=\multitableparindent 3471 \overfullrule=0pt 3472 \global\colcount=0 3473 % 3474 \everycr = {% 3475 \noalign{% 3476 \global\everytab={}% 3477 \global\colcount=0 % Reset the column counter. 3478 % Check for saved footnotes, etc. 3479 \checkinserts 3480 % Keeps underfull box messages off when table breaks over pages. 3481 %\filbreak 3482 % Maybe so, but it also creates really weird page breaks when the 3483 % table breaks over pages. Wouldn't \vfil be better? Wait until the 3484 % problem manifests itself, so it can be fixed for real --karl. 3485 }% 3486 }% 3487 % 3488 \parsearg\domultitable 3489} 3490\def\domultitable#1{% 3491 % To parse everything between @multitable and @item: 3492 \setuptable#1 \endsetuptable 3493 % 3494 % This preamble sets up a generic column definition, which will 3495 % be used as many times as user calls for columns. 3496 % \vtop will set a single line and will also let text wrap and 3497 % continue for many paragraphs if desired. 3498 \halign\bgroup &% 3499 \global\advance\colcount by 1 3500 \multistrut 3501 \vtop{% 3502 % Use the current \colcount to find the correct column width: 3503 \hsize=\expandafter\csname col\the\colcount\endcsname 3504 % 3505 % In order to keep entries from bumping into each other 3506 % we will add a \leftskip of \multitablecolspace to all columns after 3507 % the first one. 3508 % 3509 % If a template has been used, we will add \multitablecolspace 3510 % to the width of each template entry. 3511 % 3512 % If the user has set preamble in terms of percent of \hsize we will 3513 % use that dimension as the width of the column, and the \leftskip 3514 % will keep entries from bumping into each other. Table will start at 3515 % left margin and final column will justify at right margin. 3516 % 3517 % Make sure we don't inherit \rightskip from the outer environment. 3518 \rightskip=0pt 3519 \ifnum\colcount=1 3520 % The first column will be indented with the surrounding text. 3521 \advance\hsize by\leftskip 3522 \else 3523 \ifsetpercent \else 3524 % If user has not set preamble in terms of percent of \hsize 3525 % we will advance \hsize by \multitablecolspace. 3526 \advance\hsize by \multitablecolspace 3527 \fi 3528 % In either case we will make \leftskip=\multitablecolspace: 3529 \leftskip=\multitablecolspace 3530 \fi 3531 % Ignoring space at the beginning and end avoids an occasional spurious 3532 % blank line, when TeX decides to break the line at the space before the 3533 % box from the multistrut, so the strut ends up on a line by itself. 3534 % For example: 3535 % @multitable @columnfractions .11 .89 3536 % @item @code{#} 3537 % @tab Legal holiday which is valid in major parts of the whole country. 3538 % Is automatically provided with highlighting sequences respectively 3539 % marking characters. 3540 \noindent\ignorespaces##\unskip\multistrut 3541 }\cr 3542} 3543\def\Emultitable{% 3544 \crcr 3545 \egroup % end the \halign 3546 \global\setpercentfalse 3547} 3548 3549\def\setmultitablespacing{% 3550 \def\multistrut{\strut}% just use the standard line spacing 3551 % 3552 % Compute \multitablelinespace (if not defined by user) for use in 3553 % \multitableparskip calculation. We used define \multistrut based on 3554 % this, but (ironically) that caused the spacing to be off. 3555 % See bug-texinfo report from Werner Lemberg, 31 Oct 2004 12:52:20 +0100. 3556\ifdim\multitablelinespace=0pt 3557\setbox0=\vbox{X}\global\multitablelinespace=\the\baselineskip 3558\global\advance\multitablelinespace by-\ht0 3559\fi 3560%% Test to see if parskip is larger than space between lines of 3561%% table. If not, do nothing. 3562%% If so, set to same dimension as multitablelinespace. 3563\ifdim\multitableparskip>\multitablelinespace 3564\global\multitableparskip=\multitablelinespace 3565\global\advance\multitableparskip-7pt %% to keep parskip somewhat smaller 3566 %% than skip between lines in the table. 3567\fi% 3568\ifdim\multitableparskip=0pt 3569\global\multitableparskip=\multitablelinespace 3570\global\advance\multitableparskip-7pt %% to keep parskip somewhat smaller 3571 %% than skip between lines in the table. 3572\fi} 3573 3574 3575\message{conditionals,} 3576 3577% @iftex, @ifnotdocbook, @ifnothtml, @ifnotinfo, @ifnotplaintext, 3578% @ifnotxml always succeed. They currently do nothing; we don't 3579% attempt to check whether the conditionals are properly nested. But we 3580% have to remember that they are conditionals, so that @end doesn't 3581% attempt to close an environment group. 3582% 3583\def\makecond#1{% 3584 \expandafter\let\csname #1\endcsname = \relax 3585 \expandafter\let\csname iscond.#1\endcsname = 1 3586} 3587\makecond{iftex} 3588\makecond{ifnotdocbook} 3589\makecond{ifnothtml} 3590\makecond{ifnotinfo} 3591\makecond{ifnotplaintext} 3592\makecond{ifnotxml} 3593 3594% Ignore @ignore, @ifhtml, @ifinfo, and the like. 3595% 3596\def\direntry{\doignore{direntry}} 3597\def\documentdescription{\doignore{documentdescription}} 3598\def\docbook{\doignore{docbook}} 3599\def\html{\doignore{html}} 3600\def\ifdocbook{\doignore{ifdocbook}} 3601\def\ifhtml{\doignore{ifhtml}} 3602\def\ifinfo{\doignore{ifinfo}} 3603\def\ifnottex{\doignore{ifnottex}} 3604\def\ifplaintext{\doignore{ifplaintext}} 3605\def\ifxml{\doignore{ifxml}} 3606\def\ignore{\doignore{ignore}} 3607\def\menu{\doignore{menu}} 3608\def\xml{\doignore{xml}} 3609 3610% Ignore text until a line `@end #1', keeping track of nested conditionals. 3611% 3612% A count to remember the depth of nesting. 3613\newcount\doignorecount 3614 3615\def\doignore#1{\begingroup 3616 % Scan in ``verbatim'' mode: 3617 \obeylines 3618 \catcode`\@ = \other 3619 \catcode`\{ = \other 3620 \catcode`\} = \other 3621 % 3622 % Make sure that spaces turn into tokens that match what \doignoretext wants. 3623 \spaceisspace 3624 % 3625 % Count number of #1's that we've seen. 3626 \doignorecount = 0 3627 % 3628 % Swallow text until we reach the matching `@end #1'. 3629 \dodoignore{#1}% 3630} 3631 3632{ \catcode`_=11 % We want to use \_STOP_ which cannot appear in texinfo source. 3633 \obeylines % 3634 % 3635 \gdef\dodoignore#1{% 3636 % #1 contains the command name as a string, e.g., `ifinfo'. 3637 % 3638 % Define a command to find the next `@end #1'. 3639 \long\def\doignoretext##1^^M@end #1{% 3640 \doignoretextyyy##1^^M@#1\_STOP_}% 3641 % 3642 % And this command to find another #1 command, at the beginning of a 3643 % line. (Otherwise, we would consider a line `@c @ifset', for 3644 % example, to count as an @ifset for nesting.) 3645 \long\def\doignoretextyyy##1^^M@#1##2\_STOP_{\doignoreyyy{##2}\_STOP_}% 3646 % 3647 % And now expand that command. 3648 \doignoretext ^^M% 3649 }% 3650} 3651 3652\def\doignoreyyy#1{% 3653 \def\temp{#1}% 3654 \ifx\temp\empty % Nothing found. 3655 \let\next\doignoretextzzz 3656 \else % Found a nested condition, ... 3657 \advance\doignorecount by 1 3658 \let\next\doignoretextyyy % ..., look for another. 3659 % If we're here, #1 ends with ^^M\ifinfo (for example). 3660 \fi 3661 \next #1% the token \_STOP_ is present just after this macro. 3662} 3663 3664% We have to swallow the remaining "\_STOP_". 3665% 3666\def\doignoretextzzz#1{% 3667 \ifnum\doignorecount = 0 % We have just found the outermost @end. 3668 \let\next\enddoignore 3669 \else % Still inside a nested condition. 3670 \advance\doignorecount by -1 3671 \let\next\doignoretext % Look for the next @end. 3672 \fi 3673 \next 3674} 3675 3676% Finish off ignored text. 3677{ \obeylines% 3678 % Ignore anything after the last `@end #1'; this matters in verbatim 3679 % environments, where otherwise the newline after an ignored conditional 3680 % would result in a blank line in the output. 3681 \gdef\enddoignore#1^^M{\endgroup\ignorespaces}% 3682} 3683 3684 3685% @set VAR sets the variable VAR to an empty value. 3686% @set VAR REST-OF-LINE sets VAR to the value REST-OF-LINE. 3687% 3688% Since we want to separate VAR from REST-OF-LINE (which might be 3689% empty), we can't just use \parsearg; we have to insert a space of our 3690% own to delimit the rest of the line, and then take it out again if we 3691% didn't need it. 3692% We rely on the fact that \parsearg sets \catcode`\ =10. 3693% 3694\parseargdef\set{\setyyy#1 \endsetyyy} 3695\def\setyyy#1 #2\endsetyyy{% 3696 {% 3697 \makevalueexpandable 3698 \def\temp{#2}% 3699 \edef\next{\gdef\makecsname{SET#1}}% 3700 \ifx\temp\empty 3701 \next{}% 3702 \else 3703 \setzzz#2\endsetzzz 3704 \fi 3705 }% 3706} 3707% Remove the trailing space \setxxx inserted. 3708\def\setzzz#1 \endsetzzz{\next{#1}} 3709 3710% @clear VAR clears (i.e., unsets) the variable VAR. 3711% 3712\parseargdef\clear{% 3713 {% 3714 \makevalueexpandable 3715 \global\expandafter\let\csname SET#1\endcsname=\relax 3716 }% 3717} 3718 3719% @value{foo} gets the text saved in variable foo. 3720\def\value{\begingroup\makevalueexpandable\valuexxx} 3721\def\valuexxx#1{\expandablevalue{#1}\endgroup} 3722{ 3723 \catcode`\- = \active \catcode`\_ = \active 3724 % 3725 \gdef\makevalueexpandable{% 3726 \let\value = \expandablevalue 3727 % We don't want these characters active, ... 3728 \catcode`\-=\other \catcode`\_=\other 3729 % ..., but we might end up with active ones in the argument if 3730 % we're called from @code, as @code{@value{foo-bar_}}, though. 3731 % So \let them to their normal equivalents. 3732 \let-\realdash \let_\normalunderscore 3733 } 3734} 3735 3736% We have this subroutine so that we can handle at least some @value's 3737% properly in indexes (we call \makevalueexpandable in \indexdummies). 3738% The command has to be fully expandable (if the variable is set), since 3739% the result winds up in the index file. This means that if the 3740% variable's value contains other Texinfo commands, it's almost certain 3741% it will fail (although perhaps we could fix that with sufficient work 3742% to do a one-level expansion on the result, instead of complete). 3743% 3744\def\expandablevalue#1{% 3745 \expandafter\ifx\csname SET#1\endcsname\relax 3746 {[No value for ``#1'']}% 3747 \message{Variable `#1', used in @value, is not set.}% 3748 \else 3749 \csname SET#1\endcsname 3750 \fi 3751} 3752 3753% @ifset VAR ... @end ifset reads the `...' iff VAR has been defined 3754% with @set. 3755% 3756% To get special treatment of `@end ifset,' call \makeond and the redefine. 3757% 3758\makecond{ifset} 3759\def\ifset{\parsearg{\doifset{\let\next=\ifsetfail}}} 3760\def\doifset#1#2{% 3761 {% 3762 \makevalueexpandable 3763 \let\next=\empty 3764 \expandafter\ifx\csname SET#2\endcsname\relax 3765 #1% If not set, redefine \next. 3766 \fi 3767 \expandafter 3768 }\next 3769} 3770\def\ifsetfail{\doignore{ifset}} 3771 3772% @ifclear VAR ... @end ifclear reads the `...' iff VAR has never been 3773% defined with @set, or has been undefined with @clear. 3774% 3775% The `\else' inside the `\doifset' parameter is a trick to reuse the 3776% above code: if the variable is not set, do nothing, if it is set, 3777% then redefine \next to \ifclearfail. 3778% 3779\makecond{ifclear} 3780\def\ifclear{\parsearg{\doifset{\else \let\next=\ifclearfail}}} 3781\def\ifclearfail{\doignore{ifclear}} 3782 3783% @dircategory CATEGORY -- specify a category of the dir file 3784% which this file should belong to. Ignore this in TeX. 3785\let\dircategory=\comment 3786 3787% @defininfoenclose. 3788\let\definfoenclose=\comment 3789 3790 3791\message{indexing,} 3792% Index generation facilities 3793 3794% Define \newwrite to be identical to plain tex's \newwrite 3795% except not \outer, so it can be used within macros and \if's. 3796\edef\newwrite{\makecsname{ptexnewwrite}} 3797 3798% \newindex {foo} defines an index named foo. 3799% It automatically defines \fooindex such that 3800% \fooindex ...rest of line... puts an entry in the index foo. 3801% It also defines \fooindfile to be the number of the output channel for 3802% the file that accumulates this index. The file's extension is foo. 3803% The name of an index should be no more than 2 characters long 3804% for the sake of vms. 3805% 3806\def\newindex#1{% 3807 \iflinks 3808 \expandafter\newwrite \csname#1indfile\endcsname 3809 \openout \csname#1indfile\endcsname \jobname.#1 % Open the file 3810 \fi 3811 \expandafter\xdef\csname#1index\endcsname{% % Define @#1index 3812 \noexpand\doindex{#1}} 3813} 3814 3815% @defindex foo == \newindex{foo} 3816% 3817\def\defindex{\parsearg\newindex} 3818 3819% Define @defcodeindex, like @defindex except put all entries in @code. 3820% 3821\def\defcodeindex{\parsearg\newcodeindex} 3822% 3823\def\newcodeindex#1{% 3824 \iflinks 3825 \expandafter\newwrite \csname#1indfile\endcsname 3826 \openout \csname#1indfile\endcsname \jobname.#1 3827 \fi 3828 \expandafter\xdef\csname#1index\endcsname{% 3829 \noexpand\docodeindex{#1}}% 3830} 3831 3832 3833% @synindex foo bar makes index foo feed into index bar. 3834% Do this instead of @defindex foo if you don't want it as a separate index. 3835% 3836% @syncodeindex foo bar similar, but put all entries made for index foo 3837% inside @code. 3838% 3839\def\synindex#1 #2 {\dosynindex\doindex{#1}{#2}} 3840\def\syncodeindex#1 #2 {\dosynindex\docodeindex{#1}{#2}} 3841 3842% #1 is \doindex or \docodeindex, #2 the index getting redefined (foo), 3843% #3 the target index (bar). 3844\def\dosynindex#1#2#3{% 3845 % Only do \closeout if we haven't already done it, else we'll end up 3846 % closing the target index. 3847 \expandafter \ifx\csname donesynindex#2\endcsname \undefined 3848 % The \closeout helps reduce unnecessary open files; the limit on the 3849 % Acorn RISC OS is a mere 16 files. 3850 \expandafter\closeout\csname#2indfile\endcsname 3851 \expandafter\let\csname\donesynindex#2\endcsname = 1 3852 \fi 3853 % redefine \fooindfile: 3854 \expandafter\let\expandafter\temp\expandafter=\csname#3indfile\endcsname 3855 \expandafter\let\csname#2indfile\endcsname=\temp 3856 % redefine \fooindex: 3857 \expandafter\xdef\csname#2index\endcsname{\noexpand#1{#3}}% 3858} 3859 3860% Define \doindex, the driver for all \fooindex macros. 3861% Argument #1 is generated by the calling \fooindex macro, 3862% and it is "foo", the name of the index. 3863 3864% \doindex just uses \parsearg; it calls \doind for the actual work. 3865% This is because \doind is more useful to call from other macros. 3866 3867% There is also \dosubind {index}{topic}{subtopic} 3868% which makes an entry in a two-level index such as the operation index. 3869 3870\def\doindex#1{\edef\indexname{#1}\parsearg\singleindexer} 3871\def\singleindexer #1{\doind{\indexname}{#1}} 3872 3873% like the previous two, but they put @code around the argument. 3874\def\docodeindex#1{\edef\indexname{#1}\parsearg\singlecodeindexer} 3875\def\singlecodeindexer #1{\doind{\indexname}{\code{#1}}} 3876 3877% Take care of Texinfo commands that can appear in an index entry. 3878% Since there are some commands we want to expand, and others we don't, 3879% we have to laboriously prevent expansion for those that we don't. 3880% 3881\def\indexdummies{% 3882 \escapechar = `\\ % use backslash in output files. 3883 \def\@{@}% change to @@ when we switch to @ as escape char in index files. 3884 \def\ {\realbackslash\space }% 3885 % 3886 % Need these in case \tex is in effect and \{ is a \delimiter again. 3887 % But can't use \lbracecmd and \rbracecmd because texindex assumes 3888 % braces and backslashes are used only as delimiters. 3889 \let\{ = \mylbrace 3890 \let\} = \myrbrace 3891 % 3892 % I don't entirely understand this, but when an index entry is 3893 % generated from a macro call, the \endinput which \scanmacro inserts 3894 % causes processing to be prematurely terminated. This is, 3895 % apparently, because \indexsorttmp is fully expanded, and \endinput 3896 % is an expandable command. The redefinition below makes \endinput 3897 % disappear altogether for that purpose -- although logging shows that 3898 % processing continues to some further point. On the other hand, it 3899 % seems \endinput does not hurt in the printed index arg, since that 3900 % is still getting written without apparent harm. 3901 % 3902 % Sample source (mac-idx3.tex, reported by Graham Percival to 3903 % help-texinfo, 22may06): 3904 % @macro funindex {WORD} 3905 % @findex xyz 3906 % @end macro 3907 % ... 3908 % @funindex commtest 3909 % 3910 % The above is not enough to reproduce the bug, but it gives the flavor. 3911 % 3912 % Sample whatsit resulting: 3913 % .@write3{\entry{xyz}{@folio }{@code {xyz@endinput }}} 3914 % 3915 % So: 3916 \let\endinput = \empty 3917 % 3918 % Do the redefinitions. 3919 \commondummies 3920} 3921 3922% For the aux and toc files, @ is the escape character. So we want to 3923% redefine everything using @ as the escape character (instead of 3924% \realbackslash, still used for index files). When everything uses @, 3925% this will be simpler. 3926% 3927\def\atdummies{% 3928 \def\@{@@}% 3929 \def\ {@ }% 3930 \let\{ = \lbraceatcmd 3931 \let\} = \rbraceatcmd 3932 % 3933 % Do the redefinitions. 3934 \commondummies 3935 \otherbackslash 3936} 3937 3938% Called from \indexdummies and \atdummies. 3939% 3940\def\commondummies{% 3941 % 3942 % \definedummyword defines \#1 as \string\#1\space, thus effectively 3943 % preventing its expansion. This is used only for control% words, 3944 % not control letters, because the \space would be incorrect for 3945 % control characters, but is needed to separate the control word 3946 % from whatever follows. 3947 % 3948 % For control letters, we have \definedummyletter, which omits the 3949 % space. 3950 % 3951 % These can be used both for control words that take an argument and 3952 % those that do not. If it is followed by {arg} in the input, then 3953 % that will dutifully get written to the index (or wherever). 3954 % 3955 \def\definedummyword ##1{\def##1{\string##1\space}}% 3956 \def\definedummyletter##1{\def##1{\string##1}}% 3957 \let\definedummyaccent\definedummyletter 3958 % 3959 \commondummiesnofonts 3960 % 3961 \definedummyletter\_% 3962 % 3963 % Non-English letters. 3964 \definedummyword\AA 3965 \definedummyword\AE 3966 \definedummyword\L 3967 \definedummyword\OE 3968 \definedummyword\O 3969 \definedummyword\aa 3970 \definedummyword\ae 3971 \definedummyword\l 3972 \definedummyword\oe 3973 \definedummyword\o 3974 \definedummyword\ss 3975 \definedummyword\exclamdown 3976 \definedummyword\questiondown 3977 \definedummyword\ordf 3978 \definedummyword\ordm 3979 % 3980 % Although these internal commands shouldn't show up, sometimes they do. 3981 \definedummyword\bf 3982 \definedummyword\gtr 3983 \definedummyword\hat 3984 \definedummyword\less 3985 \definedummyword\sf 3986 \definedummyword\sl 3987 \definedummyword\tclose 3988 \definedummyword\tt 3989 % 3990 \definedummyword\LaTeX 3991 \definedummyword\TeX 3992 % 3993 % Assorted special characters. 3994 \definedummyword\bullet 3995 \definedummyword\comma 3996 \definedummyword\copyright 3997 \definedummyword\registeredsymbol 3998 \definedummyword\dots 3999 \definedummyword\enddots 4000 \definedummyword\equiv 4001 \definedummyword\error 4002 \definedummyword\euro 4003 \definedummyword\guillemetleft 4004 \definedummyword\guillemetright 4005 \definedummyword\guilsinglleft 4006 \definedummyword\guilsinglright 4007 \definedummyword\expansion 4008 \definedummyword\minus 4009 \definedummyword\pounds 4010 \definedummyword\point 4011 \definedummyword\print 4012 \definedummyword\quotedblbase 4013 \definedummyword\quotedblleft 4014 \definedummyword\quotedblright 4015 \definedummyword\quoteleft 4016 \definedummyword\quoteright 4017 \definedummyword\quotesinglbase 4018 \definedummyword\result 4019 \definedummyword\textdegree 4020 % 4021 % We want to disable all macros so that they are not expanded by \write. 4022 \macrolist 4023 % 4024 \normalturnoffactive 4025 % 4026 % Handle some cases of @value -- where it does not contain any 4027 % (non-fully-expandable) commands. 4028 \makevalueexpandable 4029} 4030 4031% \commondummiesnofonts: common to \commondummies and \indexnofonts. 4032% 4033\def\commondummiesnofonts{% 4034 % Control letters and accents. 4035 \definedummyletter\!% 4036 \definedummyaccent\"% 4037 \definedummyaccent\'% 4038 \definedummyletter\*% 4039 \definedummyaccent\,% 4040 \definedummyletter\.% 4041 \definedummyletter\/% 4042 \definedummyletter\:% 4043 \definedummyaccent\=% 4044 \definedummyletter\?% 4045 \definedummyaccent\^% 4046 \definedummyaccent\`% 4047 \definedummyaccent\~% 4048 \definedummyword\u 4049 \definedummyword\v 4050 \definedummyword\H 4051 \definedummyword\dotaccent 4052 \definedummyword\ringaccent 4053 \definedummyword\tieaccent 4054 \definedummyword\ubaraccent 4055 \definedummyword\udotaccent 4056 \definedummyword\dotless 4057 % 4058 % Texinfo font commands. 4059 \definedummyword\b 4060 \definedummyword\i 4061 \definedummyword\r 4062 \definedummyword\sc 4063 \definedummyword\t 4064 % 4065 % Commands that take arguments. 4066 \definedummyword\acronym 4067 \definedummyword\cite 4068 \definedummyword\code 4069 \definedummyword\command 4070 \definedummyword\dfn 4071 \definedummyword\emph 4072 \definedummyword\env 4073 \definedummyword\file 4074 \definedummyword\kbd 4075 \definedummyword\key 4076 \definedummyword\math 4077 \definedummyword\option 4078 \definedummyword\pxref 4079 \definedummyword\ref 4080 \definedummyword\samp 4081 \definedummyword\strong 4082 \definedummyword\tie 4083 \definedummyword\uref 4084 \definedummyword\url 4085 \definedummyword\var 4086 \definedummyword\verb 4087 \definedummyword\w 4088 \definedummyword\xref 4089} 4090 4091% \indexnofonts is used when outputting the strings to sort the index 4092% by, and when constructing control sequence names. It eliminates all 4093% control sequences and just writes whatever the best ASCII sort string 4094% would be for a given command (usually its argument). 4095% 4096\def\indexnofonts{% 4097 % Accent commands should become @asis. 4098 \def\definedummyaccent##1{\let##1\asis}% 4099 % We can just ignore other control letters. 4100 \def\definedummyletter##1{\let##1\empty}% 4101 % Hopefully, all control words can become @asis. 4102 \let\definedummyword\definedummyaccent 4103 % 4104 \commondummiesnofonts 4105 % 4106 % Don't no-op \tt, since it isn't a user-level command 4107 % and is used in the definitions of the active chars like <, >, |, etc. 4108 % Likewise with the other plain tex font commands. 4109 %\let\tt=\asis 4110 % 4111 \def\ { }% 4112 \def\@{@}% 4113 % how to handle braces? 4114 \def\_{\normalunderscore}% 4115 % 4116 % Non-English letters. 4117 \def\AA{AA}% 4118 \def\AE{AE}% 4119 \def\L{L}% 4120 \def\OE{OE}% 4121 \def\O{O}% 4122 \def\aa{aa}% 4123 \def\ae{ae}% 4124 \def\l{l}% 4125 \def\oe{oe}% 4126 \def\o{o}% 4127 \def\ss{ss}% 4128 \def\exclamdown{!}% 4129 \def\questiondown{?}% 4130 \def\ordf{a}% 4131 \def\ordm{o}% 4132 % 4133 \def\LaTeX{LaTeX}% 4134 \def\TeX{TeX}% 4135 % 4136 % Assorted special characters. 4137 % (The following {} will end up in the sort string, but that's ok.) 4138 \def\bullet{bullet}% 4139 \def\comma{,}% 4140 \def\copyright{copyright}% 4141 \def\registeredsymbol{R}% 4142 \def\dots{...}% 4143 \def\enddots{...}% 4144 \def\equiv{==}% 4145 \def\error{error}% 4146 \def\euro{euro}% 4147 \def\guillemetleft{<<}% 4148 \def\guillemetright{>>}% 4149 \def\guilsinglleft{<}% 4150 \def\guilsinglright{>}% 4151 \def\expansion{==>}% 4152 \def\minus{-}% 4153 \def\pounds{pounds}% 4154 \def\point{.}% 4155 \def\print{-|}% 4156 \def\quotedblbase{"}% 4157 \def\quotedblleft{"}% 4158 \def\quotedblright{"}% 4159 \def\quoteleft{`}% 4160 \def\quoteright{'}% 4161 \def\quotesinglbase{,}% 4162 \def\result{=>}% 4163 \def\textdegree{degrees}% 4164 % 4165 % We need to get rid of all macros, leaving only the arguments (if present). 4166 % Of course this is not nearly correct, but it is the best we can do for now. 4167 % makeinfo does not expand macros in the argument to @deffn, which ends up 4168 % writing an index entry, and texindex isn't prepared for an index sort entry 4169 % that starts with \. 4170 % 4171 % Since macro invocations are followed by braces, we can just redefine them 4172 % to take a single TeX argument. The case of a macro invocation that 4173 % goes to end-of-line is not handled. 4174 % 4175 \macrolist 4176} 4177 4178\let\indexbackslash=0 %overridden during \printindex. 4179\let\SETmarginindex=\relax % put index entries in margin (undocumented)? 4180 4181% Most index entries go through here, but \dosubind is the general case. 4182% #1 is the index name, #2 is the entry text. 4183\def\doind#1#2{\dosubind{#1}{#2}{}} 4184 4185% Workhorse for all \fooindexes. 4186% #1 is name of index, #2 is stuff to put there, #3 is subentry -- 4187% empty if called from \doind, as we usually are (the main exception 4188% is with most defuns, which call us directly). 4189% 4190\def\dosubind#1#2#3{% 4191 \iflinks 4192 {% 4193 % Store the main index entry text (including the third arg). 4194 \toks0 = {#2}% 4195 % If third arg is present, precede it with a space. 4196 \def\thirdarg{#3}% 4197 \ifx\thirdarg\empty \else 4198 \toks0 = \expandafter{\the\toks0 \space #3}% 4199 \fi 4200 % 4201 \edef\writeto{\csname#1indfile\endcsname}% 4202 % 4203 \safewhatsit\dosubindwrite 4204 }% 4205 \fi 4206} 4207 4208% Write the entry in \toks0 to the index file: 4209% 4210\def\dosubindwrite{% 4211 % Put the index entry in the margin if desired. 4212 \ifx\SETmarginindex\relax\else 4213 \insert\margin{\hbox{\vrule height8pt depth3pt width0pt \the\toks0}}% 4214 \fi 4215 % 4216 % Remember, we are within a group. 4217 \indexdummies % Must do this here, since \bf, etc expand at this stage 4218 \def\backslashcurfont{\indexbackslash}% \indexbackslash isn't defined now 4219 % so it will be output as is; and it will print as backslash. 4220 % 4221 % Process the index entry with all font commands turned off, to 4222 % get the string to sort by. 4223 {\indexnofonts 4224 \edef\temp{\the\toks0}% need full expansion 4225 \xdef\indexsorttmp{\temp}% 4226 }% 4227 % 4228 % Set up the complete index entry, with both the sort key and 4229 % the original text, including any font commands. We write 4230 % three arguments to \entry to the .?? file (four in the 4231 % subentry case), texindex reduces to two when writing the .??s 4232 % sorted result. 4233 \edef\temp{% 4234 \write\writeto{% 4235 \string\entry{\indexsorttmp}{\noexpand\folio}{\the\toks0}}% 4236 }% 4237 \temp 4238} 4239 4240% Take care of unwanted page breaks/skips around a whatsit: 4241% 4242% If a skip is the last thing on the list now, preserve it 4243% by backing up by \lastskip, doing the \write, then inserting 4244% the skip again. Otherwise, the whatsit generated by the 4245% \write or \pdfdest will make \lastskip zero. The result is that 4246% sequences like this: 4247% @end defun 4248% @tindex whatever 4249% @defun ... 4250% will have extra space inserted, because the \medbreak in the 4251% start of the @defun won't see the skip inserted by the @end of 4252% the previous defun. 4253% 4254% But don't do any of this if we're not in vertical mode. We 4255% don't want to do a \vskip and prematurely end a paragraph. 4256% 4257% Avoid page breaks due to these extra skips, too. 4258% 4259% But wait, there is a catch there: 4260% We'll have to check whether \lastskip is zero skip. \ifdim is not 4261% sufficient for this purpose, as it ignores stretch and shrink parts 4262% of the skip. The only way seems to be to check the textual 4263% representation of the skip. 4264% 4265% The following is almost like \def\zeroskipmacro{0.0pt} except that 4266% the ``p'' and ``t'' characters have catcode \other, not 11 (letter). 4267% 4268\edef\zeroskipmacro{\expandafter\the\csname z@skip\endcsname} 4269% 4270\newskip\whatsitskip 4271\newcount\whatsitpenalty 4272% 4273% ..., ready, GO: 4274% 4275\def\safewhatsit#1{% 4276\ifhmode 4277 #1% 4278\else 4279 % \lastskip and \lastpenalty cannot both be nonzero simultaneously. 4280 \whatsitskip = \lastskip 4281 \edef\lastskipmacro{\the\lastskip}% 4282 \whatsitpenalty = \lastpenalty 4283 % 4284 % If \lastskip is nonzero, that means the last item was a 4285 % skip. And since a skip is discardable, that means this 4286 % -\whatsitskip glue we're inserting is preceded by a 4287 % non-discardable item, therefore it is not a potential 4288 % breakpoint, therefore no \nobreak needed. 4289 \ifx\lastskipmacro\zeroskipmacro 4290 \else 4291 \vskip-\whatsitskip 4292 \fi 4293 % 4294 #1% 4295 % 4296 \ifx\lastskipmacro\zeroskipmacro 4297 % If \lastskip was zero, perhaps the last item was a penalty, and 4298 % perhaps it was >=10000, e.g., a \nobreak. In that case, we want 4299 % to re-insert the same penalty (values >10000 are used for various 4300 % signals); since we just inserted a non-discardable item, any 4301 % following glue (such as a \parskip) would be a breakpoint. For example: 4302 % 4303 % @deffn deffn-whatever 4304 % @vindex index-whatever 4305 % Description. 4306 % would allow a break between the index-whatever whatsit 4307 % and the "Description." paragraph. 4308 \ifnum\whatsitpenalty>9999 \penalty\whatsitpenalty \fi 4309 \else 4310 % On the other hand, if we had a nonzero \lastskip, 4311 % this make-up glue would be preceded by a non-discardable item 4312 % (the whatsit from the \write), so we must insert a \nobreak. 4313 \nobreak\vskip\whatsitskip 4314 \fi 4315\fi 4316} 4317 4318% The index entry written in the file actually looks like 4319% \entry {sortstring}{page}{topic} 4320% or 4321% \entry {sortstring}{page}{topic}{subtopic} 4322% The texindex program reads in these files and writes files 4323% containing these kinds of lines: 4324% \initial {c} 4325% before the first topic whose initial is c 4326% \entry {topic}{pagelist} 4327% for a topic that is used without subtopics 4328% \primary {topic} 4329% for the beginning of a topic that is used with subtopics 4330% \secondary {subtopic}{pagelist} 4331% for each subtopic. 4332 4333% Define the user-accessible indexing commands 4334% @findex, @vindex, @kindex, @cindex. 4335 4336\def\findex {\fnindex} 4337\def\kindex {\kyindex} 4338\def\cindex {\cpindex} 4339\def\vindex {\vrindex} 4340\def\tindex {\tpindex} 4341\def\pindex {\pgindex} 4342 4343\def\cindexsub {\begingroup\obeylines\cindexsub} 4344{\obeylines % 4345\gdef\cindexsub "#1" #2^^M{\endgroup % 4346\dosubind{cp}{#2}{#1}}} 4347 4348% Define the macros used in formatting output of the sorted index material. 4349 4350% @printindex causes a particular index (the ??s file) to get printed. 4351% It does not print any chapter heading (usually an @unnumbered). 4352% 4353\parseargdef\printindex{\begingroup 4354 \dobreak \chapheadingskip{10000}% 4355 % 4356 \smallfonts \rm 4357 \tolerance = 9500 4358 \plainfrenchspacing 4359 \everypar = {}% don't want the \kern\-parindent from indentation suppression. 4360 % 4361 % See if the index file exists and is nonempty. 4362 % Change catcode of @ here so that if the index file contains 4363 % \initial {@} 4364 % as its first line, TeX doesn't complain about mismatched braces 4365 % (because it thinks @} is a control sequence). 4366 \catcode`\@ = 11 4367 \openin 1 \jobname.#1s 4368 \ifeof 1 4369 % \enddoublecolumns gets confused if there is no text in the index, 4370 % and it loses the chapter title and the aux file entries for the 4371 % index. The easiest way to prevent this problem is to make sure 4372 % there is some text. 4373 \putwordIndexNonexistent 4374 \else 4375 % 4376 % If the index file exists but is empty, then \openin leaves \ifeof 4377 % false. We have to make TeX try to read something from the file, so 4378 % it can discover if there is anything in it. 4379 \read 1 to \temp 4380 \ifeof 1 4381 \putwordIndexIsEmpty 4382 \else 4383 % Index files are almost Texinfo source, but we use \ as the escape 4384 % character. It would be better to use @, but that's too big a change 4385 % to make right now. 4386 \def\indexbackslash{\backslashcurfont}% 4387 \catcode`\\ = 0 4388 \escapechar = `\\ 4389 \begindoublecolumns 4390 \input \jobname.#1s 4391 \enddoublecolumns 4392 \fi 4393 \fi 4394 \closein 1 4395\endgroup} 4396 4397% These macros are used by the sorted index file itself. 4398% Change them to control the appearance of the index. 4399 4400\def\initial#1{{% 4401 % Some minor font changes for the special characters. 4402 \let\tentt=\sectt \let\tt=\sectt \let\sf=\sectt 4403 % 4404 % Remove any glue we may have, we'll be inserting our own. 4405 \removelastskip 4406 % 4407 % We like breaks before the index initials, so insert a bonus. 4408 \nobreak 4409 \vskip 0pt plus 3\baselineskip 4410 \penalty 0 4411 \vskip 0pt plus -3\baselineskip 4412 % 4413 % Typeset the initial. Making this add up to a whole number of 4414 % baselineskips increases the chance of the dots lining up from column 4415 % to column. It still won't often be perfect, because of the stretch 4416 % we need before each entry, but it's better. 4417 % 4418 % No shrink because it confuses \balancecolumns. 4419 \vskip 1.67\baselineskip plus .5\baselineskip 4420 \leftline{\secbf #1}% 4421 % Do our best not to break after the initial. 4422 \nobreak 4423 \vskip .33\baselineskip plus .1\baselineskip 4424}} 4425 4426% \entry typesets a paragraph consisting of the text (#1), dot leaders, and 4427% then page number (#2) flushed to the right margin. It is used for index 4428% and table of contents entries. The paragraph is indented by \leftskip. 4429% 4430% A straightforward implementation would start like this: 4431% \def\entry#1#2{... 4432% But this frozes the catcodes in the argument, and can cause problems to 4433% @code, which sets - active. This problem was fixed by a kludge--- 4434% ``-'' was active throughout whole index, but this isn't really right. 4435% 4436% The right solution is to prevent \entry from swallowing the whole text. 4437% --kasal, 21nov03 4438\def\entry{% 4439 \begingroup 4440 % 4441 % Start a new paragraph if necessary, so our assignments below can't 4442 % affect previous text. 4443 \par 4444 % 4445 % Do not fill out the last line with white space. 4446 \parfillskip = 0in 4447 % 4448 % No extra space above this paragraph. 4449 \parskip = 0in 4450 % 4451 % Do not prefer a separate line ending with a hyphen to fewer lines. 4452 \finalhyphendemerits = 0 4453 % 4454 % \hangindent is only relevant when the entry text and page number 4455 % don't both fit on one line. In that case, bob suggests starting the 4456 % dots pretty far over on the line. Unfortunately, a large 4457 % indentation looks wrong when the entry text itself is broken across 4458 % lines. So we use a small indentation and put up with long leaders. 4459 % 4460 % \hangafter is reset to 1 (which is the value we want) at the start 4461 % of each paragraph, so we need not do anything with that. 4462 \hangindent = 2em 4463 % 4464 % When the entry text needs to be broken, just fill out the first line 4465 % with blank space. 4466 \rightskip = 0pt plus1fil 4467 % 4468 % A bit of stretch before each entry for the benefit of balancing 4469 % columns. 4470 \vskip 0pt plus1pt 4471 % 4472 % Swallow the left brace of the text (first parameter): 4473 \afterassignment\doentry 4474 \let\temp = 4475} 4476\def\doentry{% 4477 \bgroup % Instead of the swallowed brace. 4478 \noindent 4479 \aftergroup\finishentry 4480 % And now comes the text of the entry. 4481} 4482\def\finishentry#1{% 4483 % #1 is the page number. 4484 % 4485 % The following is kludged to not output a line of dots in the index if 4486 % there are no page numbers. The next person who breaks this will be 4487 % cursed by a Unix daemon. 4488 \setbox\boxA = \hbox{#1}% 4489 \ifdim\wd\boxA = 0pt 4490 \ % 4491 \else 4492 % 4493 % If we must, put the page number on a line of its own, and fill out 4494 % this line with blank space. (The \hfil is overwhelmed with the 4495 % fill leaders glue in \indexdotfill if the page number does fit.) 4496 \hfil\penalty50 4497 \null\nobreak\indexdotfill % Have leaders before the page number. 4498 % 4499 % The `\ ' here is removed by the implicit \unskip that TeX does as 4500 % part of (the primitive) \par. Without it, a spurious underfull 4501 % \hbox ensues. 4502 \ifpdf 4503 \pdfgettoks#1.% 4504 \ \the\toksA 4505 \else 4506 \ #1% 4507 \fi 4508 \fi 4509 \par 4510 \endgroup 4511} 4512 4513% Like plain.tex's \dotfill, except uses up at least 1 em. 4514\def\indexdotfill{\cleaders 4515 \hbox{$\mathsurround=0pt \mkern1.5mu.\mkern1.5mu$}\hskip 1em plus 1fill} 4516 4517\def\primary #1{\line{#1\hfil}} 4518 4519\newskip\secondaryindent \secondaryindent=0.5cm 4520\def\secondary#1#2{{% 4521 \parfillskip=0in 4522 \parskip=0in 4523 \hangindent=1in 4524 \hangafter=1 4525 \noindent\hskip\secondaryindent\hbox{#1}\indexdotfill 4526 \ifpdf 4527 \pdfgettoks#2.\ \the\toksA % The page number ends the paragraph. 4528 \else 4529 #2 4530 \fi 4531 \par 4532}} 4533 4534% Define two-column mode, which we use to typeset indexes. 4535% Adapted from the TeXbook, page 416, which is to say, 4536% the manmac.tex format used to print the TeXbook itself. 4537\catcode`\@=11 4538 4539\newbox\partialpage 4540\newdimen\doublecolumnhsize 4541 4542\def\begindoublecolumns{\begingroup % ended by \enddoublecolumns 4543 % Grab any single-column material above us. 4544 \output = {% 4545 % 4546 % Here is a possibility not foreseen in manmac: if we accumulate a 4547 % whole lot of material, we might end up calling this \output 4548 % routine twice in a row (see the doublecol-lose test, which is 4549 % essentially a couple of indexes with @setchapternewpage off). In 4550 % that case we just ship out what is in \partialpage with the normal 4551 % output routine. Generally, \partialpage will be empty when this 4552 % runs and this will be a no-op. See the indexspread.tex test case. 4553 \ifvoid\partialpage \else 4554 \onepageout{\pagecontents\partialpage}% 4555 \fi 4556 % 4557 \global\setbox\partialpage = \vbox{% 4558 % Unvbox the main output page. 4559 \unvbox\PAGE 4560 \kern-\topskip \kern\baselineskip 4561 }% 4562 }% 4563 \eject % run that output routine to set \partialpage 4564 % 4565 % Use the double-column output routine for subsequent pages. 4566 \output = {\doublecolumnout}% 4567 % 4568 % Change the page size parameters. We could do this once outside this 4569 % routine, in each of @smallbook, @afourpaper, and the default 8.5x11 4570 % format, but then we repeat the same computation. Repeating a couple 4571 % of assignments once per index is clearly meaningless for the 4572 % execution time, so we may as well do it in one place. 4573 % 4574 % First we halve the line length, less a little for the gutter between 4575 % the columns. We compute the gutter based on the line length, so it 4576 % changes automatically with the paper format. The magic constant 4577 % below is chosen so that the gutter has the same value (well, +-<1pt) 4578 % as it did when we hard-coded it. 4579 % 4580 % We put the result in a separate register, \doublecolumhsize, so we 4581 % can restore it in \pagesofar, after \hsize itself has (potentially) 4582 % been clobbered. 4583 % 4584 \doublecolumnhsize = \hsize 4585 \advance\doublecolumnhsize by -.04154\hsize 4586 \divide\doublecolumnhsize by 2 4587 \hsize = \doublecolumnhsize 4588 % 4589 % Double the \vsize as well. (We don't need a separate register here, 4590 % since nobody clobbers \vsize.) 4591 \vsize = 2\vsize 4592} 4593 4594% The double-column output routine for all double-column pages except 4595% the last. 4596% 4597\def\doublecolumnout{% 4598 \splittopskip=\topskip \splitmaxdepth=\maxdepth 4599 % Get the available space for the double columns -- the normal 4600 % (undoubled) page height minus any material left over from the 4601 % previous page. 4602 \dimen@ = \vsize 4603 \divide\dimen@ by 2 4604 \advance\dimen@ by -\ht\partialpage 4605 % 4606 % box0 will be the left-hand column, box2 the right. 4607 \setbox0=\vsplit255 to\dimen@ \setbox2=\vsplit255 to\dimen@ 4608 \onepageout\pagesofar 4609 \unvbox255 4610 \penalty\outputpenalty 4611} 4612% 4613% Re-output the contents of the output page -- any previous material, 4614% followed by the two boxes we just split, in box0 and box2. 4615\def\pagesofar{% 4616 \unvbox\partialpage 4617 % 4618 \hsize = \doublecolumnhsize 4619 \wd0=\hsize \wd2=\hsize 4620 \hbox to\pagewidth{\box0\hfil\box2}% 4621} 4622% 4623% All done with double columns. 4624\def\enddoublecolumns{% 4625 % The following penalty ensures that the page builder is exercised 4626 % _before_ we change the output routine. This is necessary in the 4627 % following situation: 4628 % 4629 % The last section of the index consists only of a single entry. 4630 % Before this section, \pagetotal is less than \pagegoal, so no 4631 % break occurs before the last section starts. However, the last 4632 % section, consisting of \initial and the single \entry, does not 4633 % fit on the page and has to be broken off. Without the following 4634 % penalty the page builder will not be exercised until \eject 4635 % below, and by that time we'll already have changed the output 4636 % routine to the \balancecolumns version, so the next-to-last 4637 % double-column page will be processed with \balancecolumns, which 4638 % is wrong: The two columns will go to the main vertical list, with 4639 % the broken-off section in the recent contributions. As soon as 4640 % the output routine finishes, TeX starts reconsidering the page 4641 % break. The two columns and the broken-off section both fit on the 4642 % page, because the two columns now take up only half of the page 4643 % goal. When TeX sees \eject from below which follows the final 4644 % section, it invokes the new output routine that we've set after 4645 % \balancecolumns below; \onepageout will try to fit the two columns 4646 % and the final section into the vbox of \pageheight (see 4647 % \pagebody), causing an overfull box. 4648 % 4649 % Note that glue won't work here, because glue does not exercise the 4650 % page builder, unlike penalties (see The TeXbook, pp. 280-281). 4651 \penalty0 4652 % 4653 \output = {% 4654 % Split the last of the double-column material. Leave it on the 4655 % current page, no automatic page break. 4656 \balancecolumns 4657 % 4658 % If we end up splitting too much material for the current page, 4659 % though, there will be another page break right after this \output 4660 % invocation ends. Having called \balancecolumns once, we do not 4661 % want to call it again. Therefore, reset \output to its normal 4662 % definition right away. (We hope \balancecolumns will never be 4663 % called on to balance too much material, but if it is, this makes 4664 % the output somewhat more palatable.) 4665 \global\output = {\onepageout{\pagecontents\PAGE}}% 4666 }% 4667 \eject 4668 \endgroup % started in \begindoublecolumns 4669 % 4670 % \pagegoal was set to the doubled \vsize above, since we restarted 4671 % the current page. We're now back to normal single-column 4672 % typesetting, so reset \pagegoal to the normal \vsize (after the 4673 % \endgroup where \vsize got restored). 4674 \pagegoal = \vsize 4675} 4676% 4677% Called at the end of the double column material. 4678\def\balancecolumns{% 4679 \setbox0 = \vbox{\unvbox255}% like \box255 but more efficient, see p.120. 4680 \dimen@ = \ht0 4681 \advance\dimen@ by \topskip 4682 \advance\dimen@ by-\baselineskip 4683 \divide\dimen@ by 2 % target to split to 4684 %debug\message{final 2-column material height=\the\ht0, target=\the\dimen@.}% 4685 \splittopskip = \topskip 4686 % Loop until we get a decent breakpoint. 4687 {% 4688 \vbadness = 10000 4689 \loop 4690 \global\setbox3 = \copy0 4691 \global\setbox1 = \vsplit3 to \dimen@ 4692 \ifdim\ht3>\dimen@ 4693 \global\advance\dimen@ by 1pt 4694 \repeat 4695 }% 4696 %debug\message{split to \the\dimen@, column heights: \the\ht1, \the\ht3.}% 4697 \setbox0=\vbox to\dimen@{\unvbox1}% 4698 \setbox2=\vbox to\dimen@{\unvbox3}% 4699 % 4700 \pagesofar 4701} 4702\catcode`\@ = \other 4703 4704 4705\message{sectioning,} 4706% Chapters, sections, etc. 4707 4708% \unnumberedno is an oxymoron, of course. But we count the unnumbered 4709% sections so that we can refer to them unambiguously in the pdf 4710% outlines by their "section number". We avoid collisions with chapter 4711% numbers by starting them at 10000. (If a document ever has 10000 4712% chapters, we're in trouble anyway, I'm sure.) 4713\newcount\unnumberedno \unnumberedno = 10000 4714\newcount\chapno 4715\newcount\secno \secno=0 4716\newcount\subsecno \subsecno=0 4717\newcount\subsubsecno \subsubsecno=0 4718 4719% This counter is funny since it counts through charcodes of letters A, B, ... 4720\newcount\appendixno \appendixno = `\@ 4721% 4722% \def\appendixletter{\char\the\appendixno} 4723% We do the following ugly conditional instead of the above simple 4724% construct for the sake of pdftex, which needs the actual 4725% letter in the expansion, not just typeset. 4726% 4727\def\appendixletter{% 4728 \ifnum\appendixno=`A A% 4729 \else\ifnum\appendixno=`B B% 4730 \else\ifnum\appendixno=`C C% 4731 \else\ifnum\appendixno=`D D% 4732 \else\ifnum\appendixno=`E E% 4733 \else\ifnum\appendixno=`F F% 4734 \else\ifnum\appendixno=`G G% 4735 \else\ifnum\appendixno=`H H% 4736 \else\ifnum\appendixno=`I I% 4737 \else\ifnum\appendixno=`J J% 4738 \else\ifnum\appendixno=`K K% 4739 \else\ifnum\appendixno=`L L% 4740 \else\ifnum\appendixno=`M M% 4741 \else\ifnum\appendixno=`N N% 4742 \else\ifnum\appendixno=`O O% 4743 \else\ifnum\appendixno=`P P% 4744 \else\ifnum\appendixno=`Q Q% 4745 \else\ifnum\appendixno=`R R% 4746 \else\ifnum\appendixno=`S S% 4747 \else\ifnum\appendixno=`T T% 4748 \else\ifnum\appendixno=`U U% 4749 \else\ifnum\appendixno=`V V% 4750 \else\ifnum\appendixno=`W W% 4751 \else\ifnum\appendixno=`X X% 4752 \else\ifnum\appendixno=`Y Y% 4753 \else\ifnum\appendixno=`Z Z% 4754 % The \the is necessary, despite appearances, because \appendixletter is 4755 % expanded while writing the .toc file. \char\appendixno is not 4756 % expandable, thus it is written literally, thus all appendixes come out 4757 % with the same letter (or @) in the toc without it. 4758 \else\char\the\appendixno 4759 \fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi 4760 \fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi} 4761 4762% Each @chapter defines these (using marks) as the number+name, number 4763% and name of the chapter. Page headings and footings can use 4764% these. @section does likewise. 4765\def\thischapter{} 4766\def\thischapternum{} 4767\def\thischaptername{} 4768\def\thissection{} 4769\def\thissectionnum{} 4770\def\thissectionname{} 4771 4772\newcount\absseclevel % used to calculate proper heading level 4773\newcount\secbase\secbase=0 % @raisesections/@lowersections modify this count 4774 4775% @raisesections: treat @section as chapter, @subsection as section, etc. 4776\def\raisesections{\global\advance\secbase by -1} 4777\let\up=\raisesections % original BFox name 4778 4779% @lowersections: treat @chapter as section, @section as subsection, etc. 4780\def\lowersections{\global\advance\secbase by 1} 4781\let\down=\lowersections % original BFox name 4782 4783% we only have subsub. 4784\chardef\maxseclevel = 3 4785% 4786% A numbered section within an unnumbered changes to unnumbered too. 4787% To achive this, remember the "biggest" unnum. sec. we are currently in: 4788\chardef\unmlevel = \maxseclevel 4789% 4790% Trace whether the current chapter is an appendix or not: 4791% \chapheadtype is "N" or "A", unnumbered chapters are ignored. 4792\def\chapheadtype{N} 4793 4794% Choose a heading macro 4795% #1 is heading type 4796% #2 is heading level 4797% #3 is text for heading 4798\def\genhead#1#2#3{% 4799 % Compute the abs. sec. level: 4800 \absseclevel=#2 4801 \advance\absseclevel by \secbase 4802 % Make sure \absseclevel doesn't fall outside the range: 4803 \ifnum \absseclevel < 0 4804 \absseclevel = 0 4805 \else 4806 \ifnum \absseclevel > 3 4807 \absseclevel = 3 4808 \fi 4809 \fi 4810 % The heading type: 4811 \def\headtype{#1}% 4812 \if \headtype U% 4813 \ifnum \absseclevel < \unmlevel 4814 \chardef\unmlevel = \absseclevel 4815 \fi 4816 \else 4817 % Check for appendix sections: 4818 \ifnum \absseclevel = 0 4819 \edef\chapheadtype{\headtype}% 4820 \else 4821 \if \headtype A\if \chapheadtype N% 4822 \errmessage{@appendix... within a non-appendix chapter}% 4823 \fi\fi 4824 \fi 4825 % Check for numbered within unnumbered: 4826 \ifnum \absseclevel > \unmlevel 4827 \def\headtype{U}% 4828 \else 4829 \chardef\unmlevel = 3 4830 \fi 4831 \fi 4832 % Now print the heading: 4833 \if \headtype U% 4834 \ifcase\absseclevel 4835 \unnumberedzzz{#3}% 4836 \or \unnumberedseczzz{#3}% 4837 \or \unnumberedsubseczzz{#3}% 4838 \or \unnumberedsubsubseczzz{#3}% 4839 \fi 4840 \else 4841 \if \headtype A% 4842 \ifcase\absseclevel 4843 \appendixzzz{#3}% 4844 \or \appendixsectionzzz{#3}% 4845 \or \appendixsubseczzz{#3}% 4846 \or \appendixsubsubseczzz{#3}% 4847 \fi 4848 \else 4849 \ifcase\absseclevel 4850 \chapterzzz{#3}% 4851 \or \seczzz{#3}% 4852 \or \numberedsubseczzz{#3}% 4853 \or \numberedsubsubseczzz{#3}% 4854 \fi 4855 \fi 4856 \fi 4857 \suppressfirstparagraphindent 4858} 4859 4860% an interface: 4861\def\numhead{\genhead N} 4862\def\apphead{\genhead A} 4863\def\unnmhead{\genhead U} 4864 4865% @chapter, @appendix, @unnumbered. Increment top-level counter, reset 4866% all lower-level sectioning counters to zero. 4867% 4868% Also set \chaplevelprefix, which we prepend to @float sequence numbers 4869% (e.g., figures), q.v. By default (before any chapter), that is empty. 4870\let\chaplevelprefix = \empty 4871% 4872\outer\parseargdef\chapter{\numhead0{#1}} % normally numhead0 calls chapterzzz 4873\def\chapterzzz#1{% 4874 % section resetting is \global in case the chapter is in a group, such 4875 % as an @include file. 4876 \global\secno=0 \global\subsecno=0 \global\subsubsecno=0 4877 \global\advance\chapno by 1 4878 % 4879 % Used for \float. 4880 \gdef\chaplevelprefix{\the\chapno.}% 4881 \resetallfloatnos 4882 % 4883 \message{\putwordChapter\space \the\chapno}% 4884 % 4885 % Write the actual heading. 4886 \chapmacro{#1}{Ynumbered}{\the\chapno}% 4887 % 4888 % So @section and the like are numbered underneath this chapter. 4889 \global\let\section = \numberedsec 4890 \global\let\subsection = \numberedsubsec 4891 \global\let\subsubsection = \numberedsubsubsec 4892} 4893 4894\outer\parseargdef\appendix{\apphead0{#1}} % normally apphead0 calls appendixzzz 4895\def\appendixzzz#1{% 4896 \global\secno=0 \global\subsecno=0 \global\subsubsecno=0 4897 \global\advance\appendixno by 1 4898 \gdef\chaplevelprefix{\appendixletter.}% 4899 \resetallfloatnos 4900 % 4901 \def\appendixnum{\putwordAppendix\space \appendixletter}% 4902 \message{\appendixnum}% 4903 % 4904 \chapmacro{#1}{Yappendix}{\appendixletter}% 4905 % 4906 \global\let\section = \appendixsec 4907 \global\let\subsection = \appendixsubsec 4908 \global\let\subsubsection = \appendixsubsubsec 4909} 4910 4911\outer\parseargdef\unnumbered{\unnmhead0{#1}} % normally unnmhead0 calls unnumberedzzz 4912\def\unnumberedzzz#1{% 4913 \global\secno=0 \global\subsecno=0 \global\subsubsecno=0 4914 \global\advance\unnumberedno by 1 4915 % 4916 % Since an unnumbered has no number, no prefix for figures. 4917 \global\let\chaplevelprefix = \empty 4918 \resetallfloatnos 4919 % 4920 % This used to be simply \message{#1}, but TeX fully expands the 4921 % argument to \message. Therefore, if #1 contained @-commands, TeX 4922 % expanded them. For example, in `@unnumbered The @cite{Book}', TeX 4923 % expanded @cite (which turns out to cause errors because \cite is meant 4924 % to be executed, not expanded). 4925 % 4926 % Anyway, we don't want the fully-expanded definition of @cite to appear 4927 % as a result of the \message, we just want `@cite' itself. We use 4928 % \the<toks register> to achieve this: TeX expands \the<toks> only once, 4929 % simply yielding the contents of <toks register>. (We also do this for 4930 % the toc entries.) 4931 \toks0 = {#1}% 4932 \message{(\the\toks0)}% 4933 % 4934 \chapmacro{#1}{Ynothing}{\the\unnumberedno}% 4935 % 4936 \global\let\section = \unnumberedsec 4937 \global\let\subsection = \unnumberedsubsec 4938 \global\let\subsubsection = \unnumberedsubsubsec 4939} 4940 4941% @centerchap is like @unnumbered, but the heading is centered. 4942\outer\parseargdef\centerchap{% 4943 % Well, we could do the following in a group, but that would break 4944 % an assumption that \chapmacro is called at the outermost level. 4945 % Thus we are safer this way: --kasal, 24feb04 4946 \let\centerparametersmaybe = \centerparameters 4947 \unnmhead0{#1}% 4948 \let\centerparametersmaybe = \relax 4949} 4950 4951% @top is like @unnumbered. 4952\let\top\unnumbered 4953 4954% Sections. 4955\outer\parseargdef\numberedsec{\numhead1{#1}} % normally calls seczzz 4956\def\seczzz#1{% 4957 \global\subsecno=0 \global\subsubsecno=0 \global\advance\secno by 1 4958 \sectionheading{#1}{sec}{Ynumbered}{\the\chapno.\the\secno}% 4959} 4960 4961\outer\parseargdef\appendixsection{\apphead1{#1}} % normally calls appendixsectionzzz 4962\def\appendixsectionzzz#1{% 4963 \global\subsecno=0 \global\subsubsecno=0 \global\advance\secno by 1 4964 \sectionheading{#1}{sec}{Yappendix}{\appendixletter.\the\secno}% 4965} 4966\let\appendixsec\appendixsection 4967 4968\outer\parseargdef\unnumberedsec{\unnmhead1{#1}} % normally calls unnumberedseczzz 4969\def\unnumberedseczzz#1{% 4970 \global\subsecno=0 \global\subsubsecno=0 \global\advance\secno by 1 4971 \sectionheading{#1}{sec}{Ynothing}{\the\unnumberedno.\the\secno}% 4972} 4973 4974% Subsections. 4975\outer\parseargdef\numberedsubsec{\numhead2{#1}} % normally calls numberedsubseczzz 4976\def\numberedsubseczzz#1{% 4977 \global\subsubsecno=0 \global\advance\subsecno by 1 4978 \sectionheading{#1}{subsec}{Ynumbered}{\the\chapno.\the\secno.\the\subsecno}% 4979} 4980 4981\outer\parseargdef\appendixsubsec{\apphead2{#1}} % normally calls appendixsubseczzz 4982\def\appendixsubseczzz#1{% 4983 \global\subsubsecno=0 \global\advance\subsecno by 1 4984 \sectionheading{#1}{subsec}{Yappendix}% 4985 {\appendixletter.\the\secno.\the\subsecno}% 4986} 4987 4988\outer\parseargdef\unnumberedsubsec{\unnmhead2{#1}} %normally calls unnumberedsubseczzz 4989\def\unnumberedsubseczzz#1{% 4990 \global\subsubsecno=0 \global\advance\subsecno by 1 4991 \sectionheading{#1}{subsec}{Ynothing}% 4992 {\the\unnumberedno.\the\secno.\the\subsecno}% 4993} 4994 4995% Subsubsections. 4996\outer\parseargdef\numberedsubsubsec{\numhead3{#1}} % normally numberedsubsubseczzz 4997\def\numberedsubsubseczzz#1{% 4998 \global\advance\subsubsecno by 1 4999 \sectionheading{#1}{subsubsec}{Ynumbered}% 5000 {\the\chapno.\the\secno.\the\subsecno.\the\subsubsecno}% 5001} 5002 5003\outer\parseargdef\appendixsubsubsec{\apphead3{#1}} % normally appendixsubsubseczzz 5004\def\appendixsubsubseczzz#1{% 5005 \global\advance\subsubsecno by 1 5006 \sectionheading{#1}{subsubsec}{Yappendix}% 5007 {\appendixletter.\the\secno.\the\subsecno.\the\subsubsecno}% 5008} 5009 5010\outer\parseargdef\unnumberedsubsubsec{\unnmhead3{#1}} %normally unnumberedsubsubseczzz 5011\def\unnumberedsubsubseczzz#1{% 5012 \global\advance\subsubsecno by 1 5013 \sectionheading{#1}{subsubsec}{Ynothing}% 5014 {\the\unnumberedno.\the\secno.\the\subsecno.\the\subsubsecno}% 5015} 5016 5017% These macros control what the section commands do, according 5018% to what kind of chapter we are in (ordinary, appendix, or unnumbered). 5019% Define them by default for a numbered chapter. 5020\let\section = \numberedsec 5021\let\subsection = \numberedsubsec 5022\let\subsubsection = \numberedsubsubsec 5023 5024% Define @majorheading, @heading and @subheading 5025 5026% NOTE on use of \vbox for chapter headings, section headings, and such: 5027% 1) We use \vbox rather than the earlier \line to permit 5028% overlong headings to fold. 5029% 2) \hyphenpenalty is set to 10000 because hyphenation in a 5030% heading is obnoxious; this forbids it. 5031% 3) Likewise, headings look best if no \parindent is used, and 5032% if justification is not attempted. Hence \raggedright. 5033 5034 5035\def\majorheading{% 5036 {\advance\chapheadingskip by 10pt \chapbreak }% 5037 \parsearg\chapheadingzzz 5038} 5039 5040\def\chapheading{\chapbreak \parsearg\chapheadingzzz} 5041\def\chapheadingzzz#1{% 5042 {\chapfonts \vbox{\hyphenpenalty=10000\tolerance=5000 5043 \parindent=0pt\raggedright 5044 \rm #1\hfill}}% 5045 \bigskip \par\penalty 200\relax 5046 \suppressfirstparagraphindent 5047} 5048 5049% @heading, @subheading, @subsubheading. 5050\parseargdef\heading{\sectionheading{#1}{sec}{Yomitfromtoc}{} 5051 \suppressfirstparagraphindent} 5052\parseargdef\subheading{\sectionheading{#1}{subsec}{Yomitfromtoc}{} 5053 \suppressfirstparagraphindent} 5054\parseargdef\subsubheading{\sectionheading{#1}{subsubsec}{Yomitfromtoc}{} 5055 \suppressfirstparagraphindent} 5056 5057% These macros generate a chapter, section, etc. heading only 5058% (including whitespace, linebreaking, etc. around it), 5059% given all the information in convenient, parsed form. 5060 5061%%% Args are the skip and penalty (usually negative) 5062\def\dobreak#1#2{\par\ifdim\lastskip<#1\removelastskip\penalty#2\vskip#1\fi} 5063 5064%%% Define plain chapter starts, and page on/off switching for it 5065% Parameter controlling skip before chapter headings (if needed) 5066 5067\newskip\chapheadingskip 5068 5069\def\chapbreak{\dobreak \chapheadingskip {-4000}} 5070\def\chappager{\par\vfill\supereject} 5071% Because \domark is called before \chapoddpage, the filler page will 5072% get the headings for the next chapter, which is wrong. But we don't 5073% care -- we just disable all headings on the filler page. 5074\def\chapoddpage{% 5075 \chappager 5076 \ifodd\pageno \else 5077 \begingroup 5078 \evenheadline={\hfil}\evenfootline={\hfil}% 5079 \oddheadline={\hfil}\oddfootline={\hfil}% 5080 \hbox to 0pt{}% 5081 \chappager 5082 \endgroup 5083 \fi 5084} 5085 5086\def\setchapternewpage #1 {\csname CHAPPAG#1\endcsname} 5087 5088\def\CHAPPAGoff{% 5089\global\let\contentsalignmacro = \chappager 5090\global\let\pchapsepmacro=\chapbreak 5091\global\let\pagealignmacro=\chappager} 5092 5093\def\CHAPPAGon{% 5094\global\let\contentsalignmacro = \chappager 5095\global\let\pchapsepmacro=\chappager 5096\global\let\pagealignmacro=\chappager 5097\global\def\HEADINGSon{\HEADINGSsingle}} 5098 5099\def\CHAPPAGodd{% 5100\global\let\contentsalignmacro = \chapoddpage 5101\global\let\pchapsepmacro=\chapoddpage 5102\global\let\pagealignmacro=\chapoddpage 5103\global\def\HEADINGSon{\HEADINGSdouble}} 5104 5105\CHAPPAGon 5106 5107% Chapter opening. 5108% 5109% #1 is the text, #2 is the section type (Ynumbered, Ynothing, 5110% Yappendix, Yomitfromtoc), #3 the chapter number. 5111% 5112% To test against our argument. 5113\def\Ynothingkeyword{Ynothing} 5114\def\Yomitfromtockeyword{Yomitfromtoc} 5115\def\Yappendixkeyword{Yappendix} 5116% 5117\def\chapmacro#1#2#3{% 5118 % Insert the first mark before the heading break (see notes for \domark). 5119 \let\prevchapterdefs=\lastchapterdefs 5120 \let\prevsectiondefs=\lastsectiondefs 5121 \gdef\lastsectiondefs{\gdef\thissectionname{}\gdef\thissectionnum{}% 5122 \gdef\thissection{}}% 5123 % 5124 \def\temptype{#2}% 5125 \ifx\temptype\Ynothingkeyword 5126 \gdef\lastchapterdefs{\gdef\thischaptername{#1}\gdef\thischapternum{}% 5127 \gdef\thischapter{\thischaptername}}% 5128 \else\ifx\temptype\Yomitfromtockeyword 5129 \gdef\lastchapterdefs{\gdef\thischaptername{#1}\gdef\thischapternum{}% 5130 \gdef\thischapter{}}% 5131 \else\ifx\temptype\Yappendixkeyword 5132 \toks0={#1}% 5133 \xdef\lastchapterdefs{% 5134 \gdef\noexpand\thischaptername{\the\toks0}% 5135 \gdef\noexpand\thischapternum{\appendixletter}% 5136 \gdef\noexpand\thischapter{\putwordAppendix{} \noexpand\thischapternum: 5137 \noexpand\thischaptername}% 5138 }% 5139 \else 5140 \toks0={#1}% 5141 \xdef\lastchapterdefs{% 5142 \gdef\noexpand\thischaptername{\the\toks0}% 5143 \gdef\noexpand\thischapternum{\the\chapno}% 5144 \gdef\noexpand\thischapter{\putwordChapter{} \noexpand\thischapternum: 5145 \noexpand\thischaptername}% 5146 }% 5147 \fi\fi\fi 5148 % 5149 % Output the mark. Pass it through \safewhatsit, to take care of 5150 % the preceding space. 5151 \safewhatsit\domark 5152 % 5153 % Insert the chapter heading break. 5154 \pchapsepmacro 5155 % 5156 % Now the second mark, after the heading break. No break points 5157 % between here and the heading. 5158 \let\prevchapterdefs=\lastchapterdefs 5159 \let\prevsectiondefs=\lastsectiondefs 5160 \domark 5161 % 5162 {% 5163 \chapfonts \rm 5164 % 5165 % Have to define \lastsection before calling \donoderef, because the 5166 % xref code eventually uses it. On the other hand, it has to be called 5167 % after \pchapsepmacro, or the headline will change too soon. 5168 \gdef\lastsection{#1}% 5169 % 5170 % Only insert the separating space if we have a chapter/appendix 5171 % number, and don't print the unnumbered ``number''. 5172 \ifx\temptype\Ynothingkeyword 5173 \setbox0 = \hbox{}% 5174 \def\toctype{unnchap}% 5175 \else\ifx\temptype\Yomitfromtockeyword 5176 \setbox0 = \hbox{}% contents like unnumbered, but no toc entry 5177 \def\toctype{omit}% 5178 \else\ifx\temptype\Yappendixkeyword 5179 \setbox0 = \hbox{\putwordAppendix{} #3\enspace}% 5180 \def\toctype{app}% 5181 \else 5182 \setbox0 = \hbox{#3\enspace}% 5183 \def\toctype{numchap}% 5184 \fi\fi\fi 5185 % 5186 % Write the toc entry for this chapter. Must come before the 5187 % \donoderef, because we include the current node name in the toc 5188 % entry, and \donoderef resets it to empty. 5189 \writetocentry{\toctype}{#1}{#3}% 5190 % 5191 % For pdftex, we have to write out the node definition (aka, make 5192 % the pdfdest) after any page break, but before the actual text has 5193 % been typeset. If the destination for the pdf outline is after the 5194 % text, then jumping from the outline may wind up with the text not 5195 % being visible, for instance under high magnification. 5196 \donoderef{#2}% 5197 % 5198 % Typeset the actual heading. 5199 \nobreak % Avoid page breaks at the interline glue. 5200 \vbox{\hyphenpenalty=10000 \tolerance=5000 \parindent=0pt \raggedright 5201 \hangindent=\wd0 \centerparametersmaybe 5202 \unhbox0 #1\par}% 5203 }% 5204 \nobreak\bigskip % no page break after a chapter title 5205 \nobreak 5206} 5207 5208% @centerchap -- centered and unnumbered. 5209\let\centerparametersmaybe = \relax 5210\def\centerparameters{% 5211 \advance\rightskip by 3\rightskip 5212 \leftskip = \rightskip 5213 \parfillskip = 0pt 5214} 5215 5216 5217% I don't think this chapter style is supported any more, so I'm not 5218% updating it with the new noderef stuff. We'll see. --karl, 11aug03. 5219% 5220\def\setchapterstyle #1 {\csname CHAPF#1\endcsname} 5221% 5222\def\unnchfopen #1{% 5223\chapoddpage {\chapfonts \vbox{\hyphenpenalty=10000\tolerance=5000 5224 \parindent=0pt\raggedright 5225 \rm #1\hfill}}\bigskip \par\nobreak 5226} 5227\def\chfopen #1#2{\chapoddpage {\chapfonts 5228\vbox to 3in{\vfil \hbox to\hsize{\hfil #2} \hbox to\hsize{\hfil #1} \vfil}}% 5229\par\penalty 5000 % 5230} 5231\def\centerchfopen #1{% 5232\chapoddpage {\chapfonts \vbox{\hyphenpenalty=10000\tolerance=5000 5233 \parindent=0pt 5234 \hfill {\rm #1}\hfill}}\bigskip \par\nobreak 5235} 5236\def\CHAPFopen{% 5237 \global\let\chapmacro=\chfopen 5238 \global\let\centerchapmacro=\centerchfopen} 5239 5240 5241% Section titles. These macros combine the section number parts and 5242% call the generic \sectionheading to do the printing. 5243% 5244\newskip\secheadingskip 5245\def\secheadingbreak{\dobreak \secheadingskip{-1000}} 5246 5247% Subsection titles. 5248\newskip\subsecheadingskip 5249\def\subsecheadingbreak{\dobreak \subsecheadingskip{-500}} 5250 5251% Subsubsection titles. 5252\def\subsubsecheadingskip{\subsecheadingskip} 5253\def\subsubsecheadingbreak{\subsecheadingbreak} 5254 5255 5256% Print any size, any type, section title. 5257% 5258% #1 is the text, #2 is the section level (sec/subsec/subsubsec), #3 is 5259% the section type for xrefs (Ynumbered, Ynothing, Yappendix), #4 is the 5260% section number. 5261% 5262\def\seckeyword{sec} 5263% 5264\def\sectionheading#1#2#3#4{% 5265 {% 5266 % Switch to the right set of fonts. 5267 \csname #2fonts\endcsname \rm 5268 % 5269 \def\sectionlevel{#2}% 5270 \def\temptype{#3}% 5271 % 5272 % Insert first mark before the heading break (see notes for \domark). 5273 \let\prevsectiondefs=\lastsectiondefs 5274 \ifx\temptype\Ynothingkeyword 5275 \ifx\sectionlevel\seckeyword 5276 \gdef\lastsectiondefs{\gdef\thissectionname{#1}\gdef\thissectionnum{}% 5277 \gdef\thissection{\thissectionname}}% 5278 \fi 5279 \else\ifx\temptype\Yomitfromtockeyword 5280 % Don't redefine \thissection. 5281 \else\ifx\temptype\Yappendixkeyword 5282 \ifx\sectionlevel\seckeyword 5283 \toks0={#1}% 5284 \xdef\lastsectiondefs{% 5285 \gdef\noexpand\thissectionname{\the\toks0}% 5286 \gdef\noexpand\thissectionnum{#4}% 5287 \gdef\noexpand\thissection{\putwordSection{} \noexpand\thissectionnum: 5288 \noexpand\thissectionname}% 5289 }% 5290 \fi 5291 \else 5292 \ifx\sectionlevel\seckeyword 5293 \toks0={#1}% 5294 \xdef\lastsectiondefs{% 5295 \gdef\noexpand\thissectionname{\the\toks0}% 5296 \gdef\noexpand\thissectionnum{#4}% 5297 \gdef\noexpand\thissection{\putwordSection{} \noexpand\thissectionnum: 5298 \noexpand\thissectionname}% 5299 }% 5300 \fi 5301 \fi\fi\fi 5302 % 5303 % Output the mark. Pass it through \safewhatsit, to take care of 5304 % the preceding space. 5305 \safewhatsit\domark 5306 % 5307 % Insert space above the heading. 5308 \csname #2headingbreak\endcsname 5309 % 5310 % Now the second mark, after the heading break. No break points 5311 % between here and the heading. 5312 \let\prevsectiondefs=\lastsectiondefs 5313 \domark 5314 % 5315 % Only insert the space after the number if we have a section number. 5316 \ifx\temptype\Ynothingkeyword 5317 \setbox0 = \hbox{}% 5318 \def\toctype{unn}% 5319 \gdef\lastsection{#1}% 5320 \else\ifx\temptype\Yomitfromtockeyword 5321 % for @headings -- no section number, don't include in toc, 5322 % and don't redefine \lastsection. 5323 \setbox0 = \hbox{}% 5324 \def\toctype{omit}% 5325 \let\sectionlevel=\empty 5326 \else\ifx\temptype\Yappendixkeyword 5327 \setbox0 = \hbox{#4\enspace}% 5328 \def\toctype{app}% 5329 \gdef\lastsection{#1}% 5330 \else 5331 \setbox0 = \hbox{#4\enspace}% 5332 \def\toctype{num}% 5333 \gdef\lastsection{#1}% 5334 \fi\fi\fi 5335 % 5336 % Write the toc entry (before \donoderef). See comments in \chapmacro. 5337 \writetocentry{\toctype\sectionlevel}{#1}{#4}% 5338 % 5339 % Write the node reference (= pdf destination for pdftex). 5340 % Again, see comments in \chapmacro. 5341 \donoderef{#3}% 5342 % 5343 % Interline glue will be inserted when the vbox is completed. 5344 % That glue will be a valid breakpoint for the page, since it'll be 5345 % preceded by a whatsit (usually from the \donoderef, or from the 5346 % \writetocentry if there was no node). We don't want to allow that 5347 % break, since then the whatsits could end up on page n while the 5348 % section is on page n+1, thus toc/etc. are wrong. Debian bug 276000. 5349 \nobreak 5350 % 5351 % Output the actual section heading. 5352 \vbox{\hyphenpenalty=10000 \tolerance=5000 \parindent=0pt \raggedright 5353 \hangindent=\wd0 % zero if no section number 5354 \unhbox0 #1}% 5355 }% 5356 % Add extra space after the heading -- half of whatever came above it. 5357 % Don't allow stretch, though. 5358 \kern .5 \csname #2headingskip\endcsname 5359 % 5360 % Do not let the kern be a potential breakpoint, as it would be if it 5361 % was followed by glue. 5362 \nobreak 5363 % 5364 % We'll almost certainly start a paragraph next, so don't let that 5365 % glue accumulate. (Not a breakpoint because it's preceded by a 5366 % discardable item.) 5367 \vskip-\parskip 5368 % 5369 % This is purely so the last item on the list is a known \penalty > 5370 % 10000. This is so \startdefun can avoid allowing breakpoints after 5371 % section headings. Otherwise, it would insert a valid breakpoint between: 5372 % 5373 % @section sec-whatever 5374 % @deffn def-whatever 5375 \penalty 10001 5376} 5377 5378 5379\message{toc,} 5380% Table of contents. 5381\newwrite\tocfile 5382 5383% Write an entry to the toc file, opening it if necessary. 5384% Called from @chapter, etc. 5385% 5386% Example usage: \writetocentry{sec}{Section Name}{\the\chapno.\the\secno} 5387% We append the current node name (if any) and page number as additional 5388% arguments for the \{chap,sec,...}entry macros which will eventually 5389% read this. The node name is used in the pdf outlines as the 5390% destination to jump to. 5391% 5392% We open the .toc file for writing here instead of at @setfilename (or 5393% any other fixed time) so that @contents can be anywhere in the document. 5394% But if #1 is `omit', then we don't do anything. This is used for the 5395% table of contents chapter openings themselves. 5396% 5397\newif\iftocfileopened 5398\def\omitkeyword{omit}% 5399% 5400\def\writetocentry#1#2#3{% 5401 \edef\writetoctype{#1}% 5402 \ifx\writetoctype\omitkeyword \else 5403 \iftocfileopened\else 5404 \immediate\openout\tocfile = \jobname.toc 5405 \global\tocfileopenedtrue 5406 \fi 5407 % 5408 \iflinks 5409 {\atdummies 5410 \edef\temp{% 5411 \write\tocfile{@#1entry{#2}{#3}{\lastnode}{\noexpand\folio}}}% 5412 \temp 5413 }% 5414 \fi 5415 \fi 5416 % 5417 % Tell \shipout to create a pdf destination on each page, if we're 5418 % writing pdf. These are used in the table of contents. We can't 5419 % just write one on every page because the title pages are numbered 5420 % 1 and 2 (the page numbers aren't printed), and so are the first 5421 % two pages of the document. Thus, we'd have two destinations named 5422 % `1', and two named `2'. 5423 \ifpdf \global\pdfmakepagedesttrue \fi 5424} 5425 5426 5427% These characters do not print properly in the Computer Modern roman 5428% fonts, so we must take special care. This is more or less redundant 5429% with the Texinfo input format setup at the end of this file. 5430% 5431\def\activecatcodes{% 5432 \catcode`\"=\active 5433 \catcode`\$=\active 5434 \catcode`\<=\active 5435 \catcode`\>=\active 5436 \catcode`\\=\active 5437 \catcode`\^=\active 5438 \catcode`\_=\active 5439 \catcode`\|=\active 5440 \catcode`\~=\active 5441} 5442 5443 5444% Read the toc file, which is essentially Texinfo input. 5445\def\readtocfile{% 5446 \setupdatafile 5447 \activecatcodes 5448 \input \tocreadfilename 5449} 5450 5451\newskip\contentsrightmargin \contentsrightmargin=1in 5452\newcount\savepageno 5453\newcount\lastnegativepageno \lastnegativepageno = -1 5454 5455% Prepare to read what we've written to \tocfile. 5456% 5457\def\startcontents#1{% 5458 % If @setchapternewpage on, and @headings double, the contents should 5459 % start on an odd page, unlike chapters. Thus, we maintain 5460 % \contentsalignmacro in parallel with \pagealignmacro. 5461 % From: Torbjorn Granlund <tege@matematik.su.se> 5462 \contentsalignmacro 5463 \immediate\closeout\tocfile 5464 % 5465 % Don't need to put `Contents' or `Short Contents' in the headline. 5466 % It is abundantly clear what they are. 5467 \chapmacro{#1}{Yomitfromtoc}{}% 5468 % 5469 \savepageno = \pageno 5470 \begingroup % Set up to handle contents files properly. 5471 \raggedbottom % Worry more about breakpoints than the bottom. 5472 \advance\hsize by -\contentsrightmargin % Don't use the full line length. 5473 % 5474 % Roman numerals for page numbers. 5475 \ifnum \pageno>0 \global\pageno = \lastnegativepageno \fi 5476} 5477 5478% redefined for the two-volume lispref. We always output on 5479% \jobname.toc even if this is redefined. 5480% 5481\def\tocreadfilename{\jobname.toc} 5482 5483% Normal (long) toc. 5484% 5485\def\contents{% 5486 \startcontents{\putwordTOC}% 5487 \openin 1 \tocreadfilename\space 5488 \ifeof 1 \else 5489 \readtocfile 5490 \fi 5491 \vfill \eject 5492 \contentsalignmacro % in case @setchapternewpage odd is in effect 5493 \ifeof 1 \else 5494 \pdfmakeoutlines 5495 \fi 5496 \closein 1 5497 \endgroup 5498 \lastnegativepageno = \pageno 5499 \global\pageno = \savepageno 5500} 5501 5502% And just the chapters. 5503\def\summarycontents{% 5504 \startcontents{\putwordShortTOC}% 5505 % 5506 \let\numchapentry = \shortchapentry 5507 \let\appentry = \shortchapentry 5508 \let\unnchapentry = \shortunnchapentry 5509 % We want a true roman here for the page numbers. 5510 \secfonts 5511 \let\rm=\shortcontrm \let\bf=\shortcontbf 5512 \let\sl=\shortcontsl \let\tt=\shortconttt 5513 \rm 5514 \hyphenpenalty = 10000 5515 \advance\baselineskip by 1pt % Open it up a little. 5516 \def\numsecentry##1##2##3##4{} 5517 \let\appsecentry = \numsecentry 5518 \let\unnsecentry = \numsecentry 5519 \let\numsubsecentry = \numsecentry 5520 \let\appsubsecentry = \numsecentry 5521 \let\unnsubsecentry = \numsecentry 5522 \let\numsubsubsecentry = \numsecentry 5523 \let\appsubsubsecentry = \numsecentry 5524 \let\unnsubsubsecentry = \numsecentry 5525 \openin 1 \tocreadfilename\space 5526 \ifeof 1 \else 5527 \readtocfile 5528 \fi 5529 \closein 1 5530 \vfill \eject 5531 \contentsalignmacro % in case @setchapternewpage odd is in effect 5532 \endgroup 5533 \lastnegativepageno = \pageno 5534 \global\pageno = \savepageno 5535} 5536\let\shortcontents = \summarycontents 5537 5538% Typeset the label for a chapter or appendix for the short contents. 5539% The arg is, e.g., `A' for an appendix, or `3' for a chapter. 5540% 5541\def\shortchaplabel#1{% 5542 % This space should be enough, since a single number is .5em, and the 5543 % widest letter (M) is 1em, at least in the Computer Modern fonts. 5544 % But use \hss just in case. 5545 % (This space doesn't include the extra space that gets added after 5546 % the label; that gets put in by \shortchapentry above.) 5547 % 5548 % We'd like to right-justify chapter numbers, but that looks strange 5549 % with appendix letters. And right-justifying numbers and 5550 % left-justifying letters looks strange when there is less than 10 5551 % chapters. Have to read the whole toc once to know how many chapters 5552 % there are before deciding ... 5553 \hbox to 1em{#1\hss}% 5554} 5555 5556% These macros generate individual entries in the table of contents. 5557% The first argument is the chapter or section name. 5558% The last argument is the page number. 5559% The arguments in between are the chapter number, section number, ... 5560 5561% Chapters, in the main contents. 5562\def\numchapentry#1#2#3#4{\dochapentry{#2\labelspace#1}{#4}} 5563% 5564% Chapters, in the short toc. 5565% See comments in \dochapentry re vbox and related settings. 5566\def\shortchapentry#1#2#3#4{% 5567 \tocentry{\shortchaplabel{#2}\labelspace #1}{\doshortpageno\bgroup#4\egroup}% 5568} 5569 5570% Appendices, in the main contents. 5571% Need the word Appendix, and a fixed-size box. 5572% 5573\def\appendixbox#1{% 5574 % We use M since it's probably the widest letter. 5575 \setbox0 = \hbox{\putwordAppendix{} M}% 5576 \hbox to \wd0{\putwordAppendix{} #1\hss}} 5577% 5578\def\appentry#1#2#3#4{\dochapentry{\appendixbox{#2}\labelspace#1}{#4}} 5579 5580% Unnumbered chapters. 5581\def\unnchapentry#1#2#3#4{\dochapentry{#1}{#4}} 5582\def\shortunnchapentry#1#2#3#4{\tocentry{#1}{\doshortpageno\bgroup#4\egroup}} 5583 5584% Sections. 5585\def\numsecentry#1#2#3#4{\dosecentry{#2\labelspace#1}{#4}} 5586\let\appsecentry=\numsecentry 5587\def\unnsecentry#1#2#3#4{\dosecentry{#1}{#4}} 5588 5589% Subsections. 5590\def\numsubsecentry#1#2#3#4{\dosubsecentry{#2\labelspace#1}{#4}} 5591\let\appsubsecentry=\numsubsecentry 5592\def\unnsubsecentry#1#2#3#4{\dosubsecentry{#1}{#4}} 5593 5594% And subsubsections. 5595\def\numsubsubsecentry#1#2#3#4{\dosubsubsecentry{#2\labelspace#1}{#4}} 5596\let\appsubsubsecentry=\numsubsubsecentry 5597\def\unnsubsubsecentry#1#2#3#4{\dosubsubsecentry{#1}{#4}} 5598 5599% This parameter controls the indentation of the various levels. 5600% Same as \defaultparindent. 5601\newdimen\tocindent \tocindent = 15pt 5602 5603% Now for the actual typesetting. In all these, #1 is the text and #2 is the 5604% page number. 5605% 5606% If the toc has to be broken over pages, we want it to be at chapters 5607% if at all possible; hence the \penalty. 5608\def\dochapentry#1#2{% 5609 \penalty-300 \vskip1\baselineskip plus.33\baselineskip minus.25\baselineskip 5610 \begingroup 5611 \chapentryfonts 5612 \tocentry{#1}{\dopageno\bgroup#2\egroup}% 5613 \endgroup 5614 \nobreak\vskip .25\baselineskip plus.1\baselineskip 5615} 5616 5617\def\dosecentry#1#2{\begingroup 5618 \secentryfonts \leftskip=\tocindent 5619 \tocentry{#1}{\dopageno\bgroup#2\egroup}% 5620\endgroup} 5621 5622\def\dosubsecentry#1#2{\begingroup 5623 \subsecentryfonts \leftskip=2\tocindent 5624 \tocentry{#1}{\dopageno\bgroup#2\egroup}% 5625\endgroup} 5626 5627\def\dosubsubsecentry#1#2{\begingroup 5628 \subsubsecentryfonts \leftskip=3\tocindent 5629 \tocentry{#1}{\dopageno\bgroup#2\egroup}% 5630\endgroup} 5631 5632% We use the same \entry macro as for the index entries. 5633\let\tocentry = \entry 5634 5635% Space between chapter (or whatever) number and the title. 5636\def\labelspace{\hskip1em \relax} 5637 5638\def\dopageno#1{{\rm #1}} 5639\def\doshortpageno#1{{\rm #1}} 5640 5641\def\chapentryfonts{\secfonts \rm} 5642\def\secentryfonts{\textfonts} 5643\def\subsecentryfonts{\textfonts} 5644\def\subsubsecentryfonts{\textfonts} 5645 5646 5647\message{environments,} 5648% @foo ... @end foo. 5649 5650% @point{}, @result{}, @expansion{}, @print{}, @equiv{}. 5651% 5652% Since these characters are used in examples, it should be an even number of 5653% \tt widths. Each \tt character is 1en, so two makes it 1em. 5654% 5655\def\point{$\star$} 5656\def\result{\leavevmode\raise.15ex\hbox to 1em{\hfil$\Rightarrow$\hfil}} 5657\def\expansion{\leavevmode\raise.1ex\hbox to 1em{\hfil$\mapsto$\hfil}} 5658\def\print{\leavevmode\lower.1ex\hbox to 1em{\hfil$\dashv$\hfil}} 5659\def\equiv{\leavevmode\lower.1ex\hbox to 1em{\hfil$\ptexequiv$\hfil}} 5660 5661% The @error{} command. 5662% Adapted from the TeXbook's \boxit. 5663% 5664\newbox\errorbox 5665% 5666{\tentt \global\dimen0 = 3em}% Width of the box. 5667\dimen2 = .55pt % Thickness of rules 5668% The text. (`r' is open on the right, `e' somewhat less so on the left.) 5669\setbox0 = \hbox{\kern-.75pt \reducedsf error\kern-1.5pt} 5670% 5671\setbox\errorbox=\hbox to \dimen0{\hfil 5672 \hsize = \dimen0 \advance\hsize by -5.8pt % Space to left+right. 5673 \advance\hsize by -2\dimen2 % Rules. 5674 \vbox{% 5675 \hrule height\dimen2 5676 \hbox{\vrule width\dimen2 \kern3pt % Space to left of text. 5677 \vtop{\kern2.4pt \box0 \kern2.4pt}% Space above/below. 5678 \kern3pt\vrule width\dimen2}% Space to right. 5679 \hrule height\dimen2} 5680 \hfil} 5681% 5682\def\error{\leavevmode\lower.7ex\copy\errorbox} 5683 5684% @tex ... @end tex escapes into raw Tex temporarily. 5685% One exception: @ is still an escape character, so that @end tex works. 5686% But \@ or @@ will get a plain tex @ character. 5687 5688\envdef\tex{% 5689 \catcode `\\=0 \catcode `\{=1 \catcode `\}=2 5690 \catcode `\$=3 \catcode `\&=4 \catcode `\#=6 5691 \catcode `\^=7 \catcode `\_=8 \catcode `\~=\active \let~=\tie 5692 \catcode `\%=14 5693 \catcode `\+=\other 5694 \catcode `\"=\other 5695 \catcode `\|=\other 5696 \catcode `\<=\other 5697 \catcode `\>=\other 5698 \escapechar=`\\ 5699 % 5700 \let\b=\ptexb 5701 \let\bullet=\ptexbullet 5702 \let\c=\ptexc 5703 \let\,=\ptexcomma 5704 \let\.=\ptexdot 5705 \let\dots=\ptexdots 5706 \let\equiv=\ptexequiv 5707 \let\!=\ptexexclam 5708 \let\i=\ptexi 5709 \let\indent=\ptexindent 5710 \let\noindent=\ptexnoindent 5711 \let\{=\ptexlbrace 5712 \let\+=\tabalign 5713 \let\}=\ptexrbrace 5714 \let\/=\ptexslash 5715 \let\*=\ptexstar 5716 \let\t=\ptext 5717 \let\frenchspacing=\plainfrenchspacing 5718 % 5719 \def\endldots{\mathinner{\ldots\ldots\ldots\ldots}}% 5720 \def\enddots{\relax\ifmmode\endldots\else$\mathsurround=0pt \endldots\,$\fi}% 5721 \def\@{@}% 5722} 5723% There is no need to define \Etex. 5724 5725% Define @lisp ... @end lisp. 5726% @lisp environment forms a group so it can rebind things, 5727% including the definition of @end lisp (which normally is erroneous). 5728 5729% Amount to narrow the margins by for @lisp. 5730\newskip\lispnarrowing \lispnarrowing=0.4in 5731 5732% This is the definition that ^^M gets inside @lisp, @example, and other 5733% such environments. \null is better than a space, since it doesn't 5734% have any width. 5735\def\lisppar{\null\endgraf} 5736 5737% This space is always present above and below environments. 5738\newskip\envskipamount \envskipamount = 0pt 5739 5740% Make spacing and below environment symmetrical. We use \parskip here 5741% to help in doing that, since in @example-like environments \parskip 5742% is reset to zero; thus the \afterenvbreak inserts no space -- but the 5743% start of the next paragraph will insert \parskip. 5744% 5745\def\aboveenvbreak{{% 5746 % =10000 instead of <10000 because of a special case in \itemzzz and 5747 % \sectionheading, q.v. 5748 \ifnum \lastpenalty=10000 \else 5749 \advance\envskipamount by \parskip 5750 \endgraf 5751 \ifdim\lastskip<\envskipamount 5752 \removelastskip 5753 % it's not a good place to break if the last penalty was \nobreak 5754 % or better ... 5755 \ifnum\lastpenalty<10000 \penalty-50 \fi 5756 \vskip\envskipamount 5757 \fi 5758 \fi 5759}} 5760 5761\let\afterenvbreak = \aboveenvbreak 5762 5763% \nonarrowing is a flag. If "set", @lisp etc don't narrow margins; it will 5764% also clear it, so that its embedded environments do the narrowing again. 5765\let\nonarrowing=\relax 5766 5767% @cartouche ... @end cartouche: draw rectangle w/rounded corners around 5768% environment contents. 5769\font\circle=lcircle10 5770\newdimen\circthick 5771\newdimen\cartouter\newdimen\cartinner 5772\newskip\normbskip\newskip\normpskip\newskip\normlskip 5773\circthick=\fontdimen8\circle 5774% 5775\def\ctl{{\circle\char'013\hskip -6pt}}% 6pt from pl file: 1/2charwidth 5776\def\ctr{{\hskip 6pt\circle\char'010}} 5777\def\cbl{{\circle\char'012\hskip -6pt}} 5778\def\cbr{{\hskip 6pt\circle\char'011}} 5779\def\carttop{\hbox to \cartouter{\hskip\lskip 5780 \ctl\leaders\hrule height\circthick\hfil\ctr 5781 \hskip\rskip}} 5782\def\cartbot{\hbox to \cartouter{\hskip\lskip 5783 \cbl\leaders\hrule height\circthick\hfil\cbr 5784 \hskip\rskip}} 5785% 5786\newskip\lskip\newskip\rskip 5787 5788\envdef\cartouche{% 5789 \ifhmode\par\fi % can't be in the midst of a paragraph. 5790 \startsavinginserts 5791 \lskip=\leftskip \rskip=\rightskip 5792 \leftskip=0pt\rightskip=0pt % we want these *outside*. 5793 \cartinner=\hsize \advance\cartinner by-\lskip 5794 \advance\cartinner by-\rskip 5795 \cartouter=\hsize 5796 \advance\cartouter by 18.4pt % allow for 3pt kerns on either 5797 % side, and for 6pt waste from 5798 % each corner char, and rule thickness 5799 \normbskip=\baselineskip \normpskip=\parskip \normlskip=\lineskip 5800 % Flag to tell @lisp, etc., not to narrow margin. 5801 \let\nonarrowing = t% 5802 \vbox\bgroup 5803 \baselineskip=0pt\parskip=0pt\lineskip=0pt 5804 \carttop 5805 \hbox\bgroup 5806 \hskip\lskip 5807 \vrule\kern3pt 5808 \vbox\bgroup 5809 \kern3pt 5810 \hsize=\cartinner 5811 \baselineskip=\normbskip 5812 \lineskip=\normlskip 5813 \parskip=\normpskip 5814 \vskip -\parskip 5815 \comment % For explanation, see the end of \def\group. 5816} 5817\def\Ecartouche{% 5818 \ifhmode\par\fi 5819 \kern3pt 5820 \egroup 5821 \kern3pt\vrule 5822 \hskip\rskip 5823 \egroup 5824 \cartbot 5825 \egroup 5826 \checkinserts 5827} 5828 5829 5830% This macro is called at the beginning of all the @example variants, 5831% inside a group. 5832\def\nonfillstart{% 5833 \aboveenvbreak 5834 \hfuzz = 12pt % Don't be fussy 5835 \sepspaces % Make spaces be word-separators rather than space tokens. 5836 \let\par = \lisppar % don't ignore blank lines 5837 \obeylines % each line of input is a line of output 5838 \parskip = 0pt 5839 \parindent = 0pt 5840 \emergencystretch = 0pt % don't try to avoid overfull boxes 5841 \ifx\nonarrowing\relax 5842 \advance \leftskip by \lispnarrowing 5843 \exdentamount=\lispnarrowing 5844 \else 5845 \let\nonarrowing = \relax 5846 \fi 5847 \let\exdent=\nofillexdent 5848} 5849 5850% If you want all examples etc. small: @set dispenvsize small. 5851% If you want even small examples the full size: @set dispenvsize nosmall. 5852% This affects the following displayed environments: 5853% @example, @display, @format, @lisp 5854% 5855\def\smallword{small} 5856\def\nosmallword{nosmall} 5857\let\SETdispenvsize\relax 5858\def\setnormaldispenv{% 5859 \ifx\SETdispenvsize\smallword 5860 % end paragraph for sake of leading, in case document has no blank 5861 % line. This is redundant with what happens in \aboveenvbreak, but 5862 % we need to do it before changing the fonts, and it's inconvenient 5863 % to change the fonts afterward. 5864 \ifnum \lastpenalty=10000 \else \endgraf \fi 5865 \smallexamplefonts \rm 5866 \fi 5867} 5868\def\setsmalldispenv{% 5869 \ifx\SETdispenvsize\nosmallword 5870 \else 5871 \ifnum \lastpenalty=10000 \else \endgraf \fi 5872 \smallexamplefonts \rm 5873 \fi 5874} 5875 5876% We often define two environments, @foo and @smallfoo. 5877% Let's do it by one command: 5878\def\makedispenv #1#2{ 5879 \expandafter\envdef\csname#1\endcsname {\setnormaldispenv #2} 5880 \expandafter\envdef\csname small#1\endcsname {\setsmalldispenv #2} 5881 \expandafter\let\csname E#1\endcsname \afterenvbreak 5882 \expandafter\let\csname Esmall#1\endcsname \afterenvbreak 5883} 5884 5885% Define two synonyms: 5886\def\maketwodispenvs #1#2#3{ 5887 \makedispenv{#1}{#3} 5888 \makedispenv{#2}{#3} 5889} 5890 5891% @lisp: indented, narrowed, typewriter font; @example: same as @lisp. 5892% 5893% @smallexample and @smalllisp: use smaller fonts. 5894% Originally contributed by Pavel@xerox. 5895% 5896\maketwodispenvs {lisp}{example}{% 5897 \nonfillstart 5898 \tt\quoteexpand 5899 \let\kbdfont = \kbdexamplefont % Allow @kbd to do something special. 5900 \gobble % eat return 5901} 5902% @display/@smalldisplay: same as @lisp except keep current font. 5903% 5904\makedispenv {display}{% 5905 \nonfillstart 5906 \gobble 5907} 5908 5909% @format/@smallformat: same as @display except don't narrow margins. 5910% 5911\makedispenv{format}{% 5912 \let\nonarrowing = t% 5913 \nonfillstart 5914 \gobble 5915} 5916 5917% @flushleft: same as @format, but doesn't obey \SETdispenvsize. 5918\envdef\flushleft{% 5919 \let\nonarrowing = t% 5920 \nonfillstart 5921 \gobble 5922} 5923\let\Eflushleft = \afterenvbreak 5924 5925% @flushright. 5926% 5927\envdef\flushright{% 5928 \let\nonarrowing = t% 5929 \nonfillstart 5930 \advance\leftskip by 0pt plus 1fill 5931 \gobble 5932} 5933\let\Eflushright = \afterenvbreak 5934 5935 5936% @quotation does normal linebreaking (hence we can't use \nonfillstart) 5937% and narrows the margins. We keep \parskip nonzero in general, since 5938% we're doing normal filling. So, when using \aboveenvbreak and 5939% \afterenvbreak, temporarily make \parskip 0. 5940% 5941\envdef\quotation{% 5942 {\parskip=0pt \aboveenvbreak}% because \aboveenvbreak inserts \parskip 5943 \parindent=0pt 5944 % 5945 % @cartouche defines \nonarrowing to inhibit narrowing at next level down. 5946 \ifx\nonarrowing\relax 5947 \advance\leftskip by \lispnarrowing 5948 \advance\rightskip by \lispnarrowing 5949 \exdentamount = \lispnarrowing 5950 \else 5951 \let\nonarrowing = \relax 5952 \fi 5953 \parsearg\quotationlabel 5954} 5955 5956% We have retained a nonzero parskip for the environment, since we're 5957% doing normal filling. 5958% 5959\def\Equotation{% 5960 \par 5961 \ifx\quotationauthor\undefined\else 5962 % indent a bit. 5963 \leftline{\kern 2\leftskip \sl ---\quotationauthor}% 5964 \fi 5965 {\parskip=0pt \afterenvbreak}% 5966} 5967 5968% If we're given an argument, typeset it in bold with a colon after. 5969\def\quotationlabel#1{% 5970 \def\temp{#1}% 5971 \ifx\temp\empty \else 5972 {\bf #1: }% 5973 \fi 5974} 5975 5976 5977% LaTeX-like @verbatim...@end verbatim and @verb{<char>...<char>} 5978% If we want to allow any <char> as delimiter, 5979% we need the curly braces so that makeinfo sees the @verb command, eg: 5980% `@verbx...x' would look like the '@verbx' command. --janneke@gnu.org 5981% 5982% [Knuth]: Donald Ervin Knuth, 1996. The TeXbook. 5983% 5984% [Knuth] p.344; only we need to do the other characters Texinfo sets 5985% active too. Otherwise, they get lost as the first character on a 5986% verbatim line. 5987\def\dospecials{% 5988 \do\ \do\\\do\{\do\}\do\$\do\&% 5989 \do\#\do\^\do\^^K\do\_\do\^^A\do\%\do\~% 5990 \do\<\do\>\do\|\do\@\do+\do\"% 5991} 5992% 5993% [Knuth] p. 380 5994\def\uncatcodespecials{% 5995 \def\do##1{\catcode`##1=\other}\dospecials} 5996% 5997% [Knuth] pp. 380,381,391 5998% Disable Spanish ligatures ?` and !` of \tt font 5999\begingroup 6000 \catcode`\`=\active\gdef`{\relax\lq} 6001\endgroup 6002% 6003% Setup for the @verb command. 6004% 6005% Eight spaces for a tab 6006\begingroup 6007 \catcode`\^^I=\active 6008 \gdef\tabeightspaces{\catcode`\^^I=\active\def^^I{\ \ \ \ \ \ \ \ }} 6009\endgroup 6010% 6011\def\setupverb{% 6012 \tt % easiest (and conventionally used) font for verbatim 6013 \def\par{\leavevmode\endgraf}% 6014 \catcode`\`=\active 6015 \tabeightspaces 6016 % Respect line breaks, 6017 % print special symbols as themselves, and 6018 % make each space count 6019 % must do in this order: 6020 \obeylines \uncatcodespecials \sepspaces 6021} 6022 6023% Setup for the @verbatim environment 6024% 6025% Real tab expansion 6026\newdimen\tabw \setbox0=\hbox{\tt\space} \tabw=8\wd0 % tab amount 6027% 6028\def\starttabbox{\setbox0=\hbox\bgroup} 6029 6030% Allow an option to not replace quotes with a regular directed right 6031% quote/apostrophe (char 0x27), but instead use the undirected quote 6032% from cmtt (char 0x0d). The undirected quote is ugly, so don't make it 6033% the default, but it works for pasting with more pdf viewers (at least 6034% evince), the lilypond developers report. xpdf does work with the 6035% regular 0x27. 6036% 6037\def\codequoteright{% 6038 \expandafter\ifx\csname SETtxicodequoteundirected\endcsname\relax 6039 \expandafter\ifx\csname SETcodequoteundirected\endcsname\relax 6040 '% 6041 \else \char'15 \fi 6042 \else \char'15 \fi 6043} 6044% 6045% and a similar option for the left quote char vs. a grave accent. 6046% Modern fonts display ASCII 0x60 as a grave accent, so some people like 6047% the code environments to do likewise. 6048% 6049\def\codequoteleft{% 6050 \expandafter\ifx\csname SETtxicodequotebacktick\endcsname\relax 6051 \expandafter\ifx\csname SETcodequotebacktick\endcsname\relax 6052 `% 6053 \else \char'22 \fi 6054 \else \char'22 \fi 6055} 6056% 6057\begingroup 6058 \catcode`\^^I=\active 6059 \gdef\tabexpand{% 6060 \catcode`\^^I=\active 6061 \def^^I{\leavevmode\egroup 6062 \dimen0=\wd0 % the width so far, or since the previous tab 6063 \divide\dimen0 by\tabw 6064 \multiply\dimen0 by\tabw % compute previous multiple of \tabw 6065 \advance\dimen0 by\tabw % advance to next multiple of \tabw 6066 \wd0=\dimen0 \box0 \starttabbox 6067 }% 6068 } 6069 \catcode`\'=\active 6070 \gdef\rquoteexpand{\catcode\rquoteChar=\active \def'{\codequoteright}}% 6071 % 6072 \catcode`\`=\active 6073 \gdef\lquoteexpand{\catcode\lquoteChar=\active \def`{\codequoteleft}}% 6074 % 6075 \gdef\quoteexpand{\rquoteexpand \lquoteexpand}% 6076\endgroup 6077 6078% start the verbatim environment. 6079\def\setupverbatim{% 6080 \let\nonarrowing = t% 6081 \nonfillstart 6082 % Easiest (and conventionally used) font for verbatim 6083 \tt 6084 \def\par{\leavevmode\egroup\box0\endgraf}% 6085 \catcode`\`=\active 6086 \tabexpand 6087 \quoteexpand 6088 % Respect line breaks, 6089 % print special symbols as themselves, and 6090 % make each space count 6091 % must do in this order: 6092 \obeylines \uncatcodespecials \sepspaces 6093 \everypar{\starttabbox}% 6094} 6095 6096% Do the @verb magic: verbatim text is quoted by unique 6097% delimiter characters. Before first delimiter expect a 6098% right brace, after last delimiter expect closing brace: 6099% 6100% \def\doverb'{'<char>#1<char>'}'{#1} 6101% 6102% [Knuth] p. 382; only eat outer {} 6103\begingroup 6104 \catcode`[=1\catcode`]=2\catcode`\{=\other\catcode`\}=\other 6105 \gdef\doverb{#1[\def\next##1#1}[##1\endgroup]\next] 6106\endgroup 6107% 6108\def\verb{\begingroup\setupverb\doverb} 6109% 6110% 6111% Do the @verbatim magic: define the macro \doverbatim so that 6112% the (first) argument ends when '@end verbatim' is reached, ie: 6113% 6114% \def\doverbatim#1@end verbatim{#1} 6115% 6116% For Texinfo it's a lot easier than for LaTeX, 6117% because texinfo's \verbatim doesn't stop at '\end{verbatim}': 6118% we need not redefine '\', '{' and '}'. 6119% 6120% Inspired by LaTeX's verbatim command set [latex.ltx] 6121% 6122\begingroup 6123 \catcode`\ =\active 6124 \obeylines % 6125 % ignore everything up to the first ^^M, that's the newline at the end 6126 % of the @verbatim input line itself. Otherwise we get an extra blank 6127 % line in the output. 6128 \xdef\doverbatim#1^^M#2@end verbatim{#2\noexpand\end\gobble verbatim}% 6129 % We really want {...\end verbatim} in the body of the macro, but 6130 % without the active space; thus we have to use \xdef and \gobble. 6131\endgroup 6132% 6133\envdef\verbatim{% 6134 \setupverbatim\doverbatim 6135} 6136\let\Everbatim = \afterenvbreak 6137 6138 6139% @verbatiminclude FILE - insert text of file in verbatim environment. 6140% 6141\def\verbatiminclude{\parseargusing\filenamecatcodes\doverbatiminclude} 6142% 6143\def\doverbatiminclude#1{% 6144 {% 6145 \makevalueexpandable 6146 \setupverbatim 6147 \input #1 6148 \afterenvbreak 6149 }% 6150} 6151 6152% @copying ... @end copying. 6153% Save the text away for @insertcopying later. 6154% 6155% We save the uninterpreted tokens, rather than creating a box. 6156% Saving the text in a box would be much easier, but then all the 6157% typesetting commands (@smallbook, font changes, etc.) have to be done 6158% beforehand -- and a) we want @copying to be done first in the source 6159% file; b) letting users define the frontmatter in as flexible order as 6160% possible is very desirable. 6161% 6162\def\copying{\checkenv{}\begingroup\scanargctxt\docopying} 6163\def\docopying#1@end copying{\endgroup\def\copyingtext{#1}} 6164% 6165\def\insertcopying{% 6166 \begingroup 6167 \parindent = 0pt % paragraph indentation looks wrong on title page 6168 \scanexp\copyingtext 6169 \endgroup 6170} 6171 6172 6173\message{defuns,} 6174% @defun etc. 6175 6176\newskip\defbodyindent \defbodyindent=.4in 6177\newskip\defargsindent \defargsindent=50pt 6178\newskip\deflastargmargin \deflastargmargin=18pt 6179\newcount\defunpenalty 6180 6181% Start the processing of @deffn: 6182\def\startdefun{% 6183 \ifnum\lastpenalty<10000 6184 \medbreak 6185 \defunpenalty=10003 % Will keep this @deffn together with the 6186 % following @def command, see below. 6187 \else 6188 % If there are two @def commands in a row, we'll have a \nobreak, 6189 % which is there to keep the function description together with its 6190 % header. But if there's nothing but headers, we need to allow a 6191 % break somewhere. Check specifically for penalty 10002, inserted 6192 % by \printdefunline, instead of 10000, since the sectioning 6193 % commands also insert a nobreak penalty, and we don't want to allow 6194 % a break between a section heading and a defun. 6195 % 6196 % As a minor refinement, we avoid "club" headers by signalling 6197 % with penalty of 10003 after the very first @deffn in the 6198 % sequence (see above), and penalty of 10002 after any following 6199 % @def command. 6200 \ifnum\lastpenalty=10002 \penalty2000 \else \defunpenalty=10002 \fi 6201 % 6202 % Similarly, after a section heading, do not allow a break. 6203 % But do insert the glue. 6204 \medskip % preceded by discardable penalty, so not a breakpoint 6205 \fi 6206 % 6207 \parindent=0in 6208 \advance\leftskip by \defbodyindent 6209 \exdentamount=\defbodyindent 6210} 6211 6212\def\dodefunx#1{% 6213 % First, check whether we are in the right environment: 6214 \checkenv#1% 6215 % 6216 % As above, allow line break if we have multiple x headers in a row. 6217 % It's not a great place, though. 6218 \ifnum\lastpenalty=10002 \penalty3000 \else \defunpenalty=10002 \fi 6219 % 6220 % And now, it's time to reuse the body of the original defun: 6221 \expandafter\gobbledefun#1% 6222} 6223\def\gobbledefun#1\startdefun{} 6224 6225% \printdefunline \deffnheader{text} 6226% 6227\def\printdefunline#1#2{% 6228 \begingroup 6229 % call \deffnheader: 6230 #1#2 \endheader 6231 % common ending: 6232 \interlinepenalty = 10000 6233 \advance\rightskip by 0pt plus 1fil 6234 \endgraf 6235 \nobreak\vskip -\parskip 6236 \penalty\defunpenalty % signal to \startdefun and \dodefunx 6237 % Some of the @defun-type tags do not enable magic parentheses, 6238 % rendering the following check redundant. But we don't optimize. 6239 \checkparencounts 6240 \endgroup 6241} 6242 6243\def\Edefun{\endgraf\medbreak} 6244 6245% \makedefun{deffn} creates \deffn, \deffnx and \Edeffn; 6246% the only thing remainnig is to define \deffnheader. 6247% 6248\def\makedefun#1{% 6249 \expandafter\let\csname E#1\endcsname = \Edefun 6250 \edef\temp{\noexpand\domakedefun 6251 \makecsname{#1}\makecsname{#1x}\makecsname{#1header}}% 6252 \temp 6253} 6254 6255% \domakedefun \deffn \deffnx \deffnheader 6256% 6257% Define \deffn and \deffnx, without parameters. 6258% \deffnheader has to be defined explicitly. 6259% 6260\def\domakedefun#1#2#3{% 6261 \envdef#1{% 6262 \startdefun 6263 \parseargusing\activeparens{\printdefunline#3}% 6264 }% 6265 \def#2{\dodefunx#1}% 6266 \def#3% 6267} 6268 6269%%% Untyped functions: 6270 6271% @deffn category name args 6272\makedefun{deffn}{\deffngeneral{}} 6273 6274% @deffn category class name args 6275\makedefun{defop}#1 {\defopon{#1\ \putwordon}} 6276 6277% \defopon {category on}class name args 6278\def\defopon#1#2 {\deffngeneral{\putwordon\ \code{#2}}{#1\ \code{#2}} } 6279 6280% \deffngeneral {subind}category name args 6281% 6282\def\deffngeneral#1#2 #3 #4\endheader{% 6283 % Remember that \dosubind{fn}{foo}{} is equivalent to \doind{fn}{foo}. 6284 \dosubind{fn}{\code{#3}}{#1}% 6285 \defname{#2}{}{#3}\magicamp\defunargs{#4\unskip}% 6286} 6287 6288%%% Typed functions: 6289 6290% @deftypefn category type name args 6291\makedefun{deftypefn}{\deftypefngeneral{}} 6292 6293% @deftypeop category class type name args 6294\makedefun{deftypeop}#1 {\deftypeopon{#1\ \putwordon}} 6295 6296% \deftypeopon {category on}class type name args 6297\def\deftypeopon#1#2 {\deftypefngeneral{\putwordon\ \code{#2}}{#1\ \code{#2}} } 6298 6299% \deftypefngeneral {subind}category type name args 6300% 6301\def\deftypefngeneral#1#2 #3 #4 #5\endheader{% 6302 \dosubind{fn}{\code{#4}}{#1}% 6303 \defname{#2}{#3}{#4}\defunargs{#5\unskip}% 6304} 6305 6306%%% Typed variables: 6307 6308% @deftypevr category type var args 6309\makedefun{deftypevr}{\deftypecvgeneral{}} 6310 6311% @deftypecv category class type var args 6312\makedefun{deftypecv}#1 {\deftypecvof{#1\ \putwordof}} 6313 6314% \deftypecvof {category of}class type var args 6315\def\deftypecvof#1#2 {\deftypecvgeneral{\putwordof\ \code{#2}}{#1\ \code{#2}} } 6316 6317% \deftypecvgeneral {subind}category type var args 6318% 6319\def\deftypecvgeneral#1#2 #3 #4 #5\endheader{% 6320 \dosubind{vr}{\code{#4}}{#1}% 6321 \defname{#2}{#3}{#4}\defunargs{#5\unskip}% 6322} 6323 6324%%% Untyped variables: 6325 6326% @defvr category var args 6327\makedefun{defvr}#1 {\deftypevrheader{#1} {} } 6328 6329% @defcv category class var args 6330\makedefun{defcv}#1 {\defcvof{#1\ \putwordof}} 6331 6332% \defcvof {category of}class var args 6333\def\defcvof#1#2 {\deftypecvof{#1}#2 {} } 6334 6335%%% Type: 6336% @deftp category name args 6337\makedefun{deftp}#1 #2 #3\endheader{% 6338 \doind{tp}{\code{#2}}% 6339 \defname{#1}{}{#2}\defunargs{#3\unskip}% 6340} 6341 6342% Remaining @defun-like shortcuts: 6343\makedefun{defun}{\deffnheader{\putwordDeffunc} } 6344\makedefun{defmac}{\deffnheader{\putwordDefmac} } 6345\makedefun{defspec}{\deffnheader{\putwordDefspec} } 6346\makedefun{deftypefun}{\deftypefnheader{\putwordDeffunc} } 6347\makedefun{defvar}{\defvrheader{\putwordDefvar} } 6348\makedefun{defopt}{\defvrheader{\putwordDefopt} } 6349\makedefun{deftypevar}{\deftypevrheader{\putwordDefvar} } 6350\makedefun{defmethod}{\defopon\putwordMethodon} 6351\makedefun{deftypemethod}{\deftypeopon\putwordMethodon} 6352\makedefun{defivar}{\defcvof\putwordInstanceVariableof} 6353\makedefun{deftypeivar}{\deftypecvof\putwordInstanceVariableof} 6354 6355% \defname, which formats the name of the @def (not the args). 6356% #1 is the category, such as "Function". 6357% #2 is the return type, if any. 6358% #3 is the function name. 6359% 6360% We are followed by (but not passed) the arguments, if any. 6361% 6362\def\defname#1#2#3{% 6363 % Get the values of \leftskip and \rightskip as they were outside the @def... 6364 \advance\leftskip by -\defbodyindent 6365 % 6366 % How we'll format the type name. Putting it in brackets helps 6367 % distinguish it from the body text that may end up on the next line 6368 % just below it. 6369 \def\temp{#1}% 6370 \setbox0=\hbox{\kern\deflastargmargin \ifx\temp\empty\else [\rm\temp]\fi} 6371 % 6372 % Figure out line sizes for the paragraph shape. 6373 % The first line needs space for \box0; but if \rightskip is nonzero, 6374 % we need only space for the part of \box0 which exceeds it: 6375 \dimen0=\hsize \advance\dimen0 by -\wd0 \advance\dimen0 by \rightskip 6376 % The continuations: 6377 \dimen2=\hsize \advance\dimen2 by -\defargsindent 6378 % (plain.tex says that \dimen1 should be used only as global.) 6379 \parshape 2 0in \dimen0 \defargsindent \dimen2 6380 % 6381 % Put the type name to the right margin. 6382 \noindent 6383 \hbox to 0pt{% 6384 \hfil\box0 \kern-\hsize 6385 % \hsize has to be shortened this way: 6386 \kern\leftskip 6387 % Intentionally do not respect \rightskip, since we need the space. 6388 }% 6389 % 6390 % Allow all lines to be underfull without complaint: 6391 \tolerance=10000 \hbadness=10000 6392 \exdentamount=\defbodyindent 6393 {% 6394 % defun fonts. We use typewriter by default (used to be bold) because: 6395 % . we're printing identifiers, they should be in tt in principle. 6396 % . in languages with many accents, such as Czech or French, it's 6397 % common to leave accents off identifiers. The result looks ok in 6398 % tt, but exceedingly strange in rm. 6399 % . we don't want -- and --- to be treated as ligatures. 6400 % . this still does not fix the ?` and !` ligatures, but so far no 6401 % one has made identifiers using them :). 6402 \df \tt 6403 \def\temp{#2}% return value type 6404 \ifx\temp\empty\else \tclose{\temp} \fi 6405 #3% output function name 6406 }% 6407 {\rm\enskip}% hskip 0.5 em of \tenrm 6408 % 6409 \boldbrax 6410 % arguments will be output next, if any. 6411} 6412 6413% Print arguments in slanted roman (not ttsl), inconsistently with using 6414% tt for the name. This is because literal text is sometimes needed in 6415% the argument list (groff manual), and ttsl and tt are not very 6416% distinguishable. Prevent hyphenation at `-' chars. 6417% 6418\def\defunargs#1{% 6419 % use sl by default (not ttsl), 6420 % tt for the names. 6421 \df \sl \hyphenchar\font=0 6422 % 6423 % On the other hand, if an argument has two dashes (for instance), we 6424 % want a way to get ttsl. Let's try @var for that. 6425 \let\var=\ttslanted 6426 #1% 6427 \sl\hyphenchar\font=45 6428} 6429 6430% We want ()&[] to print specially on the defun line. 6431% 6432\def\activeparens{% 6433 \catcode`\(=\active \catcode`\)=\active 6434 \catcode`\[=\active \catcode`\]=\active 6435 \catcode`\&=\active 6436} 6437 6438% Make control sequences which act like normal parenthesis chars. 6439\let\lparen = ( \let\rparen = ) 6440 6441% Be sure that we always have a definition for `(', etc. For example, 6442% if the fn name has parens in it, \boldbrax will not be in effect yet, 6443% so TeX would otherwise complain about undefined control sequence. 6444{ 6445 \activeparens 6446 \global\let(=\lparen \global\let)=\rparen 6447 \global\let[=\lbrack \global\let]=\rbrack 6448 \global\let& = \& 6449 6450 \gdef\boldbrax{\let(=\opnr\let)=\clnr\let[=\lbrb\let]=\rbrb} 6451 \gdef\magicamp{\let&=\amprm} 6452} 6453 6454\newcount\parencount 6455 6456% If we encounter &foo, then turn on ()-hacking afterwards 6457\newif\ifampseen 6458\def\amprm#1 {\ampseentrue{\bf\ }} 6459 6460\def\parenfont{% 6461 \ifampseen 6462 % At the first level, print parens in roman, 6463 % otherwise use the default font. 6464 \ifnum \parencount=1 \rm \fi 6465 \else 6466 % The \sf parens (in \boldbrax) actually are a little bolder than 6467 % the contained text. This is especially needed for [ and ] . 6468 \sf 6469 \fi 6470} 6471\def\infirstlevel#1{% 6472 \ifampseen 6473 \ifnum\parencount=1 6474 #1% 6475 \fi 6476 \fi 6477} 6478\def\bfafterword#1 {#1 \bf} 6479 6480\def\opnr{% 6481 \global\advance\parencount by 1 6482 {\parenfont(}% 6483 \infirstlevel \bfafterword 6484} 6485\def\clnr{% 6486 {\parenfont)}% 6487 \infirstlevel \sl 6488 \global\advance\parencount by -1 6489} 6490 6491\newcount\brackcount 6492\def\lbrb{% 6493 \global\advance\brackcount by 1 6494 {\bf[}% 6495} 6496\def\rbrb{% 6497 {\bf]}% 6498 \global\advance\brackcount by -1 6499} 6500 6501\def\checkparencounts{% 6502 \ifnum\parencount=0 \else \badparencount \fi 6503 \ifnum\brackcount=0 \else \badbrackcount \fi 6504} 6505% these should not use \errmessage; the glibc manual, at least, actually 6506% has such constructs (when documenting function pointers). 6507\def\badparencount{% 6508 \message{Warning: unbalanced parentheses in @def...}% 6509 \global\parencount=0 6510} 6511\def\badbrackcount{% 6512 \message{Warning: unbalanced square brackets in @def...}% 6513 \global\brackcount=0 6514} 6515 6516 6517\message{macros,} 6518% @macro. 6519 6520% To do this right we need a feature of e-TeX, \scantokens, 6521% which we arrange to emulate with a temporary file in ordinary TeX. 6522\ifx\eTeXversion\undefined 6523 \newwrite\macscribble 6524 \def\scantokens#1{% 6525 \toks0={#1}% 6526 \immediate\openout\macscribble=\jobname.tmp 6527 \immediate\write\macscribble{\the\toks0}% 6528 \immediate\closeout\macscribble 6529 \input \jobname.tmp 6530 } 6531\fi 6532 6533\def\scanmacro#1{% 6534 \begingroup 6535 \newlinechar`\^^M 6536 \let\xeatspaces\eatspaces 6537 % Undo catcode changes of \startcontents and \doprintindex 6538 % When called from @insertcopying or (short)caption, we need active 6539 % backslash to get it printed correctly. Previously, we had 6540 % \catcode`\\=\other instead. We'll see whether a problem appears 6541 % with macro expansion. --kasal, 19aug04 6542 \catcode`\@=0 \catcode`\\=\active \escapechar=`\@ 6543 % ... and \example 6544 \spaceisspace 6545 % 6546 % Append \endinput to make sure that TeX does not see the ending newline. 6547 % I've verified that it is necessary both for e-TeX and for ordinary TeX 6548 % --kasal, 29nov03 6549 \scantokens{#1\endinput}% 6550 \endgroup 6551} 6552 6553\def\scanexp#1{% 6554 \edef\temp{\noexpand\scanmacro{#1}}% 6555 \temp 6556} 6557 6558\newcount\paramno % Count of parameters 6559\newtoks\macname % Macro name 6560\newif\ifrecursive % Is it recursive? 6561 6562% List of all defined macros in the form 6563% \definedummyword\macro1\definedummyword\macro2... 6564% Currently is also contains all @aliases; the list can be split 6565% if there is a need. 6566\def\macrolist{} 6567 6568% Add the macro to \macrolist 6569\def\addtomacrolist#1{\expandafter \addtomacrolistxxx \csname#1\endcsname} 6570\def\addtomacrolistxxx#1{% 6571 \toks0 = \expandafter{\macrolist\definedummyword#1}% 6572 \xdef\macrolist{\the\toks0}% 6573} 6574 6575% Utility routines. 6576% This does \let #1 = #2, with \csnames; that is, 6577% \let \csname#1\endcsname = \csname#2\endcsname 6578% (except of course we have to play expansion games). 6579% 6580\def\cslet#1#2{% 6581 \expandafter\let 6582 \csname#1\expandafter\endcsname 6583 \csname#2\endcsname 6584} 6585 6586% Trim leading and trailing spaces off a string. 6587% Concepts from aro-bend problem 15 (see CTAN). 6588{\catcode`\@=11 6589\gdef\eatspaces #1{\expandafter\trim@\expandafter{#1 }} 6590\gdef\trim@ #1{\trim@@ @#1 @ #1 @ @@} 6591\gdef\trim@@ #1@ #2@ #3@@{\trim@@@\empty #2 @} 6592\def\unbrace#1{#1} 6593\unbrace{\gdef\trim@@@ #1 } #2@{#1} 6594} 6595 6596% Trim a single trailing ^^M off a string. 6597{\catcode`\^^M=\other \catcode`\Q=3% 6598\gdef\eatcr #1{\eatcra #1Q^^MQ}% 6599\gdef\eatcra#1^^MQ{\eatcrb#1Q}% 6600\gdef\eatcrb#1Q#2Q{#1}% 6601} 6602 6603% Macro bodies are absorbed as an argument in a context where 6604% all characters are catcode 10, 11 or 12, except \ which is active 6605% (as in normal texinfo). It is necessary to change the definition of \. 6606 6607% Non-ASCII encodings make 8-bit characters active, so un-activate 6608% them to avoid their expansion. Must do this non-globally, to 6609% confine the change to the current group. 6610 6611% It's necessary to have hard CRs when the macro is executed. This is 6612% done by making ^^M (\endlinechar) catcode 12 when reading the macro 6613% body, and then making it the \newlinechar in \scanmacro. 6614 6615\def\scanctxt{% 6616 \catcode`\"=\other 6617 \catcode`\+=\other 6618 \catcode`\<=\other 6619 \catcode`\>=\other 6620 \catcode`\@=\other 6621 \catcode`\^=\other 6622 \catcode`\_=\other 6623 \catcode`\|=\other 6624 \catcode`\~=\other 6625 \ifx\declaredencoding\ascii \else \setnonasciicharscatcodenonglobal\other \fi 6626} 6627 6628\def\scanargctxt{% 6629 \scanctxt 6630 \catcode`\\=\other 6631 \catcode`\^^M=\other 6632} 6633 6634\def\macrobodyctxt{% 6635 \scanctxt 6636 \catcode`\{=\other 6637 \catcode`\}=\other 6638 \catcode`\^^M=\other 6639 \usembodybackslash 6640} 6641 6642\def\macroargctxt{% 6643 \scanctxt 6644 \catcode`\\=\other 6645} 6646 6647% \mbodybackslash is the definition of \ in @macro bodies. 6648% It maps \foo\ => \csname macarg.foo\endcsname => #N 6649% where N is the macro parameter number. 6650% We define \csname macarg.\endcsname to be \realbackslash, so 6651% \\ in macro replacement text gets you a backslash. 6652 6653{\catcode`@=0 @catcode`@\=@active 6654 @gdef@usembodybackslash{@let\=@mbodybackslash} 6655 @gdef@mbodybackslash#1\{@csname macarg.#1@endcsname} 6656} 6657\expandafter\def\csname macarg.\endcsname{\realbackslash} 6658 6659\def\macro{\recursivefalse\parsearg\macroxxx} 6660\def\rmacro{\recursivetrue\parsearg\macroxxx} 6661 6662\def\macroxxx#1{% 6663 \getargs{#1}% now \macname is the macname and \argl the arglist 6664 \ifx\argl\empty % no arguments 6665 \paramno=0% 6666 \else 6667 \expandafter\parsemargdef \argl;% 6668 \fi 6669 \if1\csname ismacro.\the\macname\endcsname 6670 \message{Warning: redefining \the\macname}% 6671 \else 6672 \expandafter\ifx\csname \the\macname\endcsname \relax 6673 \else \errmessage{Macro name \the\macname\space already defined}\fi 6674 \global\cslet{macsave.\the\macname}{\the\macname}% 6675 \global\expandafter\let\csname ismacro.\the\macname\endcsname=1% 6676 \addtomacrolist{\the\macname}% 6677 \fi 6678 \begingroup \macrobodyctxt 6679 \ifrecursive \expandafter\parsermacbody 6680 \else \expandafter\parsemacbody 6681 \fi} 6682 6683\parseargdef\unmacro{% 6684 \if1\csname ismacro.#1\endcsname 6685 \global\cslet{#1}{macsave.#1}% 6686 \global\expandafter\let \csname ismacro.#1\endcsname=0% 6687 % Remove the macro name from \macrolist: 6688 \begingroup 6689 \expandafter\let\csname#1\endcsname \relax 6690 \let\definedummyword\unmacrodo 6691 \xdef\macrolist{\macrolist}% 6692 \endgroup 6693 \else 6694 \errmessage{Macro #1 not defined}% 6695 \fi 6696} 6697 6698% Called by \do from \dounmacro on each macro. The idea is to omit any 6699% macro definitions that have been changed to \relax. 6700% 6701\def\unmacrodo#1{% 6702 \ifx #1\relax 6703 % remove this 6704 \else 6705 \noexpand\definedummyword \noexpand#1% 6706 \fi 6707} 6708 6709% This makes use of the obscure feature that if the last token of a 6710% <parameter list> is #, then the preceding argument is delimited by 6711% an opening brace, and that opening brace is not consumed. 6712\def\getargs#1{\getargsxxx#1{}} 6713\def\getargsxxx#1#{\getmacname #1 \relax\getmacargs} 6714\def\getmacname #1 #2\relax{\macname={#1}} 6715\def\getmacargs#1{\def\argl{#1}} 6716 6717% Parse the optional {params} list. Set up \paramno and \paramlist 6718% so \defmacro knows what to do. Define \macarg.blah for each blah 6719% in the params list, to be ##N where N is the position in that list. 6720% That gets used by \mbodybackslash (above). 6721 6722% We need to get `macro parameter char #' into several definitions. 6723% The technique used is stolen from LaTeX: let \hash be something 6724% unexpandable, insert that wherever you need a #, and then redefine 6725% it to # just before using the token list produced. 6726% 6727% The same technique is used to protect \eatspaces till just before 6728% the macro is used. 6729 6730\def\parsemargdef#1;{\paramno=0\def\paramlist{}% 6731 \let\hash\relax\let\xeatspaces\relax\parsemargdefxxx#1,;,} 6732\def\parsemargdefxxx#1,{% 6733 \if#1;\let\next=\relax 6734 \else \let\next=\parsemargdefxxx 6735 \advance\paramno by 1% 6736 \expandafter\edef\csname macarg.\eatspaces{#1}\endcsname 6737 {\xeatspaces{\hash\the\paramno}}% 6738 \edef\paramlist{\paramlist\hash\the\paramno,}% 6739 \fi\next} 6740 6741% These two commands read recursive and nonrecursive macro bodies. 6742% (They're different since rec and nonrec macros end differently.) 6743 6744\long\def\parsemacbody#1@end macro% 6745{\xdef\temp{\eatcr{#1}}\endgroup\defmacro}% 6746\long\def\parsermacbody#1@end rmacro% 6747{\xdef\temp{\eatcr{#1}}\endgroup\defmacro}% 6748 6749% This defines the macro itself. There are six cases: recursive and 6750% nonrecursive macros of zero, one, and many arguments. 6751% Much magic with \expandafter here. 6752% \xdef is used so that macro definitions will survive the file 6753% they're defined in; @include reads the file inside a group. 6754\def\defmacro{% 6755 \let\hash=##% convert placeholders to macro parameter chars 6756 \ifrecursive 6757 \ifcase\paramno 6758 % 0 6759 \expandafter\xdef\csname\the\macname\endcsname{% 6760 \noexpand\scanmacro{\temp}}% 6761 \or % 1 6762 \expandafter\xdef\csname\the\macname\endcsname{% 6763 \bgroup\noexpand\macroargctxt 6764 \noexpand\braceorline 6765 \expandafter\noexpand\csname\the\macname xxx\endcsname}% 6766 \expandafter\xdef\csname\the\macname xxx\endcsname##1{% 6767 \egroup\noexpand\scanmacro{\temp}}% 6768 \else % many 6769 \expandafter\xdef\csname\the\macname\endcsname{% 6770 \bgroup\noexpand\macroargctxt 6771 \noexpand\csname\the\macname xx\endcsname}% 6772 \expandafter\xdef\csname\the\macname xx\endcsname##1{% 6773 \expandafter\noexpand\csname\the\macname xxx\endcsname ##1,}% 6774 \expandafter\expandafter 6775 \expandafter\xdef 6776 \expandafter\expandafter 6777 \csname\the\macname xxx\endcsname 6778 \paramlist{\egroup\noexpand\scanmacro{\temp}}% 6779 \fi 6780 \else 6781 \ifcase\paramno 6782 % 0 6783 \expandafter\xdef\csname\the\macname\endcsname{% 6784 \noexpand\norecurse{\the\macname}% 6785 \noexpand\scanmacro{\temp}\egroup}% 6786 \or % 1 6787 \expandafter\xdef\csname\the\macname\endcsname{% 6788 \bgroup\noexpand\macroargctxt 6789 \noexpand\braceorline 6790 \expandafter\noexpand\csname\the\macname xxx\endcsname}% 6791 \expandafter\xdef\csname\the\macname xxx\endcsname##1{% 6792 \egroup 6793 \noexpand\norecurse{\the\macname}% 6794 \noexpand\scanmacro{\temp}\egroup}% 6795 \else % many 6796 \expandafter\xdef\csname\the\macname\endcsname{% 6797 \bgroup\noexpand\macroargctxt 6798 \expandafter\noexpand\csname\the\macname xx\endcsname}% 6799 \expandafter\xdef\csname\the\macname xx\endcsname##1{% 6800 \expandafter\noexpand\csname\the\macname xxx\endcsname ##1,}% 6801 \expandafter\expandafter 6802 \expandafter\xdef 6803 \expandafter\expandafter 6804 \csname\the\macname xxx\endcsname 6805 \paramlist{% 6806 \egroup 6807 \noexpand\norecurse{\the\macname}% 6808 \noexpand\scanmacro{\temp}\egroup}% 6809 \fi 6810 \fi} 6811 6812\def\norecurse#1{\bgroup\cslet{#1}{macsave.#1}} 6813 6814% \braceorline decides whether the next nonwhitespace character is a 6815% {. If so it reads up to the closing }, if not, it reads the whole 6816% line. Whatever was read is then fed to the next control sequence 6817% as an argument (by \parsebrace or \parsearg) 6818\def\braceorline#1{\let\macnamexxx=#1\futurelet\nchar\braceorlinexxx} 6819\def\braceorlinexxx{% 6820 \ifx\nchar\bgroup\else 6821 \expandafter\parsearg 6822 \fi \macnamexxx} 6823 6824 6825% @alias. 6826% We need some trickery to remove the optional spaces around the equal 6827% sign. Just make them active and then expand them all to nothing. 6828\def\alias{\parseargusing\obeyspaces\aliasxxx} 6829\def\aliasxxx #1{\aliasyyy#1\relax} 6830\def\aliasyyy #1=#2\relax{% 6831 {% 6832 \expandafter\let\obeyedspace=\empty 6833 \addtomacrolist{#1}% 6834 \xdef\next{\global\let\makecsname{#1}=\makecsname{#2}}% 6835 }% 6836 \next 6837} 6838 6839 6840\message{cross references,} 6841 6842\newwrite\auxfile 6843\newif\ifhavexrefs % True if xref values are known. 6844\newif\ifwarnedxrefs % True if we warned once that they aren't known. 6845 6846% @inforef is relatively simple. 6847\def\inforef #1{\inforefzzz #1,,,,**} 6848\def\inforefzzz #1,#2,#3,#4**{\putwordSee{} \putwordInfo{} \putwordfile{} \file{\ignorespaces #3{}}, 6849 node \samp{\ignorespaces#1{}}} 6850 6851% @node's only job in TeX is to define \lastnode, which is used in 6852% cross-references. The @node line might or might not have commas, and 6853% might or might not have spaces before the first comma, like: 6854% @node foo , bar , ... 6855% We don't want such trailing spaces in the node name. 6856% 6857\parseargdef\node{\checkenv{}\donode #1 ,\finishnodeparse} 6858% 6859% also remove a trailing comma, in case of something like this: 6860% @node Help-Cross, , , Cross-refs 6861\def\donode#1 ,#2\finishnodeparse{\dodonode #1,\finishnodeparse} 6862\def\dodonode#1,#2\finishnodeparse{\gdef\lastnode{#1}} 6863 6864\let\nwnode=\node 6865\let\lastnode=\empty 6866 6867% Write a cross-reference definition for the current node. #1 is the 6868% type (Ynumbered, Yappendix, Ynothing). 6869% 6870\def\donoderef#1{% 6871 \ifx\lastnode\empty\else 6872 \setref{\lastnode}{#1}% 6873 \global\let\lastnode=\empty 6874 \fi 6875} 6876 6877% @anchor{NAME} -- define xref target at arbitrary point. 6878% 6879\newcount\savesfregister 6880% 6881\def\savesf{\relax \ifhmode \savesfregister=\spacefactor \fi} 6882\def\restoresf{\relax \ifhmode \spacefactor=\savesfregister \fi} 6883\def\anchor#1{\savesf \setref{#1}{Ynothing}\restoresf \ignorespaces} 6884 6885% \setref{NAME}{SNT} defines a cross-reference point NAME (a node or an 6886% anchor), which consists of three parts: 6887% 1) NAME-title - the current sectioning name taken from \lastsection, 6888% or the anchor name. 6889% 2) NAME-snt - section number and type, passed as the SNT arg, or 6890% empty for anchors. 6891% 3) NAME-pg - the page number. 6892% 6893% This is called from \donoderef, \anchor, and \dofloat. In the case of 6894% floats, there is an additional part, which is not written here: 6895% 4) NAME-lof - the text as it should appear in a @listoffloats. 6896% 6897\def\setref#1#2{% 6898 \pdfmkdest{#1}% 6899 \iflinks 6900 {% 6901 \atdummies % preserve commands, but don't expand them 6902 \edef\writexrdef##1##2{% 6903 \write\auxfile{@xrdef{#1-% #1 of \setref, expanded by the \edef 6904 ##1}{##2}}% these are parameters of \writexrdef 6905 }% 6906 \toks0 = \expandafter{\lastsection}% 6907 \immediate \writexrdef{title}{\the\toks0 }% 6908 \immediate \writexrdef{snt}{\csname #2\endcsname}% \Ynumbered etc. 6909 \safewhatsit{\writexrdef{pg}{\folio}}% will be written later, during \shipout 6910 }% 6911 \fi 6912} 6913 6914% @xref, @pxref, and @ref generate cross-references. For \xrefX, #1 is 6915% the node name, #2 the name of the Info cross-reference, #3 the printed 6916% node name, #4 the name of the Info file, #5 the name of the printed 6917% manual. All but the node name can be omitted. 6918% 6919\def\pxref#1{\putwordsee{} \xrefX[#1,,,,,,,]} 6920\def\xref#1{\putwordSee{} \xrefX[#1,,,,,,,]} 6921\def\ref#1{\xrefX[#1,,,,,,,]} 6922\def\xrefX[#1,#2,#3,#4,#5,#6]{\begingroup 6923 \unsepspaces 6924 \def\printedmanual{\ignorespaces #5}% 6925 \def\printedrefname{\ignorespaces #3}% 6926 \setbox1=\hbox{\printedmanual\unskip}% 6927 \setbox0=\hbox{\printedrefname\unskip}% 6928 \ifdim \wd0 = 0pt 6929 % No printed node name was explicitly given. 6930 \expandafter\ifx\csname SETxref-automatic-section-title\endcsname\relax 6931 % Use the node name inside the square brackets. 6932 \def\printedrefname{\ignorespaces #1}% 6933 \else 6934 % Use the actual chapter/section title appear inside 6935 % the square brackets. Use the real section title if we have it. 6936 \ifdim \wd1 > 0pt 6937 % It is in another manual, so we don't have it. 6938 \def\printedrefname{\ignorespaces #1}% 6939 \else 6940 \ifhavexrefs 6941 % We know the real title if we have the xref values. 6942 \def\printedrefname{\refx{#1-title}{}}% 6943 \else 6944 % Otherwise just copy the Info node name. 6945 \def\printedrefname{\ignorespaces #1}% 6946 \fi% 6947 \fi 6948 \fi 6949 \fi 6950 % 6951 % Make link in pdf output. 6952 \ifpdf 6953 \leavevmode 6954 \getfilename{#4}% 6955 {\indexnofonts 6956 \turnoffactive 6957 % See comments at \activebackslashdouble. 6958 {\activebackslashdouble \xdef\pdfxrefdest{#1}% 6959 \backslashparens\pdfxrefdest}% 6960 % 6961 \ifnum\filenamelength>0 6962 \startlink attr{/Border [0 0 0]}% 6963 goto file{\the\filename.pdf} name{\pdfxrefdest}% 6964 \else 6965 \startlink attr{/Border [0 0 0]}% 6966 goto name{\pdfmkpgn{\pdfxrefdest}}% 6967 \fi 6968 }% 6969 \setcolor{\linkcolor}% 6970 \fi 6971 % 6972 % Float references are printed completely differently: "Figure 1.2" 6973 % instead of "[somenode], p.3". We distinguish them by the 6974 % LABEL-title being set to a magic string. 6975 {% 6976 % Have to otherify everything special to allow the \csname to 6977 % include an _ in the xref name, etc. 6978 \indexnofonts 6979 \turnoffactive 6980 \expandafter\global\expandafter\let\expandafter\Xthisreftitle 6981 \csname XR#1-title\endcsname 6982 }% 6983 \iffloat\Xthisreftitle 6984 % If the user specified the print name (third arg) to the ref, 6985 % print it instead of our usual "Figure 1.2". 6986 \ifdim\wd0 = 0pt 6987 \refx{#1-snt}{}% 6988 \else 6989 \printedrefname 6990 \fi 6991 % 6992 % if the user also gave the printed manual name (fifth arg), append 6993 % "in MANUALNAME". 6994 \ifdim \wd1 > 0pt 6995 \space \putwordin{} \cite{\printedmanual}% 6996 \fi 6997 \else 6998 % node/anchor (non-float) references. 6999 % 7000 % If we use \unhbox0 and \unhbox1 to print the node names, TeX does not 7001 % insert empty discretionaries after hyphens, which means that it will 7002 % not find a line break at a hyphen in a node names. Since some manuals 7003 % are best written with fairly long node names, containing hyphens, this 7004 % is a loss. Therefore, we give the text of the node name again, so it 7005 % is as if TeX is seeing it for the first time. 7006 \ifdim \wd1 > 0pt 7007 \putwordSection{} ``\printedrefname'' \putwordin{} \cite{\printedmanual}% 7008 \else 7009 % _ (for example) has to be the character _ for the purposes of the 7010 % control sequence corresponding to the node, but it has to expand 7011 % into the usual \leavevmode...\vrule stuff for purposes of 7012 % printing. So we \turnoffactive for the \refx-snt, back on for the 7013 % printing, back off for the \refx-pg. 7014 {\turnoffactive 7015 % Only output a following space if the -snt ref is nonempty; for 7016 % @unnumbered and @anchor, it won't be. 7017 \setbox2 = \hbox{\ignorespaces \refx{#1-snt}{}}% 7018 \ifdim \wd2 > 0pt \refx{#1-snt}\space\fi 7019 }% 7020 % output the `[mynode]' via a macro so it can be overridden. 7021 \xrefprintnodename\printedrefname 7022 % 7023 % But we always want a comma and a space: 7024 ,\space 7025 % 7026 % output the `page 3'. 7027 \turnoffactive \putwordpage\tie\refx{#1-pg}{}% 7028 \fi 7029 \fi 7030 \endlink 7031\endgroup} 7032 7033% This macro is called from \xrefX for the `[nodename]' part of xref 7034% output. It's a separate macro only so it can be changed more easily, 7035% since square brackets don't work well in some documents. Particularly 7036% one that Bob is working on :). 7037% 7038\def\xrefprintnodename#1{[#1]} 7039 7040% Things referred to by \setref. 7041% 7042\def\Ynothing{} 7043\def\Yomitfromtoc{} 7044\def\Ynumbered{% 7045 \ifnum\secno=0 7046 \putwordChapter@tie \the\chapno 7047 \else \ifnum\subsecno=0 7048 \putwordSection@tie \the\chapno.\the\secno 7049 \else \ifnum\subsubsecno=0 7050 \putwordSection@tie \the\chapno.\the\secno.\the\subsecno 7051 \else 7052 \putwordSection@tie \the\chapno.\the\secno.\the\subsecno.\the\subsubsecno 7053 \fi\fi\fi 7054} 7055\def\Yappendix{% 7056 \ifnum\secno=0 7057 \putwordAppendix@tie @char\the\appendixno{}% 7058 \else \ifnum\subsecno=0 7059 \putwordSection@tie @char\the\appendixno.\the\secno 7060 \else \ifnum\subsubsecno=0 7061 \putwordSection@tie @char\the\appendixno.\the\secno.\the\subsecno 7062 \else 7063 \putwordSection@tie 7064 @char\the\appendixno.\the\secno.\the\subsecno.\the\subsubsecno 7065 \fi\fi\fi 7066} 7067 7068% Define \refx{NAME}{SUFFIX} to reference a cross-reference string named NAME. 7069% If its value is nonempty, SUFFIX is output afterward. 7070% 7071\def\refx#1#2{% 7072 {% 7073 \indexnofonts 7074 \otherbackslash 7075 \expandafter\global\expandafter\let\expandafter\thisrefX 7076 \csname XR#1\endcsname 7077 }% 7078 \ifx\thisrefX\relax 7079 % If not defined, say something at least. 7080 \angleleft un\-de\-fined\angleright 7081 \iflinks 7082 \ifhavexrefs 7083 \message{\linenumber Undefined cross reference `#1'.}% 7084 \else 7085 \ifwarnedxrefs\else 7086 \global\warnedxrefstrue 7087 \message{Cross reference values unknown; you must run TeX again.}% 7088 \fi 7089 \fi 7090 \fi 7091 \else 7092 % It's defined, so just use it. 7093 \thisrefX 7094 \fi 7095 #2% Output the suffix in any case. 7096} 7097 7098% This is the macro invoked by entries in the aux file. Usually it's 7099% just a \def (we prepend XR to the control sequence name to avoid 7100% collisions). But if this is a float type, we have more work to do. 7101% 7102\def\xrdef#1#2{% 7103 {% The node name might contain 8-bit characters, which in our current 7104 % implementation are changed to commands like @'e. Don't let these 7105 % mess up the control sequence name. 7106 \indexnofonts 7107 \turnoffactive 7108 \xdef\safexrefname{#1}% 7109 }% 7110 % 7111 \expandafter\gdef\csname XR\safexrefname\endcsname{#2}% remember this xref 7112 % 7113 % Was that xref control sequence that we just defined for a float? 7114 \expandafter\iffloat\csname XR\safexrefname\endcsname 7115 % it was a float, and we have the (safe) float type in \iffloattype. 7116 \expandafter\let\expandafter\floatlist 7117 \csname floatlist\iffloattype\endcsname 7118 % 7119 % Is this the first time we've seen this float type? 7120 \expandafter\ifx\floatlist\relax 7121 \toks0 = {\do}% yes, so just \do 7122 \else 7123 % had it before, so preserve previous elements in list. 7124 \toks0 = \expandafter{\floatlist\do}% 7125 \fi 7126 % 7127 % Remember this xref in the control sequence \floatlistFLOATTYPE, 7128 % for later use in \listoffloats. 7129 \expandafter\xdef\csname floatlist\iffloattype\endcsname{\the\toks0 7130 {\safexrefname}}% 7131 \fi 7132} 7133 7134% Read the last existing aux file, if any. No error if none exists. 7135% 7136\def\tryauxfile{% 7137 \openin 1 \jobname.aux 7138 \ifeof 1 \else 7139 \readdatafile{aux}% 7140 \global\havexrefstrue 7141 \fi 7142 \closein 1 7143} 7144 7145\def\setupdatafile{% 7146 \catcode`\^^@=\other 7147 \catcode`\^^A=\other 7148 \catcode`\^^B=\other 7149 \catcode`\^^C=\other 7150 \catcode`\^^D=\other 7151 \catcode`\^^E=\other 7152 \catcode`\^^F=\other 7153 \catcode`\^^G=\other 7154 \catcode`\^^H=\other 7155 \catcode`\^^K=\other 7156 \catcode`\^^L=\other 7157 \catcode`\^^N=\other 7158 \catcode`\^^P=\other 7159 \catcode`\^^Q=\other 7160 \catcode`\^^R=\other 7161 \catcode`\^^S=\other 7162 \catcode`\^^T=\other 7163 \catcode`\^^U=\other 7164 \catcode`\^^V=\other 7165 \catcode`\^^W=\other 7166 \catcode`\^^X=\other 7167 \catcode`\^^Z=\other 7168 \catcode`\^^[=\other 7169 \catcode`\^^\=\other 7170 \catcode`\^^]=\other 7171 \catcode`\^^^=\other 7172 \catcode`\^^_=\other 7173 % It was suggested to set the catcode of ^ to 7, which would allow ^^e4 etc. 7174 % in xref tags, i.e., node names. But since ^^e4 notation isn't 7175 % supported in the main text, it doesn't seem desirable. Furthermore, 7176 % that is not enough: for node names that actually contain a ^ 7177 % character, we would end up writing a line like this: 'xrdef {'hat 7178 % b-title}{'hat b} and \xrdef does a \csname...\endcsname on the first 7179 % argument, and \hat is not an expandable control sequence. It could 7180 % all be worked out, but why? Either we support ^^ or we don't. 7181 % 7182 % The other change necessary for this was to define \auxhat: 7183 % \def\auxhat{\def^{'hat }}% extra space so ok if followed by letter 7184 % and then to call \auxhat in \setq. 7185 % 7186 \catcode`\^=\other 7187 % 7188 % Special characters. Should be turned off anyway, but... 7189 \catcode`\~=\other 7190 \catcode`\[=\other 7191 \catcode`\]=\other 7192 \catcode`\"=\other 7193 \catcode`\_=\other 7194 \catcode`\|=\other 7195 \catcode`\<=\other 7196 \catcode`\>=\other 7197 \catcode`\$=\other 7198 \catcode`\#=\other 7199 \catcode`\&=\other 7200 \catcode`\%=\other 7201 \catcode`+=\other % avoid \+ for paranoia even though we've turned it off 7202 % 7203 % This is to support \ in node names and titles, since the \ 7204 % characters end up in a \csname. It's easier than 7205 % leaving it active and making its active definition an actual \ 7206 % character. What I don't understand is why it works in the *value* 7207 % of the xrdef. Seems like it should be a catcode12 \, and that 7208 % should not typeset properly. But it works, so I'm moving on for 7209 % now. --karl, 15jan04. 7210 \catcode`\\=\other 7211 % 7212 % Make the characters 128-255 be printing characters. 7213 {% 7214 \count1=128 7215 \def\loop{% 7216 \catcode\count1=\other 7217 \advance\count1 by 1 7218 \ifnum \count1<256 \loop \fi 7219 }% 7220 }% 7221 % 7222 % @ is our escape character in .aux files, and we need braces. 7223 \catcode`\{=1 7224 \catcode`\}=2 7225 \catcode`\@=0 7226} 7227 7228\def\readdatafile#1{% 7229\begingroup 7230 \setupdatafile 7231 \input\jobname.#1 7232\endgroup} 7233 7234 7235\message{insertions,} 7236% including footnotes. 7237 7238\newcount \footnoteno 7239 7240% The trailing space in the following definition for supereject is 7241% vital for proper filling; pages come out unaligned when you do a 7242% pagealignmacro call if that space before the closing brace is 7243% removed. (Generally, numeric constants should always be followed by a 7244% space to prevent strange expansion errors.) 7245\def\supereject{\par\penalty -20000\footnoteno =0 } 7246 7247% @footnotestyle is meaningful for info output only. 7248\let\footnotestyle=\comment 7249 7250{\catcode `\@=11 7251% 7252% Auto-number footnotes. Otherwise like plain. 7253\gdef\footnote{% 7254 \let\indent=\ptexindent 7255 \let\noindent=\ptexnoindent 7256 \global\advance\footnoteno by \@ne 7257 \edef\thisfootno{$^{\the\footnoteno}$}% 7258 % 7259 % In case the footnote comes at the end of a sentence, preserve the 7260 % extra spacing after we do the footnote number. 7261 \let\@sf\empty 7262 \ifhmode\edef\@sf{\spacefactor\the\spacefactor}\ptexslash\fi 7263 % 7264 % Remove inadvertent blank space before typesetting the footnote number. 7265 \unskip 7266 \thisfootno\@sf 7267 \dofootnote 7268}% 7269 7270% Don't bother with the trickery in plain.tex to not require the 7271% footnote text as a parameter. Our footnotes don't need to be so general. 7272% 7273% Oh yes, they do; otherwise, @ifset (and anything else that uses 7274% \parseargline) fails inside footnotes because the tokens are fixed when 7275% the footnote is read. --karl, 16nov96. 7276% 7277\gdef\dofootnote{% 7278 \insert\footins\bgroup 7279 % We want to typeset this text as a normal paragraph, even if the 7280 % footnote reference occurs in (for example) a display environment. 7281 % So reset some parameters. 7282 \hsize=\pagewidth 7283 \interlinepenalty\interfootnotelinepenalty 7284 \splittopskip\ht\strutbox % top baseline for broken footnotes 7285 \splitmaxdepth\dp\strutbox 7286 \floatingpenalty\@MM 7287 \leftskip\z@skip 7288 \rightskip\z@skip 7289 \spaceskip\z@skip 7290 \xspaceskip\z@skip 7291 \parindent\defaultparindent 7292 % 7293 \smallfonts \rm 7294 % 7295 % Because we use hanging indentation in footnotes, a @noindent appears 7296 % to exdent this text, so make it be a no-op. makeinfo does not use 7297 % hanging indentation so @noindent can still be needed within footnote 7298 % text after an @example or the like (not that this is good style). 7299 \let\noindent = \relax 7300 % 7301 % Hang the footnote text off the number. Use \everypar in case the 7302 % footnote extends for more than one paragraph. 7303 \everypar = {\hang}% 7304 \textindent{\thisfootno}% 7305 % 7306 % Don't crash into the line above the footnote text. Since this 7307 % expands into a box, it must come within the paragraph, lest it 7308 % provide a place where TeX can split the footnote. 7309 \footstrut 7310 \futurelet\next\fo@t 7311} 7312}%end \catcode `\@=11 7313 7314% In case a @footnote appears in a vbox, save the footnote text and create 7315% the real \insert just after the vbox finished. Otherwise, the insertion 7316% would be lost. 7317% Similarily, if a @footnote appears inside an alignment, save the footnote 7318% text to a box and make the \insert when a row of the table is finished. 7319% And the same can be done for other insert classes. --kasal, 16nov03. 7320 7321% Replace the \insert primitive by a cheating macro. 7322% Deeper inside, just make sure that the saved insertions are not spilled 7323% out prematurely. 7324% 7325\def\startsavinginserts{% 7326 \ifx \insert\ptexinsert 7327 \let\insert\saveinsert 7328 \else 7329 \let\checkinserts\relax 7330 \fi 7331} 7332 7333% This \insert replacement works for both \insert\footins{foo} and 7334% \insert\footins\bgroup foo\egroup, but it doesn't work for \insert27{foo}. 7335% 7336\def\saveinsert#1{% 7337 \edef\next{\noexpand\savetobox \makeSAVEname#1}% 7338 \afterassignment\next 7339 % swallow the left brace 7340 \let\temp = 7341} 7342\def\makeSAVEname#1{\makecsname{SAVE\expandafter\gobble\string#1}} 7343\def\savetobox#1{\global\setbox#1 = \vbox\bgroup \unvbox#1} 7344 7345\def\checksaveins#1{\ifvoid#1\else \placesaveins#1\fi} 7346 7347\def\placesaveins#1{% 7348 \ptexinsert \csname\expandafter\gobblesave\string#1\endcsname 7349 {\box#1}% 7350} 7351 7352% eat @SAVE -- beware, all of them have catcode \other: 7353{ 7354 \def\dospecials{\do S\do A\do V\do E} \uncatcodespecials % ;-) 7355 \gdef\gobblesave @SAVE{} 7356} 7357 7358% initialization: 7359\def\newsaveins #1{% 7360 \edef\next{\noexpand\newsaveinsX \makeSAVEname#1}% 7361 \next 7362} 7363\def\newsaveinsX #1{% 7364 \csname newbox\endcsname #1% 7365 \expandafter\def\expandafter\checkinserts\expandafter{\checkinserts 7366 \checksaveins #1}% 7367} 7368 7369% initialize: 7370\let\checkinserts\empty 7371\newsaveins\footins 7372\newsaveins\margin 7373 7374 7375% @image. We use the macros from epsf.tex to support this. 7376% If epsf.tex is not installed and @image is used, we complain. 7377% 7378% Check for and read epsf.tex up front. If we read it only at @image 7379% time, we might be inside a group, and then its definitions would get 7380% undone and the next image would fail. 7381\openin 1 = epsf.tex 7382\ifeof 1 \else 7383 % Do not bother showing banner with epsf.tex v2.7k (available in 7384 % doc/epsf.tex and on ctan). 7385 \def\epsfannounce{\toks0 = }% 7386 \input epsf.tex 7387\fi 7388\closein 1 7389% 7390% We will only complain once about lack of epsf.tex. 7391\newif\ifwarnednoepsf 7392\newhelp\noepsfhelp{epsf.tex must be installed for images to 7393 work. It is also included in the Texinfo distribution, or you can get 7394 it from ftp://tug.org/tex/epsf.tex.} 7395% 7396\def\image#1{% 7397 \ifx\epsfbox\undefined 7398 \ifwarnednoepsf \else 7399 \errhelp = \noepsfhelp 7400 \errmessage{epsf.tex not found, images will be ignored}% 7401 \global\warnednoepsftrue 7402 \fi 7403 \else 7404 \imagexxx #1,,,,,\finish 7405 \fi 7406} 7407% 7408% Arguments to @image: 7409% #1 is (mandatory) image filename; we tack on .eps extension. 7410% #2 is (optional) width, #3 is (optional) height. 7411% #4 is (ignored optional) html alt text. 7412% #5 is (ignored optional) extension. 7413% #6 is just the usual extra ignored arg for parsing this stuff. 7414\newif\ifimagevmode 7415\def\imagexxx#1,#2,#3,#4,#5,#6\finish{\begingroup 7416 \catcode`\^^M = 5 % in case we're inside an example 7417 \normalturnoffactive % allow _ et al. in names 7418 % If the image is by itself, center it. 7419 \ifvmode 7420 \imagevmodetrue 7421 \nobreak\bigskip 7422 % Usually we'll have text after the image which will insert 7423 % \parskip glue, so insert it here too to equalize the space 7424 % above and below. 7425 \nobreak\vskip\parskip 7426 \nobreak 7427 \line\bgroup 7428 \fi 7429 % 7430 % Output the image. 7431 \ifpdf 7432 \dopdfimage{#1}{#2}{#3}% 7433 \else 7434 % \epsfbox itself resets \epsf?size at each figure. 7435 \setbox0 = \hbox{\ignorespaces #2}\ifdim\wd0 > 0pt \epsfxsize=#2\relax \fi 7436 \setbox0 = \hbox{\ignorespaces #3}\ifdim\wd0 > 0pt \epsfysize=#3\relax \fi 7437 \epsfbox{#1.eps}% 7438 \fi 7439 % 7440 \ifimagevmode \egroup \bigbreak \fi % space after the image 7441\endgroup} 7442 7443 7444% @float FLOATTYPE,LABEL,LOC ... @end float for displayed figures, tables, 7445% etc. We don't actually implement floating yet, we always include the 7446% float "here". But it seemed the best name for the future. 7447% 7448\envparseargdef\float{\eatcommaspace\eatcommaspace\dofloat#1, , ,\finish} 7449 7450% There may be a space before second and/or third parameter; delete it. 7451\def\eatcommaspace#1, {#1,} 7452 7453% #1 is the optional FLOATTYPE, the text label for this float, typically 7454% "Figure", "Table", "Example", etc. Can't contain commas. If omitted, 7455% this float will not be numbered and cannot be referred to. 7456% 7457% #2 is the optional xref label. Also must be present for the float to 7458% be referable. 7459% 7460% #3 is the optional positioning argument; for now, it is ignored. It 7461% will somehow specify the positions allowed to float to (here, top, bottom). 7462% 7463% We keep a separate counter for each FLOATTYPE, which we reset at each 7464% chapter-level command. 7465\let\resetallfloatnos=\empty 7466% 7467\def\dofloat#1,#2,#3,#4\finish{% 7468 \let\thiscaption=\empty 7469 \let\thisshortcaption=\empty 7470 % 7471 % don't lose footnotes inside @float. 7472 % 7473 % BEWARE: when the floats start float, we have to issue warning whenever an 7474 % insert appears inside a float which could possibly float. --kasal, 26may04 7475 % 7476 \startsavinginserts 7477 % 7478 % We can't be used inside a paragraph. 7479 \par 7480 % 7481 \vtop\bgroup 7482 \def\floattype{#1}% 7483 \def\floatlabel{#2}% 7484 \def\floatloc{#3}% we do nothing with this yet. 7485 % 7486 \ifx\floattype\empty 7487 \let\safefloattype=\empty 7488 \else 7489 {% 7490 % the floattype might have accents or other special characters, 7491 % but we need to use it in a control sequence name. 7492 \indexnofonts 7493 \turnoffactive 7494 \xdef\safefloattype{\floattype}% 7495 }% 7496 \fi 7497 % 7498 % If label is given but no type, we handle that as the empty type. 7499 \ifx\floatlabel\empty \else 7500 % We want each FLOATTYPE to be numbered separately (Figure 1, 7501 % Table 1, Figure 2, ...). (And if no label, no number.) 7502 % 7503 \expandafter\getfloatno\csname\safefloattype floatno\endcsname 7504 \global\advance\floatno by 1 7505 % 7506 {% 7507 % This magic value for \lastsection is output by \setref as the 7508 % XREFLABEL-title value. \xrefX uses it to distinguish float 7509 % labels (which have a completely different output format) from 7510 % node and anchor labels. And \xrdef uses it to construct the 7511 % lists of floats. 7512 % 7513 \edef\lastsection{\floatmagic=\safefloattype}% 7514 \setref{\floatlabel}{Yfloat}% 7515 }% 7516 \fi 7517 % 7518 % start with \parskip glue, I guess. 7519 \vskip\parskip 7520 % 7521 % Don't suppress indentation if a float happens to start a section. 7522 \restorefirstparagraphindent 7523} 7524 7525% we have these possibilities: 7526% @float Foo,lbl & @caption{Cap}: Foo 1.1: Cap 7527% @float Foo,lbl & no caption: Foo 1.1 7528% @float Foo & @caption{Cap}: Foo: Cap 7529% @float Foo & no caption: Foo 7530% @float ,lbl & Caption{Cap}: 1.1: Cap 7531% @float ,lbl & no caption: 1.1 7532% @float & @caption{Cap}: Cap 7533% @float & no caption: 7534% 7535\def\Efloat{% 7536 \let\floatident = \empty 7537 % 7538 % In all cases, if we have a float type, it comes first. 7539 \ifx\floattype\empty \else \def\floatident{\floattype}\fi 7540 % 7541 % If we have an xref label, the number comes next. 7542 \ifx\floatlabel\empty \else 7543 \ifx\floattype\empty \else % if also had float type, need tie first. 7544 \appendtomacro\floatident{\tie}% 7545 \fi 7546 % the number. 7547 \appendtomacro\floatident{\chaplevelprefix\the\floatno}% 7548 \fi 7549 % 7550 % Start the printed caption with what we've constructed in 7551 % \floatident, but keep it separate; we need \floatident again. 7552 \let\captionline = \floatident 7553 % 7554 \ifx\thiscaption\empty \else 7555 \ifx\floatident\empty \else 7556 \appendtomacro\captionline{: }% had ident, so need a colon between 7557 \fi 7558 % 7559 % caption text. 7560 \appendtomacro\captionline{\scanexp\thiscaption}% 7561 \fi 7562 % 7563 % If we have anything to print, print it, with space before. 7564 % Eventually this needs to become an \insert. 7565 \ifx\captionline\empty \else 7566 \vskip.5\parskip 7567 \captionline 7568 % 7569 % Space below caption. 7570 \vskip\parskip 7571 \fi 7572 % 7573 % If have an xref label, write the list of floats info. Do this 7574 % after the caption, to avoid chance of it being a breakpoint. 7575 \ifx\floatlabel\empty \else 7576 % Write the text that goes in the lof to the aux file as 7577 % \floatlabel-lof. Besides \floatident, we include the short 7578 % caption if specified, else the full caption if specified, else nothing. 7579 {% 7580 \atdummies 7581 % 7582 % since we read the caption text in the macro world, where ^^M 7583 % is turned into a normal character, we have to scan it back, so 7584 % we don't write the literal three characters "^^M" into the aux file. 7585 \scanexp{% 7586 \xdef\noexpand\gtemp{% 7587 \ifx\thisshortcaption\empty 7588 \thiscaption 7589 \else 7590 \thisshortcaption 7591 \fi 7592 }% 7593 }% 7594 \immediate\write\auxfile{@xrdef{\floatlabel-lof}{\floatident 7595 \ifx\gtemp\empty \else : \gtemp \fi}}% 7596 }% 7597 \fi 7598 \egroup % end of \vtop 7599 % 7600 % place the captured inserts 7601 % 7602 % BEWARE: when the floats start floating, we have to issue warning 7603 % whenever an insert appears inside a float which could possibly 7604 % float. --kasal, 26may04 7605 % 7606 \checkinserts 7607} 7608 7609% Append the tokens #2 to the definition of macro #1, not expanding either. 7610% 7611\def\appendtomacro#1#2{% 7612 \expandafter\def\expandafter#1\expandafter{#1#2}% 7613} 7614 7615% @caption, @shortcaption 7616% 7617\def\caption{\docaption\thiscaption} 7618\def\shortcaption{\docaption\thisshortcaption} 7619\def\docaption{\checkenv\float \bgroup\scanargctxt\defcaption} 7620\def\defcaption#1#2{\egroup \def#1{#2}} 7621 7622% The parameter is the control sequence identifying the counter we are 7623% going to use. Create it if it doesn't exist and assign it to \floatno. 7624\def\getfloatno#1{% 7625 \ifx#1\relax 7626 % Haven't seen this figure type before. 7627 \csname newcount\endcsname #1% 7628 % 7629 % Remember to reset this floatno at the next chap. 7630 \expandafter\gdef\expandafter\resetallfloatnos 7631 \expandafter{\resetallfloatnos #1=0 }% 7632 \fi 7633 \let\floatno#1% 7634} 7635 7636% \setref calls this to get the XREFLABEL-snt value. We want an @xref 7637% to the FLOATLABEL to expand to "Figure 3.1". We call \setref when we 7638% first read the @float command. 7639% 7640\def\Yfloat{\floattype@tie \chaplevelprefix\the\floatno}% 7641 7642% Magic string used for the XREFLABEL-title value, so \xrefX can 7643% distinguish floats from other xref types. 7644\def\floatmagic{!!float!!} 7645 7646% #1 is the control sequence we are passed; we expand into a conditional 7647% which is true if #1 represents a float ref. That is, the magic 7648% \lastsection value which we \setref above. 7649% 7650\def\iffloat#1{\expandafter\doiffloat#1==\finish} 7651% 7652% #1 is (maybe) the \floatmagic string. If so, #2 will be the 7653% (safe) float type for this float. We set \iffloattype to #2. 7654% 7655\def\doiffloat#1=#2=#3\finish{% 7656 \def\temp{#1}% 7657 \def\iffloattype{#2}% 7658 \ifx\temp\floatmagic 7659} 7660 7661% @listoffloats FLOATTYPE - print a list of floats like a table of contents. 7662% 7663\parseargdef\listoffloats{% 7664 \def\floattype{#1}% floattype 7665 {% 7666 % the floattype might have accents or other special characters, 7667 % but we need to use it in a control sequence name. 7668 \indexnofonts 7669 \turnoffactive 7670 \xdef\safefloattype{\floattype}% 7671 }% 7672 % 7673 % \xrdef saves the floats as a \do-list in \floatlistSAFEFLOATTYPE. 7674 \expandafter\ifx\csname floatlist\safefloattype\endcsname \relax 7675 \ifhavexrefs 7676 % if the user said @listoffloats foo but never @float foo. 7677 \message{\linenumber No `\safefloattype' floats to list.}% 7678 \fi 7679 \else 7680 \begingroup 7681 \leftskip=\tocindent % indent these entries like a toc 7682 \let\do=\listoffloatsdo 7683 \csname floatlist\safefloattype\endcsname 7684 \endgroup 7685 \fi 7686} 7687 7688% This is called on each entry in a list of floats. We're passed the 7689% xref label, in the form LABEL-title, which is how we save it in the 7690% aux file. We strip off the -title and look up \XRLABEL-lof, which 7691% has the text we're supposed to typeset here. 7692% 7693% Figures without xref labels will not be included in the list (since 7694% they won't appear in the aux file). 7695% 7696\def\listoffloatsdo#1{\listoffloatsdoentry#1\finish} 7697\def\listoffloatsdoentry#1-title\finish{{% 7698 % Can't fully expand XR#1-lof because it can contain anything. Just 7699 % pass the control sequence. On the other hand, XR#1-pg is just the 7700 % page number, and we want to fully expand that so we can get a link 7701 % in pdf output. 7702 \toksA = \expandafter{\csname XR#1-lof\endcsname}% 7703 % 7704 % use the same \entry macro we use to generate the TOC and index. 7705 \edef\writeentry{\noexpand\entry{\the\toksA}{\csname XR#1-pg\endcsname}}% 7706 \writeentry 7707}} 7708 7709 7710\message{localization,} 7711 7712% @documentlanguage is usually given very early, just after 7713% @setfilename. If done too late, it may not override everything 7714% properly. Single argument is the language (de) or locale (de_DE) 7715% abbreviation. It would be nice if we could set up a hyphenation file. 7716% 7717{ 7718 \catcode`\_ = \active 7719 \globaldefs=1 7720\parseargdef\documentlanguage{\begingroup 7721 \let_=\normalunderscore % normal _ character for filenames 7722 \tex % read txi-??.tex file in plain TeX. 7723 % Read the file by the name they passed if it exists. 7724 \openin 1 txi-#1.tex 7725 \ifeof 1 7726 \documentlanguagetrywithoutunderscore{#1_\finish}% 7727 \else 7728 \input txi-#1.tex 7729 \fi 7730 \closein 1 7731 \endgroup 7732\endgroup} 7733} 7734% 7735% If they passed de_DE, and txi-de_DE.tex doesn't exist, 7736% try txi-de.tex. 7737% 7738\def\documentlanguagetrywithoutunderscore#1_#2\finish{% 7739 \openin 1 txi-#1.tex 7740 \ifeof 1 7741 \errhelp = \nolanghelp 7742 \errmessage{Cannot read language file txi-#1.tex}% 7743 \else 7744 \input txi-#1.tex 7745 \fi 7746 \closein 1 7747} 7748% 7749\newhelp\nolanghelp{The given language definition file cannot be found or 7750is empty. Maybe you need to install it? In the current directory 7751should work if nowhere else does.} 7752 7753% Set the catcode of characters 128 through 255 to the specified number. 7754% 7755\def\setnonasciicharscatcode#1{% 7756 \count255=128 7757 \loop\ifnum\count255<256 7758 \global\catcode\count255=#1\relax 7759 \advance\count255 by 1 7760 \repeat 7761} 7762 7763\def\setnonasciicharscatcodenonglobal#1{% 7764 \count255=128 7765 \loop\ifnum\count255<256 7766 \catcode\count255=#1\relax 7767 \advance\count255 by 1 7768 \repeat 7769} 7770 7771% @documentencoding sets the definition of non-ASCII characters 7772% according to the specified encoding. 7773% 7774\parseargdef\documentencoding{% 7775 % Encoding being declared for the document. 7776 \def\declaredencoding{\csname #1.enc\endcsname}% 7777 % 7778 % Supported encodings: names converted to tokens in order to be able 7779 % to compare them with \ifx. 7780 \def\ascii{\csname US-ASCII.enc\endcsname}% 7781 \def\latnine{\csname ISO-8859-15.enc\endcsname}% 7782 \def\latone{\csname ISO-8859-1.enc\endcsname}% 7783 \def\lattwo{\csname ISO-8859-2.enc\endcsname}% 7784 \def\utfeight{\csname UTF-8.enc\endcsname}% 7785 % 7786 \ifx \declaredencoding \ascii 7787 \asciichardefs 7788 % 7789 \else \ifx \declaredencoding \lattwo 7790 \setnonasciicharscatcode\active 7791 \lattwochardefs 7792 % 7793 \else \ifx \declaredencoding \latone 7794 \setnonasciicharscatcode\active 7795 \latonechardefs 7796 % 7797 \else \ifx \declaredencoding \latnine 7798 \setnonasciicharscatcode\active 7799 \latninechardefs 7800 % 7801 \else \ifx \declaredencoding \utfeight 7802 \setnonasciicharscatcode\active 7803 \utfeightchardefs 7804 % 7805 \else 7806 \message{Unknown document encoding #1, ignoring.}% 7807 % 7808 \fi % utfeight 7809 \fi % latnine 7810 \fi % latone 7811 \fi % lattwo 7812 \fi % ascii 7813} 7814 7815% A message to be logged when using a character that isn't available 7816% the default font encoding (OT1). 7817% 7818\def\missingcharmsg#1{\message{Character missing in OT1 encoding: #1.}} 7819 7820% Take account of \c (plain) vs. \, (Texinfo) difference. 7821\def\cedilla#1{\ifx\c\ptexc\c{#1}\else\,{#1}\fi} 7822 7823% First, make active non-ASCII characters in order for them to be 7824% correctly categorized when TeX reads the replacement text of 7825% macros containing the character definitions. 7826\setnonasciicharscatcode\active 7827% 7828% Latin1 (ISO-8859-1) character definitions. 7829\def\latonechardefs{% 7830 \gdef^^a0{~} 7831 \gdef^^a1{\exclamdown} 7832 \gdef^^a2{\missingcharmsg{CENT SIGN}} 7833 \gdef^^a3{{\pounds}} 7834 \gdef^^a4{\missingcharmsg{CURRENCY SIGN}} 7835 \gdef^^a5{\missingcharmsg{YEN SIGN}} 7836 \gdef^^a6{\missingcharmsg{BROKEN BAR}} 7837 \gdef^^a7{\S} 7838 \gdef^^a8{\"{}} 7839 \gdef^^a9{\copyright} 7840 \gdef^^aa{\ordf} 7841 \gdef^^ab{\missingcharmsg{LEFT-POINTING DOUBLE ANGLE QUOTATION MARK}} 7842 \gdef^^ac{$\lnot$} 7843 \gdef^^ad{\-} 7844 \gdef^^ae{\registeredsymbol} 7845 \gdef^^af{\={}} 7846 % 7847 \gdef^^b0{\textdegree} 7848 \gdef^^b1{$\pm$} 7849 \gdef^^b2{$^2$} 7850 \gdef^^b3{$^3$} 7851 \gdef^^b4{\'{}} 7852 \gdef^^b5{$\mu$} 7853 \gdef^^b6{\P} 7854 % 7855 \gdef^^b7{$^.$} 7856 \gdef^^b8{\cedilla\ } 7857 \gdef^^b9{$^1$} 7858 \gdef^^ba{\ordm} 7859 % 7860 \gdef^^bb{\missingcharmsg{RIGHT-POINTING DOUBLE ANGLE QUOTATION MARK}} 7861 \gdef^^bc{$1\over4$} 7862 \gdef^^bd{$1\over2$} 7863 \gdef^^be{$3\over4$} 7864 \gdef^^bf{\questiondown} 7865 % 7866 \gdef^^c0{\`A} 7867 \gdef^^c1{\'A} 7868 \gdef^^c2{\^A} 7869 \gdef^^c3{\~A} 7870 \gdef^^c4{\"A} 7871 \gdef^^c5{\ringaccent A} 7872 \gdef^^c6{\AE} 7873 \gdef^^c7{\cedilla C} 7874 \gdef^^c8{\`E} 7875 \gdef^^c9{\'E} 7876 \gdef^^ca{\^E} 7877 \gdef^^cb{\"E} 7878 \gdef^^cc{\`I} 7879 \gdef^^cd{\'I} 7880 \gdef^^ce{\^I} 7881 \gdef^^cf{\"I} 7882 % 7883 \gdef^^d0{\missingcharmsg{LATIN CAPITAL LETTER ETH}} 7884 \gdef^^d1{\~N} 7885 \gdef^^d2{\`O} 7886 \gdef^^d3{\'O} 7887 \gdef^^d4{\^O} 7888 \gdef^^d5{\~O} 7889 \gdef^^d6{\"O} 7890 \gdef^^d7{$\times$} 7891 \gdef^^d8{\O} 7892 \gdef^^d9{\`U} 7893 \gdef^^da{\'U} 7894 \gdef^^db{\^U} 7895 \gdef^^dc{\"U} 7896 \gdef^^dd{\'Y} 7897 \gdef^^de{\missingcharmsg{LATIN CAPITAL LETTER THORN}} 7898 \gdef^^df{\ss} 7899 % 7900 \gdef^^e0{\`a} 7901 \gdef^^e1{\'a} 7902 \gdef^^e2{\^a} 7903 \gdef^^e3{\~a} 7904 \gdef^^e4{\"a} 7905 \gdef^^e5{\ringaccent a} 7906 \gdef^^e6{\ae} 7907 \gdef^^e7{\cedilla c} 7908 \gdef^^e8{\`e} 7909 \gdef^^e9{\'e} 7910 \gdef^^ea{\^e} 7911 \gdef^^eb{\"e} 7912 \gdef^^ec{\`{\dotless i}} 7913 \gdef^^ed{\'{\dotless i}} 7914 \gdef^^ee{\^{\dotless i}} 7915 \gdef^^ef{\"{\dotless i}} 7916 % 7917 \gdef^^f0{\missingcharmsg{LATIN SMALL LETTER ETH}} 7918 \gdef^^f1{\~n} 7919 \gdef^^f2{\`o} 7920 \gdef^^f3{\'o} 7921 \gdef^^f4{\^o} 7922 \gdef^^f5{\~o} 7923 \gdef^^f6{\"o} 7924 \gdef^^f7{$\div$} 7925 \gdef^^f8{\o} 7926 \gdef^^f9{\`u} 7927 \gdef^^fa{\'u} 7928 \gdef^^fb{\^u} 7929 \gdef^^fc{\"u} 7930 \gdef^^fd{\'y} 7931 \gdef^^fe{\missingcharmsg{LATIN SMALL LETTER THORN}} 7932 \gdef^^ff{\"y} 7933} 7934 7935% Latin9 (ISO-8859-15) encoding character definitions. 7936\def\latninechardefs{% 7937 % Encoding is almost identical to Latin1. 7938 \latonechardefs 7939 % 7940 \gdef^^a4{\euro} 7941 \gdef^^a6{\v S} 7942 \gdef^^a8{\v s} 7943 \gdef^^b4{\v Z} 7944 \gdef^^b8{\v z} 7945 \gdef^^bc{\OE} 7946 \gdef^^bd{\oe} 7947 \gdef^^be{\"Y} 7948} 7949 7950% Latin2 (ISO-8859-2) character definitions. 7951\def\lattwochardefs{% 7952 \gdef^^a0{~} 7953 \gdef^^a1{\missingcharmsg{LATIN CAPITAL LETTER A WITH OGONEK}} 7954 \gdef^^a2{\u{}} 7955 \gdef^^a3{\L} 7956 \gdef^^a4{\missingcharmsg{CURRENCY SIGN}} 7957 \gdef^^a5{\v L} 7958 \gdef^^a6{\'S} 7959 \gdef^^a7{\S} 7960 \gdef^^a8{\"{}} 7961 \gdef^^a9{\v S} 7962 \gdef^^aa{\cedilla S} 7963 \gdef^^ab{\v T} 7964 \gdef^^ac{\'Z} 7965 \gdef^^ad{\-} 7966 \gdef^^ae{\v Z} 7967 \gdef^^af{\dotaccent Z} 7968 % 7969 \gdef^^b0{\textdegree} 7970 \gdef^^b1{\missingcharmsg{LATIN SMALL LETTER A WITH OGONEK}} 7971 \gdef^^b2{\missingcharmsg{OGONEK}} 7972 \gdef^^b3{\l} 7973 \gdef^^b4{\'{}} 7974 \gdef^^b5{\v l} 7975 \gdef^^b6{\'s} 7976 \gdef^^b7{\v{}} 7977 \gdef^^b8{\cedilla\ } 7978 \gdef^^b9{\v s} 7979 \gdef^^ba{\cedilla s} 7980 \gdef^^bb{\v t} 7981 \gdef^^bc{\'z} 7982 \gdef^^bd{\H{}} 7983 \gdef^^be{\v z} 7984 \gdef^^bf{\dotaccent z} 7985 % 7986 \gdef^^c0{\'R} 7987 \gdef^^c1{\'A} 7988 \gdef^^c2{\^A} 7989 \gdef^^c3{\u A} 7990 \gdef^^c4{\"A} 7991 \gdef^^c5{\'L} 7992 \gdef^^c6{\'C} 7993 \gdef^^c7{\cedilla C} 7994 \gdef^^c8{\v C} 7995 \gdef^^c9{\'E} 7996 \gdef^^ca{\missingcharmsg{LATIN CAPITAL LETTER E WITH OGONEK}} 7997 \gdef^^cb{\"E} 7998 \gdef^^cc{\v E} 7999 \gdef^^cd{\'I} 8000 \gdef^^ce{\^I} 8001 \gdef^^cf{\v D} 8002 % 8003 \gdef^^d0{\missingcharmsg{LATIN CAPITAL LETTER D WITH STROKE}} 8004 \gdef^^d1{\'N} 8005 \gdef^^d2{\v N} 8006 \gdef^^d3{\'O} 8007 \gdef^^d4{\^O} 8008 \gdef^^d5{\H O} 8009 \gdef^^d6{\"O} 8010 \gdef^^d7{$\times$} 8011 \gdef^^d8{\v R} 8012 \gdef^^d9{\ringaccent U} 8013 \gdef^^da{\'U} 8014 \gdef^^db{\H U} 8015 \gdef^^dc{\"U} 8016 \gdef^^dd{\'Y} 8017 \gdef^^de{\cedilla T} 8018 \gdef^^df{\ss} 8019 % 8020 \gdef^^e0{\'r} 8021 \gdef^^e1{\'a} 8022 \gdef^^e2{\^a} 8023 \gdef^^e3{\u a} 8024 \gdef^^e4{\"a} 8025 \gdef^^e5{\'l} 8026 \gdef^^e6{\'c} 8027 \gdef^^e7{\cedilla c} 8028 \gdef^^e8{\v c} 8029 \gdef^^e9{\'e} 8030 \gdef^^ea{\missingcharmsg{LATIN SMALL LETTER E WITH OGONEK}} 8031 \gdef^^eb{\"e} 8032 \gdef^^ec{\v e} 8033 \gdef^^ed{\'\i} 8034 \gdef^^ee{\^\i} 8035 \gdef^^ef{\v d} 8036 % 8037 \gdef^^f0{\missingcharmsg{LATIN SMALL LETTER D WITH STROKE}} 8038 \gdef^^f1{\'n} 8039 \gdef^^f2{\v n} 8040 \gdef^^f3{\'o} 8041 \gdef^^f4{\^o} 8042 \gdef^^f5{\H o} 8043 \gdef^^f6{\"o} 8044 \gdef^^f7{$\div$} 8045 \gdef^^f8{\v r} 8046 \gdef^^f9{\ringaccent u} 8047 \gdef^^fa{\'u} 8048 \gdef^^fb{\H u} 8049 \gdef^^fc{\"u} 8050 \gdef^^fd{\'y} 8051 \gdef^^fe{\cedilla t} 8052 \gdef^^ff{\dotaccent{}} 8053} 8054 8055% UTF-8 character definitions. 8056% 8057% This code to support UTF-8 is based on LaTeX's utf8.def, with some 8058% changes for Texinfo conventions. It is included here under the GPL by 8059% permission from Frank Mittelbach and the LaTeX team. 8060% 8061\newcount\countUTFx 8062\newcount\countUTFy 8063\newcount\countUTFz 8064 8065\gdef\UTFviiiTwoOctets#1#2{\expandafter 8066 \UTFviiiDefined\csname u8:#1\string #2\endcsname} 8067% 8068\gdef\UTFviiiThreeOctets#1#2#3{\expandafter 8069 \UTFviiiDefined\csname u8:#1\string #2\string #3\endcsname} 8070% 8071\gdef\UTFviiiFourOctets#1#2#3#4{\expandafter 8072 \UTFviiiDefined\csname u8:#1\string #2\string #3\string #4\endcsname} 8073 8074\gdef\UTFviiiDefined#1{% 8075 \ifx #1\relax 8076 \message{\linenumber Unicode char \string #1 not defined for Texinfo}% 8077 \else 8078 \expandafter #1% 8079 \fi 8080} 8081 8082\begingroup 8083 \catcode`\~13 8084 \catcode`\"12 8085 8086 \def\UTFviiiLoop{% 8087 \global\catcode\countUTFx\active 8088 \uccode`\~\countUTFx 8089 \uppercase\expandafter{\UTFviiiTmp}% 8090 \advance\countUTFx by 1 8091 \ifnum\countUTFx < \countUTFy 8092 \expandafter\UTFviiiLoop 8093 \fi} 8094 8095 \countUTFx = "C2 8096 \countUTFy = "E0 8097 \def\UTFviiiTmp{% 8098 \xdef~{\noexpand\UTFviiiTwoOctets\string~}} 8099 \UTFviiiLoop 8100 8101 \countUTFx = "E0 8102 \countUTFy = "F0 8103 \def\UTFviiiTmp{% 8104 \xdef~{\noexpand\UTFviiiThreeOctets\string~}} 8105 \UTFviiiLoop 8106 8107 \countUTFx = "F0 8108 \countUTFy = "F4 8109 \def\UTFviiiTmp{% 8110 \xdef~{\noexpand\UTFviiiFourOctets\string~}} 8111 \UTFviiiLoop 8112\endgroup 8113 8114\begingroup 8115 \catcode`\"=12 8116 \catcode`\<=12 8117 \catcode`\.=12 8118 \catcode`\,=12 8119 \catcode`\;=12 8120 \catcode`\!=12 8121 \catcode`\~=13 8122 8123 \gdef\DeclareUnicodeCharacter#1#2{% 8124 \countUTFz = "#1\relax 8125 \wlog{\space\space defining Unicode char U+#1 (decimal \the\countUTFz)}% 8126 \begingroup 8127 \parseXMLCharref 8128 \def\UTFviiiTwoOctets##1##2{% 8129 \csname u8:##1\string ##2\endcsname}% 8130 \def\UTFviiiThreeOctets##1##2##3{% 8131 \csname u8:##1\string ##2\string ##3\endcsname}% 8132 \def\UTFviiiFourOctets##1##2##3##4{% 8133 \csname u8:##1\string ##2\string ##3\string ##4\endcsname}% 8134 \expandafter\expandafter\expandafter\expandafter 8135 \expandafter\expandafter\expandafter 8136 \gdef\UTFviiiTmp{#2}% 8137 \endgroup} 8138 8139 \gdef\parseXMLCharref{% 8140 \ifnum\countUTFz < "A0\relax 8141 \errhelp = \EMsimple 8142 \errmessage{Cannot define Unicode char value < 00A0}% 8143 \else\ifnum\countUTFz < "800\relax 8144 \parseUTFviiiA,% 8145 \parseUTFviiiB C\UTFviiiTwoOctets.,% 8146 \else\ifnum\countUTFz < "10000\relax 8147 \parseUTFviiiA;% 8148 \parseUTFviiiA,% 8149 \parseUTFviiiB E\UTFviiiThreeOctets.{,;}% 8150 \else 8151 \parseUTFviiiA;% 8152 \parseUTFviiiA,% 8153 \parseUTFviiiA!% 8154 \parseUTFviiiB F\UTFviiiFourOctets.{!,;}% 8155 \fi\fi\fi 8156 } 8157 8158 \gdef\parseUTFviiiA#1{% 8159 \countUTFx = \countUTFz 8160 \divide\countUTFz by 64 8161 \countUTFy = \countUTFz 8162 \multiply\countUTFz by 64 8163 \advance\countUTFx by -\countUTFz 8164 \advance\countUTFx by 128 8165 \uccode `#1\countUTFx 8166 \countUTFz = \countUTFy} 8167 8168 \gdef\parseUTFviiiB#1#2#3#4{% 8169 \advance\countUTFz by "#10\relax 8170 \uccode `#3\countUTFz 8171 \uppercase{\gdef\UTFviiiTmp{#2#3#4}}} 8172\endgroup 8173 8174\def\utfeightchardefs{% 8175 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00A0}{\tie} 8176 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00A1}{\exclamdown} 8177 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00A3}{\pounds} 8178 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00A8}{\"{ }} 8179 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00A9}{\copyright} 8180 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00AA}{\ordf} 8181 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00AB}{\guillemetleft} 8182 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00AD}{\-} 8183 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00AE}{\registeredsymbol} 8184 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00AF}{\={ }} 8185 8186 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00B0}{\ringaccent{ }} 8187 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00B4}{\'{ }} 8188 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00B8}{\cedilla{ }} 8189 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00BA}{\ordm} 8190 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00BB}{\guillemetright} 8191 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00BF}{\questiondown} 8192 8193 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00C0}{\`A} 8194 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00C1}{\'A} 8195 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00C2}{\^A} 8196 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00C3}{\~A} 8197 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00C4}{\"A} 8198 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00C5}{\AA} 8199 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00C6}{\AE} 8200 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00C7}{\cedilla{C}} 8201 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00C8}{\`E} 8202 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00C9}{\'E} 8203 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00CA}{\^E} 8204 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00CB}{\"E} 8205 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00CC}{\`I} 8206 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00CD}{\'I} 8207 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00CE}{\^I} 8208 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00CF}{\"I} 8209 8210 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00D1}{\~N} 8211 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00D2}{\`O} 8212 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00D3}{\'O} 8213 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00D4}{\^O} 8214 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00D5}{\~O} 8215 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00D6}{\"O} 8216 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00D8}{\O} 8217 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00D9}{\`U} 8218 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00DA}{\'U} 8219 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00DB}{\^U} 8220 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00DC}{\"U} 8221 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00DD}{\'Y} 8222 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00DF}{\ss} 8223 8224 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00E0}{\`a} 8225 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00E1}{\'a} 8226 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00E2}{\^a} 8227 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00E3}{\~a} 8228 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00E4}{\"a} 8229 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00E5}{\aa} 8230 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00E6}{\ae} 8231 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00E7}{\cedilla{c}} 8232 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00E8}{\`e} 8233 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00E9}{\'e} 8234 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00EA}{\^e} 8235 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00EB}{\"e} 8236 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00EC}{\`{\dotless{i}}} 8237 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00ED}{\'{\dotless{i}}} 8238 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00EE}{\^{\dotless{i}}} 8239 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00EF}{\"{\dotless{i}}} 8240 8241 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00F1}{\~n} 8242 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00F2}{\`o} 8243 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00F3}{\'o} 8244 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00F4}{\^o} 8245 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00F5}{\~o} 8246 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00F6}{\"o} 8247 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00F8}{\o} 8248 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00F9}{\`u} 8249 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00FA}{\'u} 8250 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00FB}{\^u} 8251 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00FC}{\"u} 8252 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00FD}{\'y} 8253 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00FF}{\"y} 8254 8255 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0100}{\=A} 8256 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0101}{\=a} 8257 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0102}{\u{A}} 8258 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0103}{\u{a}} 8259 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0106}{\'C} 8260 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0107}{\'c} 8261 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0108}{\^C} 8262 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0109}{\^c} 8263 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{010A}{\dotaccent{C}} 8264 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{010B}{\dotaccent{c}} 8265 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{010C}{\v{C}} 8266 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{010D}{\v{c}} 8267 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{010E}{\v{D}} 8268 8269 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0112}{\=E} 8270 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0113}{\=e} 8271 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0114}{\u{E}} 8272 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0115}{\u{e}} 8273 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0116}{\dotaccent{E}} 8274 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0117}{\dotaccent{e}} 8275 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{011A}{\v{E}} 8276 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{011B}{\v{e}} 8277 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{011C}{\^G} 8278 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{011D}{\^g} 8279 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{011E}{\u{G}} 8280 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{011F}{\u{g}} 8281 8282 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0120}{\dotaccent{G}} 8283 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0121}{\dotaccent{g}} 8284 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0124}{\^H} 8285 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0125}{\^h} 8286 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0128}{\~I} 8287 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0129}{\~{\dotless{i}}} 8288 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{012A}{\=I} 8289 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{012B}{\={\dotless{i}}} 8290 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{012C}{\u{I}} 8291 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{012D}{\u{\dotless{i}}} 8292 8293 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0130}{\dotaccent{I}} 8294 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0131}{\dotless{i}} 8295 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0132}{IJ} 8296 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0133}{ij} 8297 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0134}{\^J} 8298 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0135}{\^{\dotless{j}}} 8299 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0139}{\'L} 8300 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{013A}{\'l} 8301 8302 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0141}{\L} 8303 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0142}{\l} 8304 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0143}{\'N} 8305 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0144}{\'n} 8306 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0147}{\v{N}} 8307 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0148}{\v{n}} 8308 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{014C}{\=O} 8309 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{014D}{\=o} 8310 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{014E}{\u{O}} 8311 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{014F}{\u{o}} 8312 8313 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0150}{\H{O}} 8314 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0151}{\H{o}} 8315 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0152}{\OE} 8316 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0153}{\oe} 8317 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0154}{\'R} 8318 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0155}{\'r} 8319 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0158}{\v{R}} 8320 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0159}{\v{r}} 8321 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{015A}{\'S} 8322 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{015B}{\'s} 8323 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{015C}{\^S} 8324 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{015D}{\^s} 8325 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{015E}{\cedilla{S}} 8326 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{015F}{\cedilla{s}} 8327 8328 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0160}{\v{S}} 8329 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0161}{\v{s}} 8330 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0162}{\cedilla{t}} 8331 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0163}{\cedilla{T}} 8332 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0164}{\v{T}} 8333 8334 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0168}{\~U} 8335 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0169}{\~u} 8336 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{016A}{\=U} 8337 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{016B}{\=u} 8338 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{016C}{\u{U}} 8339 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{016D}{\u{u}} 8340 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{016E}{\ringaccent{U}} 8341 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{016F}{\ringaccent{u}} 8342 8343 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0170}{\H{U}} 8344 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0171}{\H{u}} 8345 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0174}{\^W} 8346 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0175}{\^w} 8347 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0176}{\^Y} 8348 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0177}{\^y} 8349 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0178}{\"Y} 8350 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0179}{\'Z} 8351 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{017A}{\'z} 8352 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{017B}{\dotaccent{Z}} 8353 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{017C}{\dotaccent{z}} 8354 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{017D}{\v{Z}} 8355 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{017E}{\v{z}} 8356 8357 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01C4}{D\v{Z}} 8358 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01C5}{D\v{z}} 8359 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01C6}{d\v{z}} 8360 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01C7}{LJ} 8361 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01C8}{Lj} 8362 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01C9}{lj} 8363 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01CA}{NJ} 8364 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01CB}{Nj} 8365 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01CC}{nj} 8366 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01CD}{\v{A}} 8367 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01CE}{\v{a}} 8368 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01CF}{\v{I}} 8369 8370 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01D0}{\v{\dotless{i}}} 8371 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01D1}{\v{O}} 8372 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01D2}{\v{o}} 8373 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01D3}{\v{U}} 8374 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01D4}{\v{u}} 8375 8376 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01E2}{\={\AE}} 8377 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01E3}{\={\ae}} 8378 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01E6}{\v{G}} 8379 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01E7}{\v{g}} 8380 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01E8}{\v{K}} 8381 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01E9}{\v{k}} 8382 8383 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01F0}{\v{\dotless{j}}} 8384 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01F1}{DZ} 8385 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01F2}{Dz} 8386 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01F3}{dz} 8387 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01F4}{\'G} 8388 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01F5}{\'g} 8389 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01F8}{\`N} 8390 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01F9}{\`n} 8391 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01FC}{\'{\AE}} 8392 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01FD}{\'{\ae}} 8393 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01FE}{\'{\O}} 8394 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01FF}{\'{\o}} 8395 8396 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{021E}{\v{H}} 8397 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{021F}{\v{h}} 8398 8399 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0226}{\dotaccent{A}} 8400 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0227}{\dotaccent{a}} 8401 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0228}{\cedilla{E}} 8402 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0229}{\cedilla{e}} 8403 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{022E}{\dotaccent{O}} 8404 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{022F}{\dotaccent{o}} 8405 8406 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0232}{\=Y} 8407 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0233}{\=y} 8408 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0237}{\dotless{j}} 8409 8410 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E02}{\dotaccent{B}} 8411 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E03}{\dotaccent{b}} 8412 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E04}{\udotaccent{B}} 8413 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E05}{\udotaccent{b}} 8414 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E06}{\ubaraccent{B}} 8415 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E07}{\ubaraccent{b}} 8416 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E0A}{\dotaccent{D}} 8417 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E0B}{\dotaccent{d}} 8418 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E0C}{\udotaccent{D}} 8419 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E0D}{\udotaccent{d}} 8420 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E0E}{\ubaraccent{D}} 8421 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E0F}{\ubaraccent{d}} 8422 8423 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E1E}{\dotaccent{F}} 8424 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E1F}{\dotaccent{f}} 8425 8426 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E20}{\=G} 8427 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E21}{\=g} 8428 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E22}{\dotaccent{H}} 8429 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E23}{\dotaccent{h}} 8430 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E24}{\udotaccent{H}} 8431 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E25}{\udotaccent{h}} 8432 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E26}{\"H} 8433 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E27}{\"h} 8434 8435 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E30}{\'K} 8436 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E31}{\'k} 8437 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E32}{\udotaccent{K}} 8438 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E33}{\udotaccent{k}} 8439 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E34}{\ubaraccent{K}} 8440 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E35}{\ubaraccent{k}} 8441 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E36}{\udotaccent{L}} 8442 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E37}{\udotaccent{l}} 8443 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E3A}{\ubaraccent{L}} 8444 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E3B}{\ubaraccent{l}} 8445 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E3E}{\'M} 8446 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E3F}{\'m} 8447 8448 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E40}{\dotaccent{M}} 8449 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E41}{\dotaccent{m}} 8450 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E42}{\udotaccent{M}} 8451 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E43}{\udotaccent{m}} 8452 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E44}{\dotaccent{N}} 8453 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E45}{\dotaccent{n}} 8454 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E46}{\udotaccent{N}} 8455 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E47}{\udotaccent{n}} 8456 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E48}{\ubaraccent{N}} 8457 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E49}{\ubaraccent{n}} 8458 8459 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E54}{\'P} 8460 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E55}{\'p} 8461 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E56}{\dotaccent{P}} 8462 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E57}{\dotaccent{p}} 8463 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E58}{\dotaccent{R}} 8464 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E59}{\dotaccent{r}} 8465 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E5A}{\udotaccent{R}} 8466 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E5B}{\udotaccent{r}} 8467 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E5E}{\ubaraccent{R}} 8468 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E5F}{\ubaraccent{r}} 8469 8470 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E60}{\dotaccent{S}} 8471 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E61}{\dotaccent{s}} 8472 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E62}{\udotaccent{S}} 8473 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E63}{\udotaccent{s}} 8474 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E6A}{\dotaccent{T}} 8475 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E6B}{\dotaccent{t}} 8476 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E6C}{\udotaccent{T}} 8477 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E6D}{\udotaccent{t}} 8478 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E6E}{\ubaraccent{T}} 8479 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E6F}{\ubaraccent{t}} 8480 8481 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E7C}{\~V} 8482 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E7D}{\~v} 8483 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E7E}{\udotaccent{V}} 8484 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E7F}{\udotaccent{v}} 8485 8486 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E80}{\`W} 8487 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E81}{\`w} 8488 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E82}{\'W} 8489 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E83}{\'w} 8490 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E84}{\"W} 8491 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E85}{\"w} 8492 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E86}{\dotaccent{W}} 8493 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E87}{\dotaccent{w}} 8494 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E88}{\udotaccent{W}} 8495 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E89}{\udotaccent{w}} 8496 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E8A}{\dotaccent{X}} 8497 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E8B}{\dotaccent{x}} 8498 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E8C}{\"X} 8499 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E8D}{\"x} 8500 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E8E}{\dotaccent{Y}} 8501 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E8F}{\dotaccent{y}} 8502 8503 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E90}{\^Z} 8504 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E91}{\^z} 8505 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E92}{\udotaccent{Z}} 8506 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E93}{\udotaccent{z}} 8507 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E94}{\ubaraccent{Z}} 8508 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E95}{\ubaraccent{z}} 8509 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E96}{\ubaraccent{h}} 8510 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E97}{\"t} 8511 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E98}{\ringaccent{w}} 8512 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E99}{\ringaccent{y}} 8513 8514 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1EA0}{\udotaccent{A}} 8515 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1EA1}{\udotaccent{a}} 8516 8517 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1EB8}{\udotaccent{E}} 8518 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1EB9}{\udotaccent{e}} 8519 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1EBC}{\~E} 8520 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1EBD}{\~e} 8521 8522 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1ECA}{\udotaccent{I}} 8523 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1ECB}{\udotaccent{i}} 8524 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1ECC}{\udotaccent{O}} 8525 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1ECD}{\udotaccent{o}} 8526 8527 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1EE4}{\udotaccent{U}} 8528 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1EE5}{\udotaccent{u}} 8529 8530 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1EF2}{\`Y} 8531 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1EF3}{\`y} 8532 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1EF4}{\udotaccent{Y}} 8533 8534 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1EF8}{\~Y} 8535 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1EF9}{\~y} 8536 8537 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2013}{--} 8538 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2014}{---} 8539 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2018}{\quoteleft} 8540 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2019}{\quoteright} 8541 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{201A}{\quotesinglbase} 8542 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{201C}{\quotedblleft} 8543 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{201D}{\quotedblright} 8544 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{201E}{\quotedblbase} 8545 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2022}{\bullet} 8546 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2026}{\dots} 8547 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2039}{\guilsinglleft} 8548 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{203A}{\guilsinglright} 8549 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{20AC}{\euro} 8550 8551 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2192}{\expansion} 8552 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{21D2}{\result} 8553 8554 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2212}{\minus} 8555 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2217}{\point} 8556 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2261}{\equiv} 8557}% end of \utfeightchardefs 8558 8559 8560% US-ASCII character definitions. 8561\def\asciichardefs{% nothing need be done 8562 \relax 8563} 8564 8565% Make non-ASCII characters printable again for compatibility with 8566% existing Texinfo documents that may use them, even without declaring a 8567% document encoding. 8568% 8569\setnonasciicharscatcode \other 8570 8571 8572\message{formatting,} 8573 8574\newdimen\defaultparindent \defaultparindent = 15pt 8575 8576\chapheadingskip = 15pt plus 4pt minus 2pt 8577\secheadingskip = 12pt plus 3pt minus 2pt 8578\subsecheadingskip = 9pt plus 2pt minus 2pt 8579 8580% Prevent underfull vbox error messages. 8581\vbadness = 10000 8582 8583% Don't be so finicky about underfull hboxes, either. 8584\hbadness = 2000 8585 8586% Following George Bush, get rid of widows and orphans. 8587\widowpenalty=10000 8588\clubpenalty=10000 8589 8590% Use TeX 3.0's \emergencystretch to help line breaking, but if we're 8591% using an old version of TeX, don't do anything. We want the amount of 8592% stretch added to depend on the line length, hence the dependence on 8593% \hsize. We call this whenever the paper size is set. 8594% 8595\def\setemergencystretch{% 8596 \ifx\emergencystretch\thisisundefined 8597 % Allow us to assign to \emergencystretch anyway. 8598 \def\emergencystretch{\dimen0}% 8599 \else 8600 \emergencystretch = .15\hsize 8601 \fi 8602} 8603 8604% Parameters in order: 1) textheight; 2) textwidth; 8605% 3) voffset; 4) hoffset; 5) binding offset; 6) topskip; 8606% 7) physical page height; 8) physical page width. 8607% 8608% We also call \setleading{\textleading}, so the caller should define 8609% \textleading. The caller should also set \parskip. 8610% 8611\def\internalpagesizes#1#2#3#4#5#6#7#8{% 8612 \voffset = #3\relax 8613 \topskip = #6\relax 8614 \splittopskip = \topskip 8615 % 8616 \vsize = #1\relax 8617 \advance\vsize by \topskip 8618 \outervsize = \vsize 8619 \advance\outervsize by 2\topandbottommargin 8620 \pageheight = \vsize 8621 % 8622 \hsize = #2\relax 8623 \outerhsize = \hsize 8624 \advance\outerhsize by 0.5in 8625 \pagewidth = \hsize 8626 % 8627 \normaloffset = #4\relax 8628 \bindingoffset = #5\relax 8629 % 8630 \ifpdf 8631 \pdfpageheight #7\relax 8632 \pdfpagewidth #8\relax 8633 % if we don't reset these, they will remain at "1 true in" of 8634 % whatever layout pdftex was dumped with. 8635 \pdfhorigin = 1 true in 8636 \pdfvorigin = 1 true in 8637 \fi 8638 % 8639 \setleading{\textleading} 8640 % 8641 \parindent = \defaultparindent 8642 \setemergencystretch 8643} 8644 8645% @letterpaper (the default). 8646\def\letterpaper{{\globaldefs = 1 8647 \parskip = 3pt plus 2pt minus 1pt 8648 \textleading = 13.2pt 8649 % 8650 % If page is nothing but text, make it come out even. 8651 \internalpagesizes{607.2pt}{6in}% that's 46 lines 8652 {\voffset}{.25in}% 8653 {\bindingoffset}{36pt}% 8654 {11in}{8.5in}% 8655}} 8656 8657% Use @smallbook to reset parameters for 7x9.25 trim size. 8658\def\smallbook{{\globaldefs = 1 8659 \parskip = 2pt plus 1pt 8660 \textleading = 12pt 8661 % 8662 \internalpagesizes{7.5in}{5in}% 8663 {-.2in}{0in}% 8664 {\bindingoffset}{16pt}% 8665 {9.25in}{7in}% 8666 % 8667 \lispnarrowing = 0.3in 8668 \tolerance = 700 8669 \hfuzz = 1pt 8670 \contentsrightmargin = 0pt 8671 \defbodyindent = .5cm 8672}} 8673 8674% Use @smallerbook to reset parameters for 6x9 trim size. 8675% (Just testing, parameters still in flux.) 8676\def\smallerbook{{\globaldefs = 1 8677 \parskip = 1.5pt plus 1pt 8678 \textleading = 12pt 8679 % 8680 \internalpagesizes{7.4in}{4.8in}% 8681 {-.2in}{-.4in}% 8682 {0pt}{14pt}% 8683 {9in}{6in}% 8684 % 8685 \lispnarrowing = 0.25in 8686 \tolerance = 700 8687 \hfuzz = 1pt 8688 \contentsrightmargin = 0pt 8689 \defbodyindent = .4cm 8690}} 8691 8692% Use @afourpaper to print on European A4 paper. 8693\def\afourpaper{{\globaldefs = 1 8694 \parskip = 3pt plus 2pt minus 1pt 8695 \textleading = 13.2pt 8696 % 8697 % Double-side printing via postscript on Laserjet 4050 8698 % prints double-sided nicely when \bindingoffset=10mm and \hoffset=-6mm. 8699 % To change the settings for a different printer or situation, adjust 8700 % \normaloffset until the front-side and back-side texts align. Then 8701 % do the same for \bindingoffset. You can set these for testing in 8702 % your texinfo source file like this: 8703 % @tex 8704 % \global\normaloffset = -6mm 8705 % \global\bindingoffset = 10mm 8706 % @end tex 8707 \internalpagesizes{673.2pt}{160mm}% that's 51 lines 8708 {\voffset}{\hoffset}% 8709 {\bindingoffset}{44pt}% 8710 {297mm}{210mm}% 8711 % 8712 \tolerance = 700 8713 \hfuzz = 1pt 8714 \contentsrightmargin = 0pt 8715 \defbodyindent = 5mm 8716}} 8717 8718% Use @afivepaper to print on European A5 paper. 8719% From romildo@urano.iceb.ufop.br, 2 July 2000. 8720% He also recommends making @example and @lisp be small. 8721\def\afivepaper{{\globaldefs = 1 8722 \parskip = 2pt plus 1pt minus 0.1pt 8723 \textleading = 12.5pt 8724 % 8725 \internalpagesizes{160mm}{120mm}% 8726 {\voffset}{\hoffset}% 8727 {\bindingoffset}{8pt}% 8728 {210mm}{148mm}% 8729 % 8730 \lispnarrowing = 0.2in 8731 \tolerance = 800 8732 \hfuzz = 1.2pt 8733 \contentsrightmargin = 0pt 8734 \defbodyindent = 2mm 8735 \tableindent = 12mm 8736}} 8737 8738% A specific text layout, 24x15cm overall, intended for A4 paper. 8739\def\afourlatex{{\globaldefs = 1 8740 \afourpaper 8741 \internalpagesizes{237mm}{150mm}% 8742 {\voffset}{4.6mm}% 8743 {\bindingoffset}{7mm}% 8744 {297mm}{210mm}% 8745 % 8746 % Must explicitly reset to 0 because we call \afourpaper. 8747 \globaldefs = 0 8748}} 8749 8750% Use @afourwide to print on A4 paper in landscape format. 8751\def\afourwide{{\globaldefs = 1 8752 \afourpaper 8753 \internalpagesizes{241mm}{165mm}% 8754 {\voffset}{-2.95mm}% 8755 {\bindingoffset}{7mm}% 8756 {297mm}{210mm}% 8757 \globaldefs = 0 8758}} 8759 8760% @pagesizes TEXTHEIGHT[,TEXTWIDTH] 8761% Perhaps we should allow setting the margins, \topskip, \parskip, 8762% and/or leading, also. Or perhaps we should compute them somehow. 8763% 8764\parseargdef\pagesizes{\pagesizesyyy #1,,\finish} 8765\def\pagesizesyyy#1,#2,#3\finish{{% 8766 \setbox0 = \hbox{\ignorespaces #2}\ifdim\wd0 > 0pt \hsize=#2\relax \fi 8767 \globaldefs = 1 8768 % 8769 \parskip = 3pt plus 2pt minus 1pt 8770 \setleading{\textleading}% 8771 % 8772 \dimen0 = #1\relax 8773 \advance\dimen0 by \voffset 8774 % 8775 \dimen2 = \hsize 8776 \advance\dimen2 by \normaloffset 8777 % 8778 \internalpagesizes{#1}{\hsize}% 8779 {\voffset}{\normaloffset}% 8780 {\bindingoffset}{44pt}% 8781 {\dimen0}{\dimen2}% 8782}} 8783 8784% Set default to letter. 8785% 8786\letterpaper 8787 8788 8789\message{and turning on texinfo input format.} 8790 8791% Define macros to output various characters with catcode for normal text. 8792\catcode`\"=\other 8793\catcode`\~=\other 8794\catcode`\^=\other 8795\catcode`\_=\other 8796\catcode`\|=\other 8797\catcode`\<=\other 8798\catcode`\>=\other 8799\catcode`\+=\other 8800\catcode`\$=\other 8801\def\normaldoublequote{"} 8802\def\normaltilde{~} 8803\def\normalcaret{^} 8804\def\normalunderscore{_} 8805\def\normalverticalbar{|} 8806\def\normalless{<} 8807\def\normalgreater{>} 8808\def\normalplus{+} 8809\def\normaldollar{$}%$ font-lock fix 8810 8811% This macro is used to make a character print one way in \tt 8812% (where it can probably be output as-is), and another way in other fonts, 8813% where something hairier probably needs to be done. 8814% 8815% #1 is what to print if we are indeed using \tt; #2 is what to print 8816% otherwise. Since all the Computer Modern typewriter fonts have zero 8817% interword stretch (and shrink), and it is reasonable to expect all 8818% typewriter fonts to have this, we can check that font parameter. 8819% 8820\def\ifusingtt#1#2{\ifdim \fontdimen3\font=0pt #1\else #2\fi} 8821 8822% Same as above, but check for italic font. Actually this also catches 8823% non-italic slanted fonts since it is impossible to distinguish them from 8824% italic fonts. But since this is only used by $ and it uses \sl anyway 8825% this is not a problem. 8826\def\ifusingit#1#2{\ifdim \fontdimen1\font>0pt #1\else #2\fi} 8827 8828% Turn off all special characters except @ 8829% (and those which the user can use as if they were ordinary). 8830% Most of these we simply print from the \tt font, but for some, we can 8831% use math or other variants that look better in normal text. 8832 8833\catcode`\"=\active 8834\def\activedoublequote{{\tt\char34}} 8835\let"=\activedoublequote 8836\catcode`\~=\active 8837\def~{{\tt\char126}} 8838\chardef\hat=`\^ 8839\catcode`\^=\active 8840\def^{{\tt \hat}} 8841 8842\catcode`\_=\active 8843\def_{\ifusingtt\normalunderscore\_} 8844\let\realunder=_ 8845% Subroutine for the previous macro. 8846\def\_{\leavevmode \kern.07em \vbox{\hrule width.3em height.1ex}\kern .07em } 8847 8848\catcode`\|=\active 8849\def|{{\tt\char124}} 8850\chardef \less=`\< 8851\catcode`\<=\active 8852\def<{{\tt \less}} 8853\chardef \gtr=`\> 8854\catcode`\>=\active 8855\def>{{\tt \gtr}} 8856\catcode`\+=\active 8857\def+{{\tt \char 43}} 8858\catcode`\$=\active 8859\def${\ifusingit{{\sl\$}}\normaldollar}%$ font-lock fix 8860 8861% If a .fmt file is being used, characters that might appear in a file 8862% name cannot be active until we have parsed the command line. 8863% So turn them off again, and have \everyjob (or @setfilename) turn them on. 8864% \otherifyactive is called near the end of this file. 8865\def\otherifyactive{\catcode`+=\other \catcode`\_=\other} 8866 8867% Used sometimes to turn off (effectively) the active characters even after 8868% parsing them. 8869\def\turnoffactive{% 8870 \normalturnoffactive 8871 \otherbackslash 8872} 8873 8874\catcode`\@=0 8875 8876% \backslashcurfont outputs one backslash character in current font, 8877% as in \char`\\. 8878\global\chardef\backslashcurfont=`\\ 8879\global\let\rawbackslashxx=\backslashcurfont % let existing .??s files work 8880 8881% \realbackslash is an actual character `\' with catcode other, and 8882% \doublebackslash is two of them (for the pdf outlines). 8883{\catcode`\\=\other @gdef@realbackslash{\} @gdef@doublebackslash{\\}} 8884 8885% In texinfo, backslash is an active character; it prints the backslash 8886% in fixed width font. 8887\catcode`\\=\active 8888@def@normalbackslash{{@tt@backslashcurfont}} 8889% On startup, @fixbackslash assigns: 8890% @let \ = @normalbackslash 8891 8892% \rawbackslash defines an active \ to do \backslashcurfont. 8893% \otherbackslash defines an active \ to be a literal `\' character with 8894% catcode other. 8895@gdef@rawbackslash{@let\=@backslashcurfont} 8896@gdef@otherbackslash{@let\=@realbackslash} 8897 8898% Same as @turnoffactive except outputs \ as {\tt\char`\\} instead of 8899% the literal character `\'. 8900% 8901@def@normalturnoffactive{% 8902 @let\=@normalbackslash 8903 @let"=@normaldoublequote 8904 @let~=@normaltilde 8905 @let^=@normalcaret 8906 @let_=@normalunderscore 8907 @let|=@normalverticalbar 8908 @let<=@normalless 8909 @let>=@normalgreater 8910 @let+=@normalplus 8911 @let$=@normaldollar %$ font-lock fix 8912 @unsepspaces 8913} 8914 8915% Make _ and + \other characters, temporarily. 8916% This is canceled by @fixbackslash. 8917@otherifyactive 8918 8919% If a .fmt file is being used, we don't want the `\input texinfo' to show up. 8920% That is what \eatinput is for; after that, the `\' should revert to printing 8921% a backslash. 8922% 8923@gdef@eatinput input texinfo{@fixbackslash} 8924@global@let\ = @eatinput 8925 8926% On the other hand, perhaps the file did not have a `\input texinfo'. Then 8927% the first `\' in the file would cause an error. This macro tries to fix 8928% that, assuming it is called before the first `\' could plausibly occur. 8929% Also turn back on active characters that might appear in the input 8930% file name, in case not using a pre-dumped format. 8931% 8932@gdef@fixbackslash{% 8933 @ifx\@eatinput @let\ = @normalbackslash @fi 8934 @catcode`+=@active 8935 @catcode`@_=@active 8936} 8937 8938% Say @foo, not \foo, in error messages. 8939@escapechar = `@@ 8940 8941% These look ok in all fonts, so just make them not special. 8942@catcode`@& = @other 8943@catcode`@# = @other 8944@catcode`@% = @other 8945 8946 8947@c Local variables: 8948@c eval: (add-hook 'write-file-hooks 'time-stamp) 8949@c page-delimiter: "^\\\\message" 8950@c time-stamp-start: "def\\\\texinfoversion{" 8951@c time-stamp-format: "%:y-%02m-%02d.%02H" 8952@c time-stamp-end: "}" 8953@c End: 8954 8955@c vim:sw=2: 8956 8957@ignore 8958 arch-tag: e1b36e32-c96e-4135-a41a-0b2efa2ea115 8959@end ignore 8960